JP5775901B2 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player, such as paying out a prize ball.

  In addition, in such a game stand, a single winning / failing determination is made based on a single winning of a game ball to the starting opening, and if the determination result is a specific winning / failing determination result, a variable winning is determined. A game state advantageous to the player is generated, for example, by opening the mouth for a predetermined time (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).

  In the game machine, the interest of the game machine is improved by increasing or decreasing the opportunities for the player to obtain the above-mentioned benefits by controlling the occurrence of a game state advantageous to the player.

  In such a game machine, the symbol variation display is performed before displaying the result of the determination. Normally, if a game ball wins a winning slot while the symbol variation display is being performed, the determination of success / failure based on the winning is made until the symbol variation display ends and the result of the success / failure determination is displayed. Start is deferred. The player is currently interested in how many times the start of the success / failure determination is held, and the game table displays the current number of holds.

Some game consoles display a display indicating the current number of suspensions as one of the effects on the display means such as a liquid crystal display device as a start suspension display, and are trying to enhance the fun of the game. Further, in recent game machines, it is desired to further enhance the interest of games.

JP 2009-254495 A Japanese Patent No. 4368929

The conventional game stand has room for improvement in display means .

In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means .

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
And Table viewable display means a plurality of types of icons,
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game machine equipped with
At least a part of the area in the display means is an icon display area,
At least a part of the icon display area is a first display area,
At least a part of the icon display area is a second display area,
The display means is means for displaying the number of suspensions by the number of icons displayed in the second display area,
One of the icons displayed in the second display area is displayed in the first display area in the display means when the symbol variation display is started,
The display means, the first display is a table viewable means,
The display means is a table viewable means a second display,
The display means, the third display a table viewable means,
The first display is a display including a first icon,
The first display is a display including a second icon,
The first icon is an icon displayed in the icon display area,
The second icon is an icon displayed in the second display area,
The second display means that the display mode of the first icon in the first display (hereinafter referred to as “first mode”) is the display mode of the second icon in the first display. (Hereinafter referred to as “the second aspect”) is a display including a display that changes,
The second display is a display including a display in which the second aspect changes to the first aspect .
Before SL and the third display is that of a display that the first embodiment includes a display that changes to the second embodiment,
The third display is a display in which the second aspect does not change to the first aspect .
The second display is a display configured to be displayed after the first animation is displayed on the display means,
When the first animation is displayed on the display means, Ri there when at least a portion of the first animation overlaps at least a portion of the other icons displayed in the icon display area,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the first display, the second display may be displayed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the onset bright, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a feature in the display unit.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first exemplary embodiment of the present description as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this explanation. It is an example of the display pattern in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st example form of this description, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display design of special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display design of special figure 2 An example is shown, (c) is an example of a decorative design, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description was equipped. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a figure which shows the example of the special figure determination table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer number selection table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. Example of variation type of each variation timer for each timer number in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first exemplary embodiment of the present description, a timer group to which each variation timer belongs, and an effect type that can be executed during the variation time using each variation timer FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is. The flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the internal structure of ROM406 and VRAM436 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a figure which shows the flow of the image drawing process at the time of reproducing the movie A and displaying a texture image superimposed on the said movie A in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a figure which shows the flow of the image drawing process at the time of displaying the texture image which appears from the outside of a display area in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a figure which shows the example of the standby animation of the hold icon in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is. The flow of the second sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the presentation control process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the pending | holding icon display control processing in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the change icon display control process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display aspect lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display aspect lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display aspect lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display aspect lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a figure which shows the example of the fluctuation | variation icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st illustration form of this description. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-1 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-1 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-2 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-2 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-3 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-3 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-4 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-4 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-5 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-5 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-6 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-6 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-7 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-7 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-8 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-8 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-9 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-10 of the 1st illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-1 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-1 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-2 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-2 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-3 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-3 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-4 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-4 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-5 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-5 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-6 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-6 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-7 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-7 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-8 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-8 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-9 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-10 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-10 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-11 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-11 of the 2nd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-1 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-1 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-2 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-3 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-4 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-5 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-6 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-7 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-8 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-9 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-10 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-11 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-12 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-13 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-14 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-15 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-16 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-17 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-17 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect display in Example 3-17 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-18 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-19 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-20 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-20 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-21 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-21 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-22 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-22 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-23 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-24 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-25 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-26 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-27 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-28 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-29 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-30 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-30 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. In the 3rd example form of this description, it is a figure which shows the example by which the hold icon of special figure 1 and the hold icon of special figure 2 were displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-31 of the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure explaining the phenomenon which may arise when an image is reduced in the 3rd example form of this explanation. It is a figure explaining what kind of texture data should be provided when displaying the animation which expands and contracts an image in the 3rd example form of this explanation. It is a figure explaining the phenomenon which may occur when transparency is changed in the 3rd example form of this explanation. It is a figure explaining the overlap display between hold icons or between a hold icon and another image in the 3rd example form of this explanation. It is a figure which shows the example of the animation of the holding | maintenance icon in the 3rd example form of this description. It is a figure which shows the example of the animation of the holding | maintenance icon in the 3rd example form of this description. It is a figure which shows the example of the animation of the holding | maintenance icon in the 3rd example form of this description. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold display in the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold display in the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows another example of the hold display in the 3rd illustration form of this description in time series. It is a figure which shows the modification of the kind of the special figure in the 3rd example form of this description, a decoration design, and a common figure. It is the appearance perspective view which looked at pachinko machine # 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at game board # 200 from the front side (player side). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) shows an example of a special symbol stop symbol, (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol, and (c) shows an example of an ordinary stop symbol. It is. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for success / failure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for success / failure determination, (c) is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination. It is a figure which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation time determination table. It is a figure which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU # 404 of the first sub-control unit # 400, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit # 400, (c) These are the flowcharts of the timer interruption process of 1st sub-control part # 400. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process regarding special figure 2 among special figure prefetch processes. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process regarding Special Figure 1 among special figure prefetch processes. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the sub side prefetch notice execution process at the time of a start winning prize. It is a figure which shows the display mode of a hold display. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the sub start notice execution process at the time of a change start, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the display mode change process of step S3092c. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode change lottery table memorize | stored in ROM # 406 of 1st sub-control part # 400. It is a figure which shows the example which performed the display mode change process during the symbol fluctuation display of a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the start winning time sub side prefetching notice execution process which is a modification of the starting winning time sub side prefetching notice execution process shown in FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the pending | holding change lottery table memorize | stored in ROM # 406 of 1st sub-control part # 400, (b) is memorize | stored in ROM # 406 of 1st sub-control part # 400. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a pending change lottery table used when a prefetch execution flag is on. It is a figure for demonstrating the display aspect of a hold display when the exchangeable flag is set to ON, and when it remains OFF. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the start winning time sub-side pre-reading notice execution process, which is a modification of the variation disclosure sub-side pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 132 (a), and (b) is the first flowchart. It is a figure which shows the display mode replacement lottery table memorize | stored in ROM # 406 of sub-control part # 400. It is a figure which shows the example by which replacement of a hold display is performed in the state where the hold display of a prefetch display mode is non-displaying. It is a figure which shows the example which the display mode of a hold display changes also in a digestion hold display area. It is a figure which shows the example which the change to a special display mode moves toward the hold display showing an old hold from the hold display showing a new hold. It is a figure which shows the example which is not displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus # 208, but is displayed on an exclusive display means on hold display. It is a figure which shows the example which changes the display mode of a hold display at the timing which covered the special figure hold display area where a hold display is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example which replaces the display mode of a hold display according to operation of a predetermined operation means. It is a figure which shows the example which varied whether the display mode of a hold display was changed according to the operation timing of a predetermined operation means. It is a figure which shows the example using two types of special display modes from which an expectation degree differs. It is a figure which shows the example different from FIG. 146 in which the hold display of a 1st special display mode and the hold display of a 2nd special display mode appear. It is a figure which shows the example in which a display mode changes after a hold display once disappears. It is a figure which shows the example in which the hold display of a special display mode changes.

  Conventionally, there has been a game machine that changes the display mode of the hold icon as a pre-reading notice.

  However, since the display of the hold icon is erased at the start of the change in the conventional game machine, it is difficult to understand what the notice for the change was, and the player pays more attention to the hold icon than the change. There was a problem that.

Therefore, a description will first be given of a game machine that can effectively improve the interest of the player by executing a highly continuous notice.
[First exemplary form]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the first exemplary embodiment of the present description will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present exemplary embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 that launches the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the chance to change the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 1) by the player's operation. To the button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that can be set by a setting person (for example, a player or a game clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, and the like need to be changed for each model, and thus are provided on the back of the game board 200. The outer frame 102 is provided for common use.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 in this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, the ease of entering a ball in the ordinary figure starting port 228, special figure 1 starting port 230, special figure 2 starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later, is as follows. The game ball that falls on the right path is different from the game ball that falls on the left path.

  About each of the normal figure start port 228, the special figure 2 start port 232, and the variable prize opening 235, the general figure start port 228, the special figure 2 start opening 232, and the variable prize opening 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the variable winning port 234, due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like, the entrance of the game ball falling on the left path is relative. It is relatively easy to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the illustrated embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but other than a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present exemplary embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four symbol display regions 208a, a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, a fourth symbol display region 208e, and an effect display region 208d. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208 e is fixed at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 3, one 4th symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is provided (two in total), but both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are provided. There may be provided only one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The universal map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a universal map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present exemplary embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present exemplary embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this example, the general-purpose variable game is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In this exemplary embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are provided. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 and 235 are disposed.

  In the present exemplary embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a winning at the general winning opening 226 (wins at the general winning opening 226). In this case, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present exemplary embodiment, the game ball is a ball to be paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “prize ball”), and a ball lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). Is included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the illustrated embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the illustrated embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in the present exemplary embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the illustrated embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148, and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Winning out the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting port 228 To reach.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 4) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors An image stored in the ROM 406 based on a sensor circuit 428 output to the basic circuit 402 and a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads over data or the like to display an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208, a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present exemplary embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIG. 5A to FIG. 5D, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variable display of special figure 1” and “variable display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the graphic variable display in the present exemplary embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. The stop display is equivalent to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the present exemplary embodiment. Hereinafter, after the “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5A shows five types of special illustrations “special drawing A” to “special drawing E” as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing 1. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present exemplary embodiment, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, and is a special diagram high probability normal diagram low probability state. “Special figure C” is 2R and does not shift to the time reduction state.

  “Special figure D” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, “special drawing E” is an off symbol, and is a symbol with a relatively small advantage to the player.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missed symbol. In the present exemplary embodiment, five types of special charts “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are used as the stop symbol form of Special Figure 1, whereas the special pattern 2 is “Special Figure”. Four types of special maps “a” to “special map d” are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where a difference can be provided between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable. In this example, the advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1. For example, the jackpot of special figure 1 includes a latent probability change (special figure C) in which almost no ball is obtained, whereas the jackpot of special figure 2 does not include a latent probability change.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present exemplary embodiment, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  Then, the 15R special jackpot for "Special Figure A", the 15R big jackpot for "Special Figure B", the 16R special jackpot for "Special Figure a", the 8R special jackpot for "Special Figure b", and the 8R big jackpot for "Special Figure c" In the case of notification, the combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped. indicate. When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 16R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying the 2R big hit called “latency probability change (hidden probability change)” of “special drawing C” or the small hit of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” or “decoration” “1-decoration 3-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the special symbol E and the special symbol d, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stoppage display modes of the usual figure of this exemplary form, “general figure A” which is a winning symbol and “common figure B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present exemplary embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, three initial value generations for generating the initial values of the three random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value respectively. The random number counter for use and the two random number counters for generating each of the random number value for determining the usual figure variation time and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation time are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present exemplary embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present exemplary embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). If it matches with the information (indicating that there is), the entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary figure starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present exemplary embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Three random number counters for generating one random value and one special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the initial value storage area described above for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number for generating a regular figure has made one round next, a random number counter for generating a special figure 1 random value and a special figure 2 random value The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the generation random number counters has made one round. In the present exemplary embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  If a win is received at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Are stored in the corresponding ordinary random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234, 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (d)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the result of the usual figure variation game is won or not by the random lottery based on the usual figure winning random number value stored in the above random number value storage area. Make a hit judgment. In the case of winning, the flag for the usual figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and in the case of not winning, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the random time value for determining the normal fluctuation time described above is acquired as the random value for determining the normal fluctuation time, and the acquired normal fluctuation time is determined. Based on the random number value, one time for displaying the variable map on the general map display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as a normal map variable display time in the RAM 308. Store in the variable time storage area. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the general figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending general figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has flags such as a 16R big hit flag, a 15R big hit flag, an 8R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, an outlier flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and an ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag. It is prepared. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 16R big hit flag is on 5 (b) shows that the special figure a, the 8R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure b, the 8R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability variation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 16 rounds or 8 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2 and 15 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and is started at the end timing. In the special figure 2 state update processing, in order to set to wait for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In addition, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. Special figure B when figure probability fluctuation flag is off Special figure C when 2R big hit flag is on Special figure D when small hit flag is on Special figure D when special flag is on, Special figure when off flag is on E The 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in each mode, and a setting indicating that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to E. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1) using the determination table (see FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d) described later). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the determined success / failure determination result, and the like, a special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 11A described later). ) And (b)) are used to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) shown in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (see FIGS. 12 and 13 described later).

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are put on hold is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present exemplary embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-read is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result. Further, the start information and the prefetch result of each special figure may be stored in one start information and the prefetch result storage unit without providing an area for storing the start information and the prefetch result for each special figure. good.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present exemplary embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, “special symbol E” (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and “special symbol E” is stored as stop symbol information in the storage region “hold 2”. ”(Out of line) is stored,“ Special Figure D ”(small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 3 ”, and“ Special Figure A ”is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 4 ”. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present exemplary embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure 2 variable games that can be held. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 9B, a state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are pre-determined and only stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the determination result, the variable timer number (variable time), the timer group described later, The information may be determined in advance and stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present exemplary embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 10 to 13 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. FIGS. 10A to 10D show an example of the determination table used when determining whether or not the lottery process is related to the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). Yes. The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 164). / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a), the big hit probability is about 10 times and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10C, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10D, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are examples of a special figure determination table used when determining a stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Show. The special figure determination table shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B is composed of items of “result of determination / non-response”, “random number range”, and “stop symbol”. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 random value or special figure 1 random value. The range that can be taken by the special figure 2 random value and the special figure 1 random value in this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  FIG. 11A shows a special figure determination table for special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11 (a), in the special figure 1 variable game of this example, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 25% for special figure A (15R special big hit) and 25% for special figure B (15R big hit). %, And special figure C (latency probability change) is 50%. The ratio of probability change jackpots (Special Figure A, Special Figure C) in the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability change probability is 75%. Moreover, the round ratio in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game is 50% for 15R and 50% for 2R.

  In the present exemplary embodiment, there is only one kind of small hit symbol of special figure 1, so if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a special symbol, the stop symbol is special figure D regardless of the special figure 1 random value. To be determined. Also, since there is only one type of missed symbol, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a special symbol E regardless of the special figure 1 random value. In FIG. 1, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided, and another symbol may be determined based on the result of random number lottery.

  FIG. 11B shows a special figure determination table for special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 11 (b), in the special figure 2 variable game of this example, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for special figure a (16R special big hit), and special figure b (8R special big hit) is 5%, and special figure c (8R big hit) is 25%. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figure a, special figure b) in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75% as in FIG. Further, the round ratio in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game is 70% for 16R and 30% for 8R.

  In the present exemplary embodiment, there is only one type of out-of-order symbol in special figure 2. Therefore, when the result of determining whether or not special figure 2 variable game is successful, the stop symbol is determined as special figure d regardless of the special figure 2 random number value. Is done. In FIG. 2, it is also possible to provide a plurality of different symbols and determine another symbol based on the result of random lottery.

  FIG. 12 shows an example of the timer number selection table. The timer number selection table is used when determining the timer number in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). In the present exemplary embodiment, a plurality of types of timer number selection tables are provided, and one timer number selection table is selected based on various conditions such as the game state at the time of determination of success / failure and the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2. . FIG. 12 shows only the timer number selection table for the special figure 1 that is selected when the time of determination of success / failure is during non-electric support.

  In the timer number selection table shown in FIG. 12, the variation timer (timer number) can be determined based on the stop symbol, the number of holds in FIG. 1 and the random number value for determining the special diagram variation time. Here, the possible values of the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time in this example are 0 to 65535. When the stop symbol is special figure E, when the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0, the timer number is determined as one of timers 3 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 based on the random number value for determining special figure fluctuation time. When the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 1 or more (1 to 3 in this example), the timer number is one of the timers 2 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 based on the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time. It is determined. In this example, when the stop symbol is special figure E, the selection probability of each variable timer differs depending on the number of holdings in special figure 1, and the distribution of the variable timers also differs. For example, timer 2 can be selected when the number of holds is 1 or more, but is not selected when the number of holds is 0.

  As will be described later, the timers 6 to 22 are variable timers (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “variable timers greater than reach”) capable of executing effects of so-called reach or higher. In the table shown in FIG. 12, when the stop symbol is special figure E, the probability that a variable timer of reach or higher is selected when the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0 (reach occurrence probability) is about 1/8 (reach occurrence probability). = 8536/65536), and the probability that a variation timer of reach or higher is selected when the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 or more is approximately 1/32 (= 2036/65536). In this way, in this example, when the number of holdings is large (for example, when the number of holdings is 1 or more), the special figure variation is activated, and the reach occurrence probability due to the deviation fluctuation becomes lower as the number of holdings is larger. Yes.

  When the stop symbol is special figure A or special figure B, the timer numbers of timers 8 to 10, 14, 15, 18 to 22 are based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation time regardless of the number of holdings of special figure 1. Decide on either. When the stop symbol is special figure C or special figure D, the timer number is determined by the timer 10 or 14 based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation time regardless of the number of holdings in the special figure 1. Even in the case where the stop symbol is special figure A to special figure D, the selection probability and distribution of each variable timer may be varied depending on the number of holdings in special figure 1.

  FIG. 13 illustrates an example of the variation time of each variation timer for each timer number, the timer group to which each variation timer belongs, and the effect type that can be executed during the variation time using each variation timer. As shown in FIG. 13, the timers 1 to 5 have a variation time of 2000 to 10000 ms and belong to the timer group 1 (immediately a shift system). The timers 6 and 7 have a fluctuation time of 20000 to 45000 ms, and belong to the timer group 2 (expected small). The timers 8 to 10 have a fluctuating time of 15000 to 55000 ms and belong to the timer group 3 (small expectation: hit). The timers 11 to 13 have a fluctuation time of 70000 to 100000 ms and belong to the timer group 4 (expected: missed). The timers 14 and 15 have a fluctuation time of 80000 to 95000 ms and belong to the timer group 5 (expected: hit). The timers 16 and 17 have a fluctuation time of 120,000 to 150,000 ms, and belong to the timer group 6 (expected large: disappointing). The timers 18 to 22 have a fluctuation time of 105,000 to 300,000 ms and belong to the timer group 7 (expected large: hit).

  In this example, the timers 6 to 22 are reachable or more variable timers. Timers 1 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 are variation timers that are selected when the determination result of the variation is out of order, and timers 8 to 10, 14, 15, and 18 to 22 are It is a variation timer that is selected when the variation determination result is a win. When comparing variation timers that can execute the same effect type, the variation timer that is selected at the time of winning is more variable than the variation timer that is selected at the time of losing so that the winning effect can be executed after the symbol stop display. Is longer by a predetermined time (for example, 10,000 ms). For example, comparing the timer 6 and the timer 9 capable of producing a normal reach, the timer 9 selected at the time of winning has a fluctuation time of 10,000 ms longer than the timer 6 selected at the time of loss. In the special figure variable game in which the timer 6 is selected and the special figure variable game in which the timer 9 is selected, the normal reach effect in the same manner is possible until immediately before the symbol stops, and in the special figure variable game in which the timer 9 is selected, the symbol A predetermined winning game can be executed after the stop.

  Note that the timer number and the effect type do not necessarily correspond one-on-one, and a plurality of effect modes may be provided for one timer number. For example, when a certain timer is selected, in the effect control process of the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, a determination based on a predetermined condition, a lottery using an effect random number, etc. You may make it select the production | presentation aspect performed with the change time of a timer from several production | presentation aspects. In addition, even if the timer numbers (variation times) are different, it may be possible to provide an effect type such that some aspects are common.

  Further, in this example, when the timers 6 to 22 are selected, an effect more than reach is executed, but whether or not an effect more than reach is executed does not necessarily depend on the timer number. . For example, the lottery for the timer number and the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the reach or higher effect may be performed independently. The lottery for determining whether or not to perform the reach or more may be performed by the main control unit 300 or the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14A is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 14A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 14B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 14C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 14D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the ROM 406 and the VRAM 436 before image data is expanded in the VRAM 436. As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 reads out the ROM 406 for storing the control program and the image data, the VRAM 436 for temporarily storing the image data, and the image data stored in the ROM 406. A VDP 434 that generates a display image using a storage area of the VRAM 436 and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition to the control program, the ROM 406 stores in advance image data such as compressed movie data (compressed moving image data) and texture data including still images. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 15, there are three types of movie data, that is, movie data MVa for movie A, movie data MVb for movie B, movie data MVc for movie C, and a plurality of such as texture data T001 and texture data T002. Are stored in the ROM 406. In addition to these data, the ROM 406 previously stores control information including the resolution (image size) of movie data. In this example, the information indicating that the resolution of the movie data MVa is 1280 × 960, the information indicating that the resolution of the movie data MVb is 1024 × 768, and the resolution of the movie data MVc is 800 × 600. And control information including the information indicating “” is stored in the ROM 406.

  The VRAM 436 includes a movie data expansion area MVE for temporarily storing (developing) movie data, a texture data expansion area TE for temporarily storing (developing) texture data, and a decorative symbol display device. A frame buffer 1 (FB1) and a frame buffer 2 (FB2) are provided for temporarily storing (developing) image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on 208. Note that the frame buffer 1 (FB1) and the frame buffer 2 (FB2) are configured so that one of a drawing area and a display area can be specified, and image data is developed in the frame buffer specified in the drawing area. By changing the designation from the drawing area to the display area, an image corresponding to the image data stored in the frame buffer designated in the display area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flow of image drawing processing when a movie A is reproduced and a texture image based on texture data is displayed superimposed on the movie A. When reproducing the movie A, the first sub-control unit 400 decompresses the movie data MVa (resolution 1280 × 960) corresponding to the movie A into a plurality of image data, and then decompresses the image data for each frame. It is transferred to the movie data development area MVE1 (resolution 1280 × 960) set in the VRAM 436. In the VRAM 436 of this example, in addition to the movie data development area MVE1, another movie data development area with different resolutions (for example, a movie data development area with a resolution of 1024 × 768 and a movie data development area with a resolution of 800 × 600). Area) is set, but the movie data development area MVE1 having the same resolution as the movie data MVa can be used, so that it is used preferentially. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a plurality of texture data stored in the ROM 406 (in this example, texture data T001 to T004 for displaying an animation in which a texture image (a hold icon or a change icon described later) rotates). Is transferred (expanded) to the texture data expanding area TE (not shown in FIG. 16). Here, the texture data T001 of this example corresponds to the texture image in the initial state, the texture data T002 corresponds to the texture image rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the texture data T003 is 180 clockwise from the initial state. Corresponding to the rotated texture image, the texture data T004 corresponds to the texture image rotated 270 ° clockwise from the initial state. In this example, the texture image is displayed as a moving image by animation using a plurality of texture data, but the texture image may be composed of movie data.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the frame buffer 1 (FB1) or the frame buffer of the VRAM 436 based on the movie data MVa transferred to the movie data development area MVE1 and the texture data transferred to the texture data development area TE. 2 (FB2), the image data and texture data information (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP 434. At this time, 1280 × 960 is designated as an image size to be extracted from the movie data development area MVE1 (resolution 1280 × 960) to the frame buffer, and all areas of the movie data MVa (resolution 1280 × 960) can be displayed.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 designates the entire area of the frame buffer in which the display image is formed and issues a drawing instruction. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the drawing instruction. As a result, an image corresponding to the movie data MVa and an image corresponding to the texture data are displayed on the decorative design display device 208. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 sequentially selects and indicates four types of texture data T001 to T004 in time series to the VDP 434, thereby expressing the motion (for example, rotation) of the texture image by animation. Can do. In addition, when displaying a plurality of animations by the same texture image (for example, animations in which a plurality of held icons having the same display mode are rotated), the same texture data is selected for each animation in each frame. For example, a plurality of animations can be synchronized, and a plurality of animations can be made asynchronous by selecting different texture data for each animation in each frame. In this example, four types of texture data T001 to T004 are used to express the operation of the texture image, but three or less types or five or more types of texture data may be used.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a flow of image drawing processing when a texture image that appears from outside the display area (for example, below) and gradually moves to a predetermined position in the display area is displayed. The display position of the texture image is determined based on the arrangement coordinates of the texture data that the first sub-control unit 400 instructs the VDP 434. Therefore, by setting the arrangement coordinates of the texture data to gradually different values for each frame, the movement of the texture image can be displayed by animation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, in a state where two texture images are arranged in the left-right direction at the lower end in the display area, the third texture image appears from below the display area, and two textures are displayed. An animation that gradually moves to the right next position of the image is displayed. In the leftmost frame in the figure in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436, the third texture image has a resolution of 1280 × 960 with the upper left corner of the frame buffer as the origin (in this example, it matches the range of the movie data MVa). Therefore, more than half of the texture image itself is arranged at a position protruding downward. Thereafter, in the middle frame in the figure, the third texture image is arranged at a position above the position in the leftmost frame in the figure. Thereafter, in the rightmost frame in the figure, the third texture image is arranged at a predetermined position (the same height as the other two texture images) further above the position in the center frame in the figure.

  After forming a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 in each frame, the first sub-control unit 400 designates a range of resolution 1280 × 960 with the upper left corner of the frame buffer as the origin and issues a drawing instruction. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a third texture image (increased) in a state where two texture images (the previous hold icon) are arranged in the left-right direction at the lower end in the display area. A new hold icon) corresponding to the hold appears from below the display area, and an animation that gradually moves to the right adjacent position of the two texture images is displayed.

  As will be described later, in this example, a hold icon is displayed as an animation of a texture image. The number of held icons displayed is basically the same as the number of held special game games. Each hold icon can be prefetched about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As an animation related to the hold icon, for example, an animation that is executed when a hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pending icon increase animation”), a previous hold is Due to the digestion, the order of the hold changes, and an animation executed when the hold icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left) (hereinafter, referred to as “pending icon moving animation”). ), Animation executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the pre-read result, etc. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “change animation of the hold icon”), and corresponds to the change when the change starts Animation that is executed when the hold icon to be deleted is deleted Animation ”(sometimes referred to as“ animation ”), an animation that is executed when the priority icon on the priority side of the priority change machine is saved when the priority icon on the non-priority side is evacuated (hereinafter referred to as“ evacuation of the hold icon ”). There are cases where it is called “animation”). In addition to the above animation, an animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and that can be executed redundantly with the animation ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “standby icon standby animation”. There may be a case where a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon are executed in duplicate.

  Further, in this example, after the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started, one variable icon corresponding to the special figure variable game may be displayed. The variation icon has a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon, for example, and is displayed as a texture image animation in the same manner as the hold icon. Depending on the display mode, the change icon can be notified about the validity of the change (the change notice), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the change icon can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of the special figure change game is held. The variation icon and the hold icon may have the same mode. In addition, when a special figure variable game is started, the deletion animation of the hold icon displayed based on the hold corresponding to the special figure variable game is displayed based on the hold corresponding to the special figure variable game. It may indicate the display of an icon. In other words, the animation indicating that the role is switched from the hold icon to the change icon may be referred to as a hold icon deletion animation. In this case, the display mode of the hold icon and the variation icon may be the same. That is, the erasure animation is an animation that particularly indicates that the function as the hold icon has been lost, and that indicates that the hold icon has been switched to the variable icon.

  As an animation of a mode related to both the hold icon and the variable icon, the first hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is different from the hold icon display area when the hold is digested. Animation that moves to a region as a variable icon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “moving animation between hold and change icon”) and animation that changes from the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the change icon (hereinafter “hold / change” It may be called “change animation between icons”). These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. In addition, the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / change icons may be performed independently. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation between the hold / change icon can be omitted.

  Examples of the animation related to the fluctuation icon include an animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon standby animation”), and a fluctuation icon after the special figure variable game ends. Animation that is executed when the icon is deleted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon deletion animation”), animation that is executed when the display mode of the variable icon is changed in the middle (hereinafter referred to as “variable icon change”) There are cases where it is called “animation”). These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. In addition, the variation icon standby animation may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / variation icons. In addition, the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / change icons may be performed independently.

  FIG. 18A shows an example (for example, default mode) of a standby animation of a holding icon corresponding to holding of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, the texture image in the initial state corresponding to the texture data T001, the texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the clockwise rotation from the initial state corresponding to the texture data T003. The texture image rotated by 180 ° and the texture image corresponding to the texture data T004 and rotated by 270 ° clockwise from the initial state are sequentially displayed repeatedly. Each texture image has a circular outer shape with a predetermined color, and four characters “eight”, “dai”, “general”, and “army” are written at equal intervals (90 ° intervals) in the circumferential direction of the circle. ("Yatsushiro Shogun" pattern). Each character is arranged so that the center direction of the circle is downward. In the four texture images, only one of the characters “eight”, “dai”, “general”, and “army” is in the normal position (the vertical position is correct), and in the initial texture image “ “8” is the correct position. When the standby animation shown in FIG. 18A is executed, the circular hold icon is visually recognized so as to constantly rotate in the clockwise direction around the center of the circle.

  FIG. 18B shows another example of the standby icon standby animation. In this example, the texture image in the initial state, the texture image rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, the texture image rotated 180 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the texture rotated 270 ° clockwise from the initial state Images are displayed in this order, and when the initial texture image is displayed again, the initial texture image continues to be displayed. When this standby animation is executed, the circular hold icon is initially rotated only once, and thereafter, it is visually recognized to stop rotating and remain stationary in the initial state. The initial rotation of the hold icon can also be considered part or all of the increase animation of the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold icon may be rotated at least twice instead of once, and may remain stationary after the rotation is stopped in another state, or once or A combination of a plurality of rotations and stationary for a predetermined time may be repeated at a predetermined cycle. Further, the increase animation and the standby animation are not necessarily related to each other.

  FIG. 18C shows an example of a standby icon standby animation corresponding to the special figure 2 variable game hold. In this example, four texture images have a square outer shape. When this standby animation is executed, the square hold icon is visually recognized so as to continuously rotate in the clockwise direction around the center of the square. In this example, the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the hold icon in FIG. 2 have different shapes, but they may have the same shape. In addition, even a hold icon based on the same special figure may be displayed in a different manner according to a change in the gaming state. In addition, the display mode may be different even in the hold icon based on the same special figure and in the same gaming state.

FIG. 18D shows another example of the standby icon standby animation. In this example, for example, an initial texture image corresponding to the texture data T001, a texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, and a texture image corresponding to the texture data T003 are repeatedly displayed in sequence. Each texture image matches the pattern of a predetermined character (for example, Sabohani), and the states (for example, direction and pose) are different from each other. When this standby animation is executed, a predetermined character is visually recognized as walking in the left direction in the figure. Therefore, by executing this standby animation in combination with a moving animation for moving the hold icon to the left adjacent position, the player visually recognizes that the hold icon (character) moves to the left adjacent position. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, even if the same animation is executed in the standby animation and the moving animation, by changing the interval for switching the texture image in each animation, the other animation is fast-forwarded or slow-played for one animation. You may display as if.

FIG. 18E shows still another example of a standby icon standby animation. In this example, for example, an initial texture image corresponding to texture data T001, a texture image corresponding to texture data T002, a texture image corresponding to texture data T003, and a texture image corresponding to texture data T004 are sequentially repeated. Is displayed. The texture images all match the character pattern similar to that shown in FIG. 18D, and the states (for example, orientation and pose) are different from each other. Since this standby animation uses four types of texture data as in the standby animation shown in FIGS. 18A, 18C, etc., the standby animation shown in FIGS. 18A, 18C, etc. It is possible to match the execution time (scale) of the animation for the period. Therefore, even if the standby animation shown in FIG. 18E is executed for some of the hold icons among the plurality of hold icons, and the standby animation shown in FIG. 18A is executed for another hold icon, these standby icons are displayed. In some cases, animation can be executed synchronously. In the standby animation shown in FIG. 18E, after the four texture images are sequentially displayed and the initial texture image is displayed again, the initial texture image is displayed as in FIG. It may be displayed continuously.

  Here, when changing the display mode of the hold icon based on the pre-read result, the scale of the standby animation of the hold icon may be the same before and after the display mode change. Thereby, the player can be caused to pay attention only to the display mode of the hold icon, and the player can be easily made aware of the change in the display mode.

  Moreover, when changing the display mode of the hold icon based on the prefetch result, the scale of the standby animation of the hold icon may be made different before and after the display mode change. In this case, the sense of incongruity may be caused by the change in the scale of the standby animation, and the player may be allowed to pay attention to the hold icon. Although the description of the standby animation has been made with the hold icon, the present invention is not limited to this and may be applied to the standby icon.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 19A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 19A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Details of the effect control process will be described later.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 19B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 19C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the effect control process in step S809 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S1101 of the effect control process, the hold icon display control process is performed, and in the next step S1103, the variable icon display control process is performed. Details of the hold icon display control process and the variable icon display control process will be described later. Note that the hold icon display control process and the fluctuation icon display control process may be executed independently in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, or may be executed in common in FIG. 1 and FIG. You may do it. In step S1105 following step S1103, other effect control processing is performed.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the hold icon display control process. First, in step S1201 of the hold icon display control process, it is determined based on various commands such as the prefetch result information command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 whether or not the number of special figure variable games held has increased. If it is determined that the number of holds has increased, the process proceeds to step S1203. If it is determined that the number of holds has not increased, the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1203, a pending icon change scenario lottery process is performed. In the hold icon change scenario lottery process, with reference to a hold icon display mode lottery table (FIGS. 23 to 26) to be described later, the number of hold of the special figure variable game, the timer group corresponding to the increased hold, and the hold icon display Based on the random number value for the mode lottery, a hold icon change scenario for the increased hold is determined by lottery. The on-hold icon change scenario is information representing a change in the display mode of the on-hold icon until the on-hold is consumed. For example, “On winning: white, after 1 change: white, after 2 change: blue” is expressed. . The display mode of the hold icon in this example includes “white”, “blue”, “red”, “box”, and “thousand boxes”. If the timer group information corresponding to the increased hold cannot be acquired (for example, when prefetching is not executed), the display mode of the hold icon until the hold is consumed is set to the default “white”. Set.

  In step S 1205 following step S 1203, the determined hold icon change scenario is stored in a scenario storage area provided in the RAM 508. Here, the scenario storage area in the RAM 508 has the same number of storage areas as the number of reserves for each of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 (in this example, four for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2). Have. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) in FIG. 1 and FIG. For example, when the first hold in FIG. 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the data (hold icon change scenario) in the storage area corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. The data in the storage area corresponding to 2 to 4 is moved up to the storage area corresponding to 1 to 3 and stored again.

  In step S1207 subsequent to step S1205, a process of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the increased hold in a predetermined display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (including a process of setting an increase animation of the hold icon) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1209, it is determined whether a hold icon change condition is satisfied. The hold icon change condition is, for example, that a special figure variable game is started. In this example, it is determined that the hold icon change condition has been satisfied if it is the timing at which a command indicating the start of a special figure change game such as a symbol change start command is received from the first sub-control unit 400, and otherwise hold It is determined that the icon change condition is not satisfied. If it is determined that the hold icon change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1211. If it is determined that the hold icon change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1213. In addition, the hold icon change condition includes the elapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, a specific determination result in the determination of success / failure in a change before the hold icon, or a predetermined operation by the player. May be. Further, the hold icon change condition may always be satisfied before the target hold change is performed, or vice versa. In addition, it may be uncertain whether the condition is established (undefined). Further, the hold icon change condition once determined may be changed or canceled thereafter.

  In step S1211, hold icon change processing is performed. In the hold icon change process, the hold icon change scenario is read from each storage area of the scenario storage area in the RAM 508, and it is determined whether or not the display mode of each hold icon needs to be changed based on each hold icon change scenario. If a change is necessary, a process for changing the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a process for setting a change animation of the hold icon) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1213.

  In step S1213, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure variable games held has decreased. For example, when it is determined that the number of holds has decreased based on the symbol variation start command, the prefetch result information command, or the like from the first sub-control unit 400, the process proceeds to step S1215, and it is determined that the number of holds has not decreased. In this case, the hold icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  In step S1215, a hold icon display position change process is performed. In the hold icon display position change process, a process for changing the display position of each hold icon in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds (for example, a movement animation or deletion animation of the hold icon, a movement animation between the hold / change icon, etc. is set). Process). Thereafter, the hold icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the change icon display control process. First, in step S1301 of the variation icon display control process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the special figure variation game is started. For example, if it is the timing at which the symbol variation start command is received from the first sub-control unit 400, it is determined that the special symbol variation game has been started. Otherwise, at the timing at which the special symbol variation game is started. Judge that there is no. If it is determined that it is the timing when the special figure variable game is started, the process proceeds to step S1303, and if it is determined that it is not the timing when the special figure variable game is started, the process proceeds to step S1307.

  In step S1303, a variable icon lottery process is performed. In the variation icon lottery process, for example, with reference to a variation icon display mode lottery table (FIG. 27) to be described later, a display group immediately before the start of variation (immediately before suspension digestion) of the suspended icon corresponding to the started special figure variation game. (If the display mode immediately before the start of the change of the hold icon is white, blue, or red, it is “ball system”, and if it is a box or a thousand box, it is “box system”). Based on the timer and the random number value for variation icon display mode lottery, the display mode of the variation icon for the started special figure variation game is determined by lottery. The display mode of the variation icon in this example includes “white”, “blue”, “red”, “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, and “family crest”. Note that the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be determined in the hold icon display control process (step S1203) together with the display mode of the hold icon. In that case, the variation icon lottery process in step S1303 can be omitted. In that case, the information on the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be included in the hold icon change scenario.

  In step S1305 subsequent to step S1303, a process for displaying the change icon of the determined display mode in a predetermined display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a process for setting a movement animation or a change animation between the hold / change icons). Including). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1307.

  In step S1307, it is determined whether or not the special figure variable game is being executed. For example, if the timing is from receiving the symbol variation start command from the first sub-control unit 400 to receiving the symbol variation stop command from the first sub-control unit 400, the special symbol variation game is being executed. If not, it is determined that the special figure variable game is not being executed. If it is determined that the special figure variable game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1309. If it is determined that the special figure variable game is not being executed, the variable icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  In step S1309, it is determined whether the variable icon display interruption condition is satisfied. As the variable icon display interruption condition, for example, an effect that is executed on almost the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 such as a super reach effect is started, or that a power interruption has occurred (for example, the first sub-control unit) The occurrence of power interruption was detected based on the command from 400). If it is determined that the variable icon display interruption condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1311. If it is determined that the variable icon display interruption condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1313. Further, the effect of interrupting the display of the variation icon may be an effect that overlaps at least part or all of the target variation icon.

  In step S1311, change icon display interruption processing is performed. In the change icon display interruption process, a process for interrupting (or stopping or stopping) the display of the change icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1313. Here, when the display of the fluctuation icon corresponding to a certain special figure variable game is interrupted, the display of the fluctuation icon may be resumed during the execution period of the special figure fluctuation game or may not be resumed. is there. The variation icon display interruption process includes a process of interrupting the display of a part of the variation icon being displayed. When the display of a part of the variation icon is interrupted, the variation icon may not be easily identified. Further, display may be performed such that the display area of the variable icon is enlarged or reduced as time passes. That is, the display interruption of the variation icon includes a state where the variation icon is not displayed or at least a part of the variation icon is not displayed.

  In step S1313, it is determined whether or not the display of the variation icon is interrupted. If it is determined that the display of the variation icon is suspended, the process proceeds to step S1315. If the display of the variation icon is not suspended (for example, the variation icon is being displayed), the process proceeds to step S1319. .

  In step S1315, it is determined whether the variable icon display restart condition is satisfied. As the variable icon display restart condition, for example, that the super reach effect has been completed, the power is restored from the power interruption state (for example, the power recovery is detected based on a command from the first sub-control unit 400), Etc. If it is determined that the variable icon display restart condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1317. If it is determined that the variable icon display restart condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1323.

  In step S1317, a variable icon display restart process is performed. In the variation icon display restart process, a process for resuming the display of the variation icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1323. In the variation icon display restart process, the display of the variation icon may not be resumed if a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In step S1319, it is determined whether the variable icon change condition is satisfied. Examples of the variable icon change condition include winning a predetermined random number lottery performed by the second sub-control unit 500. If it is determined that the change icon change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1321, and if it is determined that the change icon change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1323.

  In step S1321, change icon change processing is performed. In the variation icon change processing, processing for changing the display mode of the variation icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, including processing for setting variation animation of the variation icon) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1323. Further, when the variation icon display interruption condition is satisfied at the same time, control is performed to change the display mode of the variation icon in a state where a part or all of the variation icon is not displayed, and the display interruption condition for the variation icon is performed. Is not established and the display is resumed, a variation icon having a display mode different from the display mode prior to the interruption may be displayed.

  In step S1323, it is determined whether or not the variable icon display end condition is satisfied. As the variation icon display end condition, for example, that the special figure variation game has been terminated (for example, that the symbol variation stop command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400), a predetermined time has elapsed since the beginning of the variation, and the like. is there. If it is determined that the variable icon display end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1325. If it is determined that the variable icon display end condition is not satisfied, the variable icon display control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control process. .

  In step S1325, change icon display end processing is performed. In the variation icon display end processing, processing for erasing the variation icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, including processing for setting variation icon erasure animation) is performed.

  The variation icon may be displayed during all special figure variation games, or when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific performance mode is set or according to the game state). It may be displayed only during the special figure variable game (switching the possibility).

  FIG. 23 to FIG. 26 show an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table used in the hold icon change scenario lottery process (step S1203) of the hold icon display control process. FIG. 23 shows an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table used for the increased fourth hold when the number of holds at the time of winning is 3 (when the number of holds increases from 3 to 4). ing. FIG. 24 shows an example of the hold icon display mode lottery table used for the increased third hold when the number of holds at the time of winning is 2 (when the number of holds increases from 2 to 3). ing. FIG. 25 shows an example of the hold icon display mode lottery table used for the second hold that is increased when the number of holds at the time of winning is 1 (when the number of holds increases from 1 to 2). ing. FIG. 26 shows an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table used for the first hold that is increased when the number of holds at the time of winning is 0 (when the number of holds increases from 0 to 1). ing.

  In the hold icon display mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, a hold icon change scenario for the hold is determined based on the timer group to which the increased variable timer of the hold belongs and the random number value for the hold icon display mode lottery. Is done. The timer group to which the increased hold variation timer belongs is determined based on a prefetch result information command or the like from the first sub-control unit 400, and the hold icon display mode lottery random value is obtained from a random number counter provided in the RAM 508. Is done. The range that the random number value for holding icon display mode lottery in this example can take is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical value range is 100).

  For example, when the number of holds increases from 3 to 4, and the increased hold variation timer is timers 1 to 5 (timer group 1, immediately off-line), as shown in FIG. In the random number range 0 to 79), a pending icon change scenario of “at the time of winning: white, after 1 change: white, after 2 change: white, after 3 change: white” is set. That is, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold is white at the beginning of the display, and thereafter, white is maintained until the hold is digested and the hold icon is deleted. In the display mode column of the hold icon display mode lottery table, “-” indicates that the display mode set before that is maintained. Further, in the same display mode column, the display mode immediately before digestion of the suspension is shown in gray.

  Also, for example, when the number of holds increases from two to three, and the increased hold variation timer is timers 8 to 10 (timer group 3, expectation small: hit), as shown in FIG. With the probability (random number range 56 to 60), a pending icon change scenario of “when winning: white, after 1 change: blue, after 2 change: red” is set. That is, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold is white at the beginning of display, changes to blue after 1 change, and changes to red after 2 changes (just before the hold is digested).

  The display mode of the hold icon in this example is “red”, “blue”, “white” from the higher reliability (big hit reliability) in the spherical hold icon display group. In the display group, they are “thousand boxes” and “boxes” in order of reliability. In the hold icon display mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the timer groups 3, 5, and 7 selected at the time of winning are more reliable than the timer groups 1, 2, 4, and 6 selected at the time of losing. It is easy to select a high display mode, and it is easy to change to a display mode with high reliability.

  FIG. 27 shows an example of a variation icon display mode lottery table used in the variation icon lottery process (step S1303) of the variation icon display control process. In the variation icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. 27, the final display mode (holding icon display group) of the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game to be started, the fluctuation timer of the special figure variable game, and the fluctuation Based on the random number value for icon display mode lottery, the display mode of the variation icon is determined. The random number value for the variation icon display mode lottery is acquired from a random number counter provided in the RAM 508. The range that can be taken by the random icon for variation icon display mode lottery in this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  For example, when the final display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game to be started is white (the hold icon display group is a ball system), and the variable timer of the special figure variable game is the timer 9, As the display mode of the fluctuation icon, “white” is selected with a probability of 35% (random number range 0 to 34), “blue” is selected with a probability of 40% (random number range 35 to 74), and a probability of 20% ( “Red” is selected in the random number range 75 to 94), and “gold” is selected with a probability of 5% (random number range 95 to 99). In this example, even if the final display mode of the hold icon is blue or red other than white, the display mode (white, blue, red, gold) of the variable icon is selected with the same probability as when the display mode is white. However, when the final display mode of the hold icon is blue or red, the selection probability of the display mode of the variable icon may be different from the probability. For example, when the final display mode of the hold icon is red, the selection probability of white or blue is lower than the above (including 0%), and the selection probability of red or gold is higher than the above (including 100%). )

  Further, for example, when the final display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game to be started is a box (the hold icon display group is a box system), and the variable timer of the special figure variable game is the timer 14, As the display mode of the fluctuation icon, “smoke” (for example, a mode in which smoke comes out of the box to indicate that it is an empty box) is selected with a probability of 2% (random range 0 to 1). , “Sake” (for example, a mode in which liquor comes out of the box) is selected with a probability of 33% (random number range 2-34), and “sword” (with a probability of 30% (random number range 35-64)) For example, a mode in which a sword comes out from a box is selected, and a “family crest” (for example, a mode in which a family crest comes out from a box) is selected with a probability of 35% (random number range 65 to 99). . Similarly to the case where the hold icon display group is a spherical system, the selection probability of the display mode of the variable icon may be varied depending on whether the final display form of the hold icon is a box or a thousand boxes.

  The display mode of the variation icon corresponding to the hold icon of the spherical system is “gold”, “red”, “blue”, and “white” from the higher reliability. The display mode of the fluctuation icon corresponding to the box-type hold icon is “family crest”, “sword”, “sake”, and “smoke” in order of high reliability. It should be noted that the display modes “sword” and “sake” of the fluctuation icon are confronted with the swordsman character and the sword if the specific contents (for example, “sword”) are executed during the fluctuation (for example, “sword”). This suggests a swordsman reach directing, “if you drink”, a drink comparison reach directing by confronting you with a samurai character. The big hit reliability of each display mode shown in FIG. 27 is the reliability in the special figure 1 variable game in the non-electric support state and the non-probable change state. The reliability of each display mode of the variation icon may be different for each gaming state, or may be the same for all gaming states. In addition, the reliability of each display mode may be different between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, or may be the same between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2.

  Here, when referring to reliability, general reliability indicates the ratio of occurrence of a target event among multiple occurrences, but reliability in this industry is a big hit. It is an abbreviation for reliability and indicates what percentage of the abbreviation is a big hit when an effect of the same mode is executed. For example, the display mode “red” of the variation icon having a reliability of 30.3% notifies the player that the probability that the success / failure result of the variation is a big hit is 30.3%, The player is informed that the probability that the result will be out of date is 69.7%. In other words, it can be said that the pre-reading notice is notifying the jackpot reliability at the same time and notifying the reliability at the same time. In addition, the reliability is not limited to a value of 1, and may have a width, for example, about 5 to 7%. The reliability can be changed by adjusting the distribution of the random number range in the table shown in FIG. For example, in order to increase the reliability of a specific display mode, the display mode may be easily selected at the time of a big hit, or may not be selected at the time of losing.

  As described above, there are five display modes of the hold icon in this example: “white”, “blue”, “red”, “box”, and “thousand boxes”. There are eight display modes of the fluctuation icon: “white”, “blue”, “red”, “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, “family crest”. Among these, three types of “white”, “blue”, and “red” are common display modes for the hold icon and the change icon. Two types of “box” and “thousand box” are display modes specific to the hold icon, and five types of “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, and “family crest” are specific to the change icon It is a display mode. In other words, the hold icon display mode of this example has three types of common display modes and two types of unique display modes, and the display mode of variable icons includes three types of common display modes and five types of unique display modes. There are display modes. In this example, the number of unique display modes of the variable icon (5 in this example) is larger than the number of unique display modes of the hold icon (2 in this example). The display mode of the hold icon may be a common display mode (unique display mode is 0).

Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present exemplary embodiment will be described.
(Example 1-1)
FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 show examples of effect display in Example 1-1 of this exemplary form in time series. Here, in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, and each figure mentioned later, the fluctuation | variation of the decoration symbol in the symbol display areas 208a-208c of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 is represented by the downward white thick arrow. In addition, the extinguishing portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black. In addition, the state in which all segments are represented in white in the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 indicates that the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is performed. Further, the illustration of the fourth symbol may be omitted.

  The lower left area of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variation icon display area 800. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, one fluctuation icon can be displayed, and whether or not the fluctuation is appropriate can be notified with a predetermined reliability (the fluctuation notice) according to the display mode of the fluctuation icon. The fluctuation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 900 described later. This may facilitate identification of the variation icon and the hold icon. In addition, a frame-like image (indicated by a rectangle in the drawing) indicating the position of the variation icon display region 800 may be displayed on the outer periphery of the variation icon display region 800. The frame-like image may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 800), or may be displayed constantly. .

  A horizontally long area below the effect display area 208d and adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area 800 is a hold icon display area 900. In the hold icon display area 900, one or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed. In the hold icon display area 900, the number of hold of the special figure variable game can be notified by the number of the hold icons, and whether the hold is appropriate or not is notified with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of each hold icon (pre-reading notice) ) Is possible. The hold icon display area 900 of this example can display a maximum of four hold icons, and is roughly divided into four areas: a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from left to right. ing. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold (stored in the past) can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the second to fourth areas hold the second to fourth hold. Each corresponding hold icon can be displayed. In this example, numbers 1 to 4 are respectively displayed in the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, and the positions of the first to fourth areas are clearly indicated by the displayed numbers. Clarification of the position of the fourth region may be omitted. Further, in the hold icon display area 900 of this example, only the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed, but the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed together.

  FIG. 28A shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 displays the special figure 1 variable display, and the special figure 2 display device 214 displays the special special figure 2 variable game stop symbol. FIG. D is displayed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 turns on the first LED from the left to indicate that there is only one special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs. It is displayed that the hold of special figure 2 is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “white”. As a result, the success or failure of the special figure 1 variable game is notified with a relatively low reliability (for example, 0.2% (see FIG. 27)). A hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900. The display mode of the hold icon 901 is “white”.

  FIG. 28 (b) shows a state where the number of suspensions in FIG. 1 is increased by one. As shown in FIG. 28B, a new hold icon 902 is displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900. The display mode of the hold icon 902 is “box”. Further, the display mode of the hold icon 902 is changed to “thousand boxes” in the next special figure variable game based on the hold icon change scenario.

  28 (c) and 28 (d) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. As shown in FIGS. 28 (c) and 28 (d), the special figure E display device 212 stops special figure E (displacement), and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbols other than symbol combinations for notifying the winning. The symbol combination “decoration 1—decoration 3—decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is started. In the erase animation of the variation icon 801 in this example, an effect moving image representing light, for example, is displayed around the variation icon 801, and the effect moving image and the variation icon 801 themselves gradually become smaller and eventually disappear. ing. In this example, the erase animation ends at the same time as the change icon 801 disappears. However, after the change icon 801 disappears, for example, an effect representing light is continuously displayed, and the erase animation ends when the effect disappears. May be. That is, the timing at which the change icon disappears does not necessarily coincide with the timing at which the erase animation ends. Further, the display time may be varied depending on the display mode of the variation icon.

  The start timing of the fluctuation icon erasing animation is, for example, the same as the timing at which the special figure variable game ends, but may be before or after the special figure variable game ends. Good. Further, the end timing of the change icon erasing animation is, for example, the same time as the start of the next special figure variable game, but may be before the next special figure variable game is started. Or later.

  FIGS. 28E to 28G show a state after the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIGS. 28E to 28G, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1 by turning off the second LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the variable icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a predetermined animation (in this example, a movement animation between the hold and change icons, a hold icon movement animation, and a hold icon change animation) is executed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. Moving. Here, in this example, it is assumed that the hold icon 901 changes to the change icon 802 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game. Since the change icon 802 immediately after the change is displayed at the same position in the same manner as the hold icon 901 immediately before the change, the change from the hold icon 901 to the change icon 802 may not be visually recognized. In this example, the display mode (final display mode) of the variation icon 802 is “white”, which is the same as the display mode of the hold icon 901, and only the display size is different. Execution is omitted. However, even if the display mode of the fluctuation icon 802 and the display mode of the hold icon 901 are the same, a change animation between the hold / change icon may be executed. The hold icon and the variation icon may have the same form and the same size. In such a case, it may be defined that the moving animation of the variable icon is performed without performing the animation of deleting the held icon.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually moves to the first area.

  In the change animation of the hold icon, first, for example, an effect moving image representing an explosion is displayed overlapping the hold icon 902 in a layer (front) above the hold icon 902 (FIG. 28 (f)). The hold icon 902 is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the display size of the effect moving image is gradually reduced, a hold icon 902 whose display mode is changed from “box” to “thousand boxes” appears. In this example, since the change animation and the movement animation of the hold icon 902 are executed at the same time, the hold icon 902 is visually recognized so that the display mode changes while moving.

  FIG. 28 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. As shown in FIG. 28 (h), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations for notifying the winning. “Decoration 3—Decoration 3—Decoration 1” is stopped. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 802 is executed in the same manner as the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 shown in FIGS.

  FIGS. 29A to 29D show a state after the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIGS. 29A to 29D, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED. Here, in the variation icon lottery process (step S1303 in FIG. 22), the display mode of the variation icon 803 corresponding to the started special figure 1 variation game is determined to be “family crest”.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Further, in the variation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a predetermined animation (in this example, a movement animation between the hold / change icon and a change animation between the hold / change icon) is executed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In this example, the variation icon 803 in the middle of movement overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol variably displayed in the symbol display area 208a (FIG. 29A). In this example, since the variation icon 803 is displayed in a layer above the decorative design, a part of the decorative design is shielded by the variation icon 803. Thereby, it can be emphasized that the number of holds has changed. Note that the variation icon 803 may overlap the entire decorative design, or may be displayed in a layer below the decorative design. On the contrary, part or all of the variation icon and the decorative design or other images in the middle of movement may overlap. As a result, the fluctuation icon cannot be visually recognized at least for a predetermined period, so that the player's attention may be gathered more.

  In this example, the change animation between the hold and change icons is executed after the movement animation between the hold and change icons ends (after the change icon 803 moves to the change icon display area 800). In the change animation between the hold and change icons, in the change icon display area 800, the thousand box that is the original display form of the change icon 803 (the final display form as the hold icon 902) vibrates rattlingly (FIG. 29 (b)). )), A family crest appears in the thousand boxes (FIG. 29 (c)), and finally only the family crest is displayed as the variation icon 803 (FIG. 29 (d)). That is, it can be said that the moving animation is not completed until the change animation is completed.

  In this example, the change animation between the hold / change icons is executed in a mode different from the change animation of the hold icon (for example, a mode not executed in the change animation of the hold icon). Further, the change icon 803 after the end of the change animation is displayed in a mode (“family crest” mode) that is not displayed as a hold icon.

In this example, since the hold icon in the hold icon display area 900 moves to the change icon display area 800 and changes to the change icon in a series of flows, the hold icon corresponding to the hold icon is digested. In some cases, the player can clearly recognize that the figure variation game has been performed.
(Example 1-2)
FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 show an example of effect display in Example 1-2 of this exemplary form in time series. FIG. 30 (a) shows a non-fluctuating state after a predetermined time has elapsed with the number of holds in FIG. 1 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 30 (a), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure d (detachment) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214. Yes. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turn off all the LEDs to indicate that the holdings of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both zero. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 9-decoration 4-decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed.

  Since the erasing animation in the fluctuation icon display area 800 has already ended, no fluctuation icon is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 800. However, since a frame-like image (rectangle in the figure) is displayed in this example, the position of the variable icon display area 800 is clearly shown. Further, since the number of holds is 0, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 900.

  FIG. 30 (b) shows a state immediately after winning the special figure 1 starting port 230 in the non-variable state shown in FIG. 30 (a). As shown in FIG. 30B, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of special figure 1 based on winning the special figure 1 starting port 230. Since the special figure 1 variable game is started immediately after winning a prize, the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 remains zero. Here, it is assumed that the determination result of whether or not the variation is appropriate is out of date, and the variation timer is timer 11 (super reach A (out)).

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the started special figure variation game is suddenly displayed without any movement animation or variation animation between the hold / variation icons. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “sword”. No hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 900.

  30 (c) to 30 (g) show states during the variation period of the special figure variation game. First, in FIG. 30C, a reach state is reached, and “decoration 4” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variable display is continued only in the symbol display area 208b. Thereafter, the display on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 gradually turns white (FIG. 30 (d)), and is switched to the screen background for the super reach effect (in this example, the swordsman reach effect) (FIG. 30 (e)). ). When the screen background of the super reach effect is switched, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the screen, and the fluctuation icon and the hold icon (the hold icon (the hold icon display area 900) displayed in the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 are displayed. In this example, the change icon 801) is deleted.

  Thereafter, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the upper right corner of the screen, the symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is changed. (FIG. 30 (f)). The fluctuation of shaking means a state in which the temporarily stopped decorative pattern repeats shaking up and down, right and left, enlargement / reduction, and the like, and indicates that it is not a stop display. In the super-reach effect screen background (effect display area 208d), a character “losing” is displayed and a moving image indicating that the confrontation has been lost is displayed.

  Thereafter, the screen background for super reach production returns to the normal screen background (FIG. 30 (g)). When returning to the normal screen background, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and returned to their original positions (for example, the center of the screen). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is continued. In addition, the fluctuation icon and the hold icon (the change icon 801 in this example) in the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 are displayed at the original positions. The variation icon 801 is displayed suddenly without any movement animation or change animation between the hold / variation icons. The manner in which the variation icon 801 is redisplayed is the same as the manner in which the variation icon 801 is displayed when the special figure variable game is started (FIG. 30 (b)), so the special figure variable game starts again. In some cases, it is possible to draw the player's attention by making an illusion as if to be played. Moreover, there are cases where it is possible to suppress stoppage by making it difficult to specify the number of holds.

  FIG. 30 (h) to FIG. 31 (b) show a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished. As shown in FIG. 30 (h) to FIG. 31 (b), the special figure E (offset) is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 4-” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation of decoration 5-decoration 4 "is finished and stopped. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is started. In the erase animation of the variation icon 801 (display mode: sword) of the present example, similarly to the erase animation of the variation icon 801 (display mode: white) shown in FIGS. For example, an effect moving image representing light is displayed, and the effect moving image and the fluctuation icon 801 itself gradually become smaller and finally disappear. As described above, the deletion animation of the same mode may be performed even for the fluctuation icons having different reliability levels. On the contrary, different types of deletion animation may be performed for each display mode of the variable icon. Similarly, the animation modes of the above-described animations (increase, move, change, delete, etc.) may be different for each display mode of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon.

FIG. 31 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won in the state of the holding number 0 shown in FIG. 31 (b) and the special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 31 (c), in the change icon display area 800, a change icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the started special figure change game is displayed. It is displayed suddenly without accompanying.
(Example 1-3)
32 and 33 show examples of effect display in Example 1-3 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIG. 32A shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 turns on the leftmost LED to indicate that there is only one special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays the special figure 2. Is displayed as 0 on hold.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: thousand carton box) is displayed.

  FIG. 32B shows a state immediately before the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 32 (b), in this example, before the special figure 1 variable game is ended, an animation for deleting the variable icon 801 in the variable icon display area 800 is started. In this way, the fluctuation icon erasing animation may be started before the fluctuation ends.

  FIG. 32 (c) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. As shown in FIG. 32 (c), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations “decorations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning. “2-decoration 3-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, the erasure animation of the variation icon 801 is completed almost simultaneously with the end of the special figure 1 variation game.

  FIG. 32 (d) to FIG. 33 (b) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 32 (d), in the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED. Here, it is assumed that the determination result of whether or not the variation is appropriate is out of date, and the variation timer is timer 11 (super reach A (out)). In the variation icon lottery process (step S1303 in FIG. 22), it is assumed that the display mode of the variation icon 802 corresponding to the variation is determined as “family crest”.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the variation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a predetermined animation (movement animation and change animation between the hold and change icons) is started. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. It moves (FIGS. 32D to 32E).

  In the change animation between the hold and change icons, in the change icon display area 800, the thousand boxes that are the original display form of the change icons 802 vibrate (FIG. 32 (e)), and a family crest appears from the thousand boxes ( FIG. 32 (f)), and finally only the family crest is displayed as the variation icon 802 (FIG. 32 (g)).

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 32 (f), “decoration 3” is displayed in both the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and a reach state in which the variable display is continued only in the symbol display area 208b is reached. Thereafter, the display on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 gradually turns white (FIG. 32 (g)), and is switched to the screen background for the super reach effect (in this example, the swordsman reach effect) (FIG. 32 (h)). ). When the screen background of the super reach effect is switched, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the screen, and the fluctuation icon and the hold icon (the hold icon (the hold icon display area 900) displayed in the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 are displayed. In this example, the variation icon 802) is deleted.

  Thereafter, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the upper right corner of the screen, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is changed. (FIG. 33 (a)). In the super-reach effect screen background (effect display area 208d), a character “losing” is displayed and a moving image indicating that the confrontation has been lost is displayed.

  Thereafter, the screen background for super reach production returns to the normal screen background (FIG. 33B). When returning to the normal screen background, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and returned to their original positions. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is continued. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 is resumed. In this example, the variation icon 802 displayed in the variation icon display area 800 has already been erased when returning to the normal screen background. In this example, since it is already suggested that the variation is out of place in the super reach production, the variation icon 802 (display mode: family crest) that notifies the variation with high reliability is displayed again. Then, there is a risk of annoying the player. Therefore, when the screen background for super reach production returns to the normal screen background, the change icon corresponding to the change is erased (the change icon is not displayed when returning to the normal screen background), so that the player In some cases, it can be deterring. In the present embodiment, the above-described variable icon interruption condition applies to the transition to the screen background for super reach production.

FIG. 33 (c) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. As shown in FIG. 33 (c), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation of the movement ends and is stopped.
(Example 1-4)
FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 show examples of effect display in Example 1-4 of this exemplary form in time series. FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b) show the state during the fluctuation period of a special figure 1 variable game during non-electric support. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 turns on the first LED from the left to indicate that there is only one special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs. It is displayed that the hold of special figure 2 is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. A hold icon 901 (display mode: box) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900.

  At the time shown in FIG. 34 (b), it is assumed that the priority-side special figure 2 is increased by one. As shown in FIG. 34B, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 displays that the hold in the special figure 2 has increased from 0 to 1 by turning on the first LED from the left. In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the hold shown in FIG. 2 is not displayed in the hold icon display area 900 during non-electric support. Therefore, the display of the hold icon display area 900 does not change from the state shown in FIG. 34A even if the hold in the special figure 2 increases. In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is not displayed, but may be displayed in the hold icon display area 900 or other areas.

  34 (c) and 34 (d) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, for example, the animation for deleting the variation icon 801 is started simultaneously with the stop display of the symbol. In the erase animation of the variation icon 801 in this example, an effect moving image representing light, for example, is displayed around the variation icon 801, and the effect moving image and the variation icon 801 themselves gradually become smaller and eventually disappear. ing.

  FIG. 34 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started. At this point, it is assumed that the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one. In the special figure 2 display device 214, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 displays that the hold in the special figure 2 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has increased from 1 to 2 by turning on the second LED from the left.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 802 in a predetermined display mode corresponding to the started special figure 2 variation game is suddenly displayed without a moving animation or a variation animation between the hold / variation icons. Regarding the variation icon corresponding to the special figure 2 variation game, unlike Example 1-2, the animation is not executed even if one or more holds exist. The area where the fluctuation icon is displayed is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  In the second area of the hold icon display area 900, a new hold icon 902 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game is displayed. Since the special figure 2 variable game is started by interruption, the movement animation and the change animation of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 900 are not executed at this time and are delayed. In this way, the hold icon corresponding to the special figure 1 may not change when the special figure 2 variable game is started, even if the display mode is determined to change at the start of the fluctuation. .

  FIGS. 34 (f) to (h) show a state where the special figure 2 variable game is finished. The special figure d (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and the symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 802 is started. This erasure animation is executed in a manner different from the erasure animation of the variation icon corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game. In the erase animation of the variation icon 802 corresponding to the special figure 2 variation game, the transparency (transparency) of the variation icon 802 is gradually increased (FIGS. 34 (f) and (g)), and finally it is erased. (FIG. 34 (h)). Here, the variation icon 802 may be deleted after the transparency reaches 100%, or may be deleted before the transparency reaches 100%. The mode of the animation of erasing the variable icon is not only different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different based on the lottery result or the prefetch result.

  FIGS. 35A to 35C show a state after the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1 by turning off the second LED from the left.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, predetermined animations (movement animation and change animation between hold and change icons, movement animation and change animation of the hold icon) are started.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In this example, the change animation is executed simultaneously with the movement animation between the hold / change icons. In the change animation between the hold and change icons, an effect moving image representing an explosion is displayed overlapping the change icon 803 in a layer above the change icon 803. The fluctuation icon 803 is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the display size of the effect moving image is gradually reduced, a variation icon 803 whose display mode is changed from “box” to “thousand boxes” appears. In this example, since the movement animation and the change animation between the hold / change icons are executed at the same time, the change icon 803 is visually recognized so that the display mode changes while moving.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually moves to the first area.

In the change animation of the hold icon, an effect moving image representing an explosion is displayed overlapping with the hold icon 902 in a layer above the hold icon 902. The hold icon 902 is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the display size of the effect moving image is gradually reduced, a hold icon 902 whose display mode is changed from “white” to “blue” appears. In this example, since the change animation and the movement animation of the hold icon 902 are executed at the same time, the hold icon 902 is visually recognized so that the display mode changes while moving.
(Example 1-5)
FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 show examples of effect display in Example 1-5 of this exemplary form in time series. FIG. 36A shows a state in which a certain special figure 1 variable game is finished. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure E (disconnection) is stopped and displayed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 turns on the leftmost LED to indicate that the special figure 1 hold is 1, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs to turn off the special figure 2 hold. 0 is displayed.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 2-decoration 8” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, the symbol “x” for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. Since the erasing animation in the fluctuation icon display area 800 has already ended, no fluctuation icon is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 800. A hold icon 901 (display mode: blue) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900.

  FIG. 36 (b) to FIG. 37 (c) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED. Here, it is assumed that the success / failure determination result of the change is a big hit (Special Figure A).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, immediately after the start of fluctuation, a darkening effect is performed in which almost the entire screen is temporarily displayed in black (FIG. 36B). During the darkening effect, decorative symbols, change icons, hold icons, etc. are not displayed, or are displayed internally (controllable) (although controllable status is displayed, priority is higher than the display) Is covered by a black image). The hold icon 901 becomes the change icon 801 simultaneously with the start of change, but the change icon 801 is deleted along with the execution of the darkening effect (the first deletion of the change icon 801). In the 4th symbol display area 208e, the 4th symbol variation display is performed even during the darkening effect, and it is notified that the variation is occurring.

  Thereafter, when the darkening effect is finished, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon display area 900, etc. can be visually recognized (FIG. 36C). In this example, since the movement animation and the change animation between the hold / change icons are internally ended during the darkening effect, the display mode has changed from “blue” to “red” in the change icon display area 800. A fluctuation icon 801 is displayed.

  After that, “decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and a reach state is reached in which the variable display is continued only in the symbol display area 208b (FIG. 36D).

  Thereafter, the display on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 gradually turns white (FIG. 36 (e)), and is switched to the screen background for the super reach effect (in this example, the swordsman reach effect) (FIG. 36 (f)). ). When the screen background of the super reach effect is switched, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the screen, and the fluctuation icon and the hold icon (the hold icon (the hold icon display area 900) displayed in the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 are displayed. In this example, the change icon 801) is deleted (the second deletion of the change icon 801). In the 4th symbol display area 208e, during the switching to the screen background for the super reach effect and during the super reach effect, the 4th symbol is displayed in a variable manner to notify that it is changing.

  Thereafter, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the upper right corner of the screen, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is changed. (FIG. 36 (g)). In the super-reach effect screen background (effect display area 208d), a character “losing” is displayed and a moving image indicating that the confrontation has been lost is displayed.

  Thereafter, the screen background for super reach production returns to the normal screen background (FIG. 36 (h)). When returning to the normal screen background, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and returned to their original positions. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is continued. In addition, the display of the variation icon and the hold icon in the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 is resumed. In this example, the change icon 801 whose display mode has changed from “red” to “gold” is displayed during the super reach production (while the change icon is being deleted). When returning to the normal screen background, the fluctuation icon 801 for notifying the validity of the fluctuation with high reliability is displayed again, thereby informing the player that the fluctuation has not ended yet and the chance remains. it can.

  Thereafter, the screen background is switched from the normal screen background to the reverse screen effect (FIG. 37A). When the screen background for the reverse effect is switched, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced again and moved to the upper right corner of the screen, and the fluctuation icon and the hold icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 are displayed. (The change icon 801 in this example) is deleted (the third deletion of the change icon 801).

  Thereafter, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the upper right corner of the screen, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” informing the 15R special jackpot is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is changed (see FIG. 37 (b)). On the screen background for the reverse effect, the word “win” is displayed, and a moving image indicating that the confrontation is won (reverse victory) is displayed.

  Thereafter, the screen background for the reverse effect is returned to the normal screen background (FIG. 37C). When returning to the normal screen background, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and returned to their original positions. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is continued. In addition, the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 return to the original positions. The variation icon 801 displayed in the variation icon display area 800 is changed to a special display mode “NO” for notifying the success / failure of the variation with a reliability of 100%. In this example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 changes every time the display is restored after being erased (blue → red → gold → win). The reliability of the display mode after the change is higher than the reliability of the display mode before the change, or is the same as the reliability of the display mode before the change. Further, it is not always necessary to change the display mode at the time of erasing. For example, the first change may be executed during erasure, and the second change may be executed during display.

  FIG. 37 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure A (15R special big hit) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the fluctuation of the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” ends in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, the symbol “◯” for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, the variation animation 801 erasing animation is started (fourth erasure of the variation icon 801).

In this example, the change icon 801 is deleted three times during the change period and four times if the change end is included. As described above, the variation icon with high reliability may be erased more times in one variation. However, even if the variation icon with high reliability has a large number of deletions, the length of the period during which the variation icon is displayed may be longer than the variation icon with a small number of deletions.
(Example 1-6)
FIGS. 38 and 39 show examples of effect display in Example 1-6 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIG. 38A shows a state in which a certain special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure E (disconnection) is stopped and displayed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights the first to second LEDs from the left to indicate that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs. It is displayed that the hold in FIG. 2 is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 2-decoration 8” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed. A hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, and a hold icon 902 (display mode: blue) is displayed in the second area. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, no fluctuation icon is displayed. In this example, a frame-like image that clearly indicates the position of the variable icon display area 800 is also not displayed.

  FIGS. 38B to 38D show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1 by turning off the second LED from the left.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the hold icon display area 900, a predetermined animation is started. Here, in this example, the display time of the variation icon differs depending on the final display mode as the hold icon, and becomes longer as the reliability of the display mode is higher. For example, when the final display mode of the hold icon is default (for example, white), the display time of the variable icon corresponding to the hold icon may be set to zero. When the display time of the fluctuation icon is set to 0, the movement animation and the change animation between the hold and change icons are omitted, and the change animation of the hold icon is deleted without changing the hold icon to the change icon (deletion of the hold icon) (Animation) may be executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 38B, in the hold icon display area 900, an erase animation of the hold icon 901 and a moving animation of the hold icon 902 are started. In the deletion animation of the hold icon 901, an effect moving image representing, for example, light is displayed around the hold icon 901 (FIG. 38B), and the effect moving image and the hold icon 901 itself are gradually reduced (FIG. 38C). )) And finally disappear (FIG. 38 (d)).

  In the movement animation of the hold icon 902, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually moves to the first area. Here, as shown in FIG. 38C, the movement animation of the hold icon 902 may overlap with the deletion animation of the hold icon 901.

  FIG. 38 (e) shows a state in which the special figure variable game has ended. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  38 (f) to 38 (h) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure fluctuation game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons is started. In this example, since the display mode is the default for the hold icon 901, the movement animation between the hold / variation icons is omitted. However, since the display mode of the hold icon 902 is not the default, the movement animation between the hold / change icons is omitted. Is executed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 801 and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving.

  Thereafter, “decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and a reach state is reached in which the variable display is continued only in the symbol display area 208b (FIG. 38 (h)).

39 (a) to 39 (d) show a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is executed. The display time of the fluctuation icon 801 (for example, the time from the start of the moving animation between the hold and change icons to the end of the change icon deletion animation) is at least the display time of the change icon corresponding to the default hold icon (in this example, It is longer than 0).
(Example 1-7)
40 and 41 show examples of effect display in Example 1-7 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIG. 40A shows a state in which a certain special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure E (disconnection) is stopped and displayed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 turns on the first to third LEDs from the left to indicate that the special figure 1 hold is 3, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs. It is displayed that the hold in FIG. 2 is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 2-decoration 8” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed. Since the erasing animation in the fluctuation icon display area 800 has already ended, no fluctuation icon is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 800. The hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) is displayed in the second area, and the third area is displayed. Shows a hold icon 903 (display mode: blue).

  FIGS. 40B and 40C show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2 by turning off the third LED from the left.

  In the special figure 1 variable game, the effect of the pre-reading mode is started on the basis that the predetermined condition is established. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal screen background is switched to the screen background for the prefetch mode. When switched to the screen background for the prefetch mode, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the screen. In addition, the variable icon display area 800 is reduced and moved to the lower right corner of the screen, and the hold icon display area 900 is reduced and deformed to be vertically long and moved above the variable icon display area 800. The first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 are arranged in order from the bottom close to the variable icon display area 800. In the normal screen, the movement direction of each icon in the variable icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 is basically the left-right direction (left direction). (Downward). That is, when the screen is switched from the normal screen to the screen for the prefetch mode, the positions and sizes of the variable icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 and the moving directions of the icons are changed. In the effect display area 208d, a moving image of the hero character is displayed, and characters “high probability state entry!” And “high probability state” indicating that the pre-reading mode has been entered are displayed.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the upper right corner of the screen, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 in the lower right corner of the screen, the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are started. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 801, and the change icon display area below is gradually enlarged while the display size is gradually enlarged. Move to 800. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 902 moves from the second area to the first area, and the hold icon 903 moves from the third area to the second area.

  FIG. 40 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. At this time, by pre-displaying a specific symbol combination, it may be pre-read informed that there is a highly reliable hold. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon deletion animation is executed, and the variation icon 801 is deleted.

  FIG. 40 (e) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1 by turning off the second LED from the left.

  In this special figure 1 variable game, the effect of the prefetch mode is continued. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 903 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 moves to the first area.

  FIG. 40 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon deletion animation is executed, and the variation icon 802 is deleted.

  FIGS. 40 (g) to 41 (b) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED.

  In the effect display area 208d, the look-ahead mode effect is continued, and a moving image in which the main character finds the swordsman character is displayed, suggesting the execution of the swordsman reach effect (FIG. 40 (g)). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons is executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 903 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving.

  Thereafter, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are in the reach state, and the effect display area 208d is switched to the screen background for the swordsman reach effect (FIG. 40 (h)). In this example, even after switching to the screen background for the swordsman reach production, the display of the variable icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 at the lower right of the screen is maintained. For this reason, the fluctuation icon in the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon (only the fluctuation icon 803 in this example) in the hold icon display area 900 are not erased.

  Thereafter, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the upper right corner of the screen, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is changed. (FIG. 41 (a)). On the screen background, a character “losing” is displayed and a moving image indicating that the confrontation has been lost is displayed.

  Thereafter, the screen background for the swordsman reach production returns to the normal screen background (FIG. 41B). When returning to the normal screen background, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and returned to their original positions. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is continued. In addition, the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 return to the original positions.

41 (c) and 41 (d) show a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the fluctuation of the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. (FIG. 41 (c)). In the variation icon display area 800, the variation icon erasing animation is started and the variation icon 803 is erased (FIG. 41D).
(Example 1-8)
42 and 43 show an example of effect display in Example 1-8 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIG. 42A shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights the first and second LEDs from the left to indicate that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs. It is displayed that the hold in the special figure 2 is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. A hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, and a hold icon 902 (display mode: thousand carton box) is displayed in the second area.

  FIG. 42 (b) shows a state in which a power interruption occurs during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. At the time of power interruption, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the like are all turned off.

  FIG. 42 (c) shows a state immediately after power recovery. When a power interruption occurs during the fluctuation period, the main control unit 300 saves information on the fluctuation lottery results (whether determination result, stop symbol, fluctuation display time (timer number), etc.). For this reason, after the power recovery, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 over the remaining fluctuation time. In this example, it is assumed that a winning to the special figure 1 starting port 230 occurs after the power recovery, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is increased from 2 to 3. On the other hand, since the information such as the lottery result of the variation is lost in the first sub-control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variation of the decorative symbol, such as “Recovering”, “Please wait for a while”, etc. A power recovery screen including a text message is displayed for a predetermined time. On the power recovery screen, decorative symbols, change icons, hold icons, etc. are not displayed. After receiving the symbol variation stop command or the next symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 resumes control such as decoration symbol variation stop display.

  FIG. 42 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure E (disconnection) is stopped and displayed. The first sub-control unit 400 performs control to display default symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c based on the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. As a result, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the default symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6” for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. When power interruption / recovery occurs during the fluctuation period, various animations of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon are not executed during the fluctuation period.

FIGS. 42E and 42F show a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2 by turning off the third LED from the left .

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, predetermined animations (movement animation between hold and change icons, change animation between hold and change icons, hold icon movement animation) are started. Here, in the 1st sub control part 400, the information on the display mode of a hold icon has disappeared by power interruption. In this example, when the information on the display mode of the hold icon disappears, the first sub-control unit 400 displays all the hold icons (including the hold icons 903 corresponding to the hold increased during the recovery) in common display. It is displayed in a mode (in this example, the display mode is “Hatena (?)” Which is not normally displayed, but it may be the default display mode “White”).

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. Moving.

  In the change animation between the hold and change icons, the display mode of the change icon 802 changes from “Hatena” which is the display mode as the hold icon to “white”, for example. The final display mode of the variation icon is determined based on, for example, the determination result of the variation included in the symbol variation start command. Therefore, unlike the hold icon, the fluctuation icon can be displayed as usual even after power interruption. The change animation between the hold and change icons is executed at the same time as the movement animation between the hold and change icons.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 902 moves from the second area to the first area, and the hold icon 903 moves from the third area to the second area.

  FIG. 42 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is displayed.

  FIG.42 (h)-FIG.43 (b) have shown the state during the fluctuation period of the following special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1 by turning off the second LED from the left.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, predetermined animations (movement animation between hold and change icons, change animation between hold and change icons, hold icon movement animation) are started.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving.

  In the change animation between the hold and change icons, the display mode of the change icon 803 changes from “Hatena” which is the display mode as the hold icon 902 to, for example, “red”. The final display mode of the variation icon is determined based on, for example, the determination result of the variation included in the symbol variation start command. Here, at the time of FIG. 42 (a), the display mode of the hold icon 902 is “thousand boxes”. However, since the hold icon change scenario or the like is lost due to a power interruption, the display mode of the change icon 803 is not a box system. Don't be. For example, when the display mode of the fluctuation icon is determined based on the display mode of the hold icon, and the scenario is lost due to power interruption / recovery, the display mode of the fluctuation icon is set to the scenario with no scenario or the least reliable scenario. To be determined. The change animation between the hold and change icons is executed at the same time as the movement animation between the hold and change icons.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 903 moves from the second area to the first area.

Assume that at the time shown in FIG. 43 (b), the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one. At this time, even if the hold icon 903 at the time of return (display mode: Hatena) still remains, the hold icon 904 (display mode: box) corresponding to the hold increased after the return from power interruption is normally read-ahead notification ( (Display in a predetermined display mode) may be performed.
(Example 1-9)
FIG. 44 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-9 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIG. 44 (a) shows a state during a variation period (immediately before the end) of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 0, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 2—decoration 8” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is temporarily stopped, and fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is performed. This state is a state waiting for a symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, the fluctuation of the shaking is finished and the symbol combination is stopped and displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. Here, the variation icon display end condition in this example is not the reception of the symbol variation stop command, but a predetermined time (for example, the variation time of the variation timer of the variation) has elapsed since the start of the variation. .

  44 (b) and 44 (c) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has ended, but the first sub-control unit 400 has missed the symbol fluctuation stop command. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure E (disconnection) is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination fluctuation fluctuation is still being executed due to the missing symbol variation stop command.

  In the variation icon display area 800, the variation icon erasing animation is started and the variation icon 801 is erased when the variation time of the variation timer has elapsed, regardless of the missing of the symbol variation stop command.

  In this example, the fluctuation of the symbol combination continues, but it may be possible for the player to notice that the special figure variation game has already ended by deleting the variation icon 801. In addition, while the fluctuation icon 801 is erased in the fluctuation icon display area 800, it is possible to cause a sense of incongruity that the fluctuation fluctuation continues in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In some cases, it can be triggered. Thereby, since it is possible to notify the game store clerk that some abnormality has occurred, the game store clerk may be able to grasp the occurrence of the abnormality.

When a symbol variation stop command is received, a variation icon deletion animation may be performed.
(Example 1-10)
FIG. 45 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-10 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIG. 45 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 3, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in this example, the change icon and the hold icon are displayed only in a specific production mode (in this example, the 爺 mode), and at present, the production mode other than the specific production mode (in this example, Yoshimune mode) Suppose that Therefore, at present, the variation icon and the hold icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 45 (b) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 6" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  FIG. 45 (c) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Here, when this special figure 1 variable game is started, the production mode is switched from the Yoshimune mode to the Samurai mode based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Conditions for switching to the 爺 mode include, for example, that a specific lottery result has been derived (may be look-ahead), that the stage stage has been changed based on the player's operation, and that the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number , Winning a predetermined stage change lottery, etc. In the heel mode, the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 appear, and the change icon and the hold icon can be displayed. In this example, the variation icon 801 (display mode: blue) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is suddenly displayed in the variation icon display area 800 without any movement animation or variation animation between the hold / variation icons. . In addition, in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: thousands of boxes) are suddenly displayed without animation.

  FIG. 45 (d) shows a state in which the special figure variable game has ended. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, an animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 801 is performed.

  45 (e) to 45 (g) show a state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure fluctuation game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 2 to 1.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are performed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 moves to the first area.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, when a predetermined hold storage condition is established, holds storage means (for example, RAM 308, special figure 1 random number value) that can store at least predetermined start information as hold. A storage area, a special figure 2 random value storage area, and a hold display means capable of displaying at least one hold icon corresponding to the one hold when the predetermined hold display condition is satisfied (for example, a decorative symbol display) The device 208, the hold icon display area 900, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500), and a determination unit (e.g. When the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)) and a predetermined symbol variation condition are satisfied, after performing the symbol variation, A symbol display means capable of executing at least a symbol variation stop display for stopping and displaying a symbol mode corresponding to the result of the negative determination (for example, special symbol display device 212, special symbol 2 display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208); When a predetermined notice condition is satisfied, notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 800, a hold icon display area 900, a first sub-control unit 400, a first notice) capable of executing at least a predetermined notice. 2 sub-control unit 500), wherein the notice means is capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation icon as the notice when the predetermined notice condition is satisfied. The notice means is capable of displaying the variation icon after the symbol variation is started (for example, at the same time as or after the symbol variation is started). The aspect of the variable icon is an aspect related to the aspect of the hold icon (for example, an aspect in which at least a part of the shape, size, color, written character, and operation mode (animation) is common). It is characterized by that.

  According to this structure, a player's interest can be improved effectively by execution of a highly continuous notice.

  In addition, according to this configuration, there is a case where the player's motivation can be improved by illusioning the player as if it is held more than it actually is. May be possible).

  Moreover, according to this structure, it may be able to alert | report clearly that the said fluctuation | variation is performed based on having suspended | suspended.

  Moreover, according to this structure, it may become easy to understand what kind of notice is given for the change.

  In addition, according to this configuration, the mode of the hold icon as the hold prefetching notice is composed of a form related to the change icon displayed based on the result of the determination of whether or not the change is made, and the continuity of the prefetch notice and the change notice is maintained. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, according to this configuration, there is a case where the player can be made to pay attention to the fluctuation rather than the hold icon.

  Further, in the gaming table according to the present exemplary embodiment, a holding icon storage unit (for example, ROM 406) capable of storing one or a plurality of holding icons having different modes (for example, texture data corresponding to the holding icons of a plurality of display modes); Variation icon storage means (for example, ROM 406) capable of storing one or a plurality of variation icons having different aspects (for example, texture data corresponding to the variation icons of a plurality of display aspects), and a first notice condition (for example, , Change start) is satisfied, the notification condition is satisfied, and even when a second notification condition (for example, increase in the number of holdings) different from the first notification condition is satisfied, The notice condition is established, and the notice means stores the variable icon as the notice when the first notice condition is established. A predetermined mode is determined from the variation icons stored in a row, and at least the variation icon can be displayed in the mode (for example, steps S1303 and S1305 of the variation icon display control process), and the notification means When the second notice condition is satisfied, a predetermined mode is determined from the hold icons stored in the hold icon storage unit as the notice, and at least the hold icon is displayed in the form. It is possible (for example, steps S1203, S1205, and S1207 of the hold icon display control process), and the variation icon storage means varies the common variation icons (for example, variations of display modes “white”, “blue”, “red”) Icon) at least, and the holding icon storage means has a common holding icon in the same mode as the common variation icon. (E.g., display mode "white", "blue", held icon of "red") and characterized in that at least stores.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to further increase the relevance of the notice by displaying the icons in the same manner.

  Further, according to this configuration, the change icon and the hold icon have the same mode, and when the change is performed by digesting the hold, the player is illusioned as if the change was made without reducing the hold. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, the variation icon storage means may have a unique variation icon (for example, display modes “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, different from the common variation icon. It is characterized in that at least a “family crest” variation icon) is stored.

  According to this configuration, the variation icon may have a specific aspect while having a common aspect with the hold icon, so that it may be possible to emphasize to the player that the predetermined hold has been consumed. In some cases, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of holds.

  Further, according to this configuration, for example, when the unique mode of the variation icon has a higher reliability than the common mode, the player's notice is displayed before the start of the target hold variation. There is a case where it is possible to prevent the player from being greatly discouraged even if the target hold is removed because the gambling feeling is not struck.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, the hold icon storage means has a unique hold icon (for example, a hold icon of a display form “box” or “thousand box”) having a different form from the common change icon and the unique change icon. At least, and the variation icon storage means stores the number of unique variation icons (for example, 5) larger than the number of unique retention icons (for example, 2) stored in the suspension icon storage means. It is characterized by being.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where the player's gambling feeling can be kept moderate without excessively expecting the target fluctuation. Moreover, since the effects can be performed in various modes while exhibiting such effects, it may be possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced.

  Further, according to this configuration, for example, when the specific mode of the hold icon is 0, the player's expectation for the change of the icon may be able to be concentrated on the change.

  In addition, in the game stand according to the present exemplary embodiment, the appearance rate may be higher in the unique mode of the variable icon than in the unique mode of the hold icon. In other words, when the first notice condition is satisfied, the notice means can display at least the inherent variation icon with the first probability as the notice, and the notice means has the second notice If the notice condition is satisfied, the unique hold icon can be displayed at least with a second probability as the notice, and the first probability is higher than the second probability. Features. The second probability may be zero (0%).

  According to this configuration, there is a case where the player's gambling feeling can be kept moderate without excessively expecting the target fluctuation.

  Further, according to this configuration, since the aspect of the icon is more likely to change when it is changing than when it is on hold, it may be possible to attract the player's attention to the change rather than hold.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, when a predetermined hold storage condition is satisfied, holds storage means (for example, RAM 308, special figure 1 random value storage area, special storage that can store at least predetermined start information as hold). FIG. 2 random number storage area) and a predetermined hold display condition, a hold display means that can display at least one hold icon corresponding to the one hold (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, hold) The icon display area 900, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500) and a determination unit (for example, related to FIG. 2) that can execute at least determination of success / failure when a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied. If the lottery process (step S229), the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)) and a predetermined symbol variation condition are satisfied, the result of the determination of success or failure after performing symbol variation Symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least executing symbol fluctuation stop display for displaying the corresponding symbol form in a stopped manner, and a predetermined notice condition If established, a notice means capable of starting at least a predetermined notice (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 800, a hold icon display area 900, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500). ), And the notice means is capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation icon as the notice when the predetermined notice condition is satisfied. , The variation icon can be displayed after the symbol variation is started (for example, at the same time as or after the symbol variation starts), When the predetermined notice stop condition is satisfied after the change icon is displayed, the display of the change icon can be stopped at least (for example, steps S1307 and S1309 of the change icon display control process), When the first notice stop condition is satisfied, the predetermined notice stop condition is satisfied, and when the second notice stop condition different from the first notice stop condition is satisfied, The predetermined notice stop condition is satisfied, and the mode of the variation icon is a mode related to the mode of the hold icon (for example, shape, size, color, written character, mode during operation (animation)) At least a part of which is a common aspect).

  According to this configuration, by erasing the variation icon at various occasions, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation and improve the interest of the game stand.

  Moreover, according to this structure, a player may be able to make a player pay attention to the display of the fluctuation icon in fluctuation. Further, according to this configuration, there is a case where the player can be surely notified that the hold has been digested without interfering with other notices executed during the fluctuation.

  In addition, according to this configuration, it is difficult to grasp the increase / decrease in the number of holdings by providing multiple timings for stopping the display of the variable icon indicating that the holding has been exhausted, and the operation of the game machine by suppressing stoppages, etc. May be able to promote.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, the first notice stop condition is satisfied during a predetermined symbol variation display period, and the second notice stop condition is the predetermined symbol change display period. And the first notice stop condition is satisfied.

  According to this configuration, by erasing the variation icon a plurality of times within one variation period, it is possible to make the player have an illusion as if the variation has been performed by digesting a plurality of suspensions by digesting one suspension. There is a case.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, the second notice stop condition executes a specific symbol variation display in which the symbol display means stops and displays a symbol mode corresponding to a specific determination result (for example, a big hit) The first probability (for example, the probability that a super reach effect will be executed in the case of a big hit) is established, and the second notice stop condition is that the symbol display means has the specific success or failure. When executing the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol mode corresponding to the determination result (for example, disengagement) different from the determination result, the second probability (for example, in the case of outlier) different from the first probability The first probability is higher than the second probability.

  According to this configuration, the greater the variation in the jackpot reliability, the more easily the announcement effect is executed, and there is a case where the announcement effect with a high jackpot reliability with a low appearance frequency is performed for the executed announcement effect. By repeating the stop and return of the display of the variation icon, the above effects are achieved but the other effects described above are not disturbed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, when the first notice stop condition is satisfied, the notice means displays the change icon in the first form (for example, the display form of the change icon immediately before erasure). The display is stopped (for example, interrupted), and the notice means, when the second notice stop condition is satisfied, is different from the first aspect (for example, immediately before erasure). The display of the variation icon is stopped (for example, suspended) in the display mode of the variation icon).

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to easily grasp the reliability of the fluctuation by making it easy to grasp the number of times erasure is performed. In addition, according to this configuration, it may be possible to easily determine whether the display of the fluctuation icon is merely an interruption or an erasure for grasping that the hold has been consumed.

  Further, according to this configuration, by deleting the change icon multiple times in a different manner during the change of 1 performed based on the digestion of 1 hold, the multiple hold is digested and the change is performed multiple times. In some cases, it is possible to make the player have an illusion.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, the notice unit displays at least the change icon when a predetermined notice restart condition is satisfied after the display of the change icon is stopped (for example, interrupted). It can be restarted (for example, steps S1315 and S1317 of the change icon display control process).

  According to this configuration, there is a case where it is difficult to grasp the increase / decrease of the hold and the operation of the game machine can be promoted by returning the display of the fluctuation icon once deleted.

  In the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, the hold icon and the change icon may have at least a part of the display mode and may be different from each other. For example, the hold icon and the variation icon may have at least a part of the shape, size, color, written character, and operation mode (animation) in common, and other parts may be different. Moreover, the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon for giving a notice to the same start information may be related to each other (when the change icon is seen, it is grasped which hold icon is associated with. be able to). Further, when switching from the hold icon to the change icon, an animation may be executed.

  According to these configurations, it is easy to understand that the change that is the subject of the hold icon notice is being made, and even after the start of change, the notice is continued in a manner related to the notice that was made before the start of change. May be easy to draw attention to the player. On the other hand, displaying at least some of the modes in a unique mode may allow the player to recognize that the hold has already been digested and the change has been made. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the correct number of pending balances, and the game may be able to proceed smoothly.

  In addition, by displaying the variation icon in a manner related to the hold icon, the player can be illusioned as if it is held more than it actually is, and the game motivation may be improved.

  In the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, the variation icon with high reliability may be erased in a single variation, or the time ratio may be increased. Variations in which a highly reliable announcement is made tend to have a long variation time and are likely to overlap with other announcements (for example, super reach production), increasing the chance of interrupting / erasing the display. Further, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be changed while the display of the fluctuation icon is interrupted / erased. In addition, even if the fluctuation icon with high reliability is erased more frequently than the fluctuation icon with low reliability, the display time in the unit fluctuation of the fluctuation icon with high reliability is the display time of the fluctuation icon with low reliability. You may make it become longer than the display time in a unit fluctuation.

  According to these configurations, the number of times the variation icon is erased in one variation serves as a guideline for reliability, and even a player with low skill level may easily grasp the reliability.

  In the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, the variation icon may be deleted after the stop display of one symbol. The change being executed and the stop display of the symbol as a result of the change reliably inform the player that the change icon to be erased was based on the fact that the corresponding hold was consumed. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, the variation icon may be deleted based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, the variation time of the selected variation timer) from the start of the variation. As a result, even when an abnormality occurs in the main control unit 300 or when the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 misses a command, the variable icon can be deleted, and the hold is exhausted. There is a case where it can be notified that this has been done.

  Further, the change icon may be deleted from the start of change until reach is established. As a result, the variable icon may be deleted at a timing that does not interfere with the advance notice.

  Further, the change icon may be erased after the reach is established and before the display of the change icon display area and the hold icon display area is interrupted. As a result, the variable icon may be deleted at a timing that does not interfere with the advance notice.

  Further, the variation icon may be erased before the display of the variation icon display area is resumed. Further, the change icon may be deleted before the symbol stop display is performed. Further, the variation icon may be erased during the symbol fixed display time (the time from the variation stop to the next variation start, for example, about 600 ms).

  Further, the variation icon may be erased based on reception of a predetermined signal from the main control unit 300. Further, the variation icon may be deleted based on the reception of the variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Further, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area may be displayed even when there is no change.

  Further, the movement animation from the hold icon to the change icon may be omitted based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the display becomes the same as when the display is restored after the display of the change icon is interrupted in the middle of the change, so the number of holds may be misidentified and the player may be prevented from stopping. is there.

  When the display of each icon display area (the icon itself associated therewith) is interrupted in accordance with the execution of super reach, control may be performed so that at least the display of the variable icon is not restored when the display area is restored. In the case where the advance notice is made with the change icon, the player may be uncomfortable if the change icon is shown after the lottery result is lost. Therefore, by doing as described above, it may be possible to avoid leaving a bad impression on the player.

  Further, there may be a plurality of variation icon erasure animation modes. The aspect of the animation of erasing the variable icon may be different for each jackpot reliability or special figure. On the contrary, the same type of erasing animation may be performed with variations in reliability or a plurality of special drawings.

  Further, when the priority of the special figure 2 on the priority fluctuation side is higher than that of the special figure 1, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation icon based on the hold of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted may select the default display mode. Good. Thereby, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from scolding the player's gambling feeling by hitting an advantageous hit too much.

  In addition, it is not necessary to always display the fluctuation icon. For example, the fluctuation icon may be displayed only when the fluctuation icon is displayed as a notice by the effect lottery or when the pre-reading notice (holding icon) for the fluctuation is displayed. Good.

  Moreover, you may change the display mode (For example, a shape, a magnitude | size, an icon moving direction, etc.) of a fluctuation | variation icon display area and a pending | holding icon display area. Thereby, it may be possible not to disturb other notices and effects.

  Further, not only the power interruption / recovery as in the embodiment 1-8, but also when the game state is changed due to, for example, a big hit or ST end, the hold icon and the variation icon are determined in advance a predetermined number of times. You may make it display in the given mode.

  Further, the erasure and return of the variation icon may be repeated a plurality of times each time a pseudo-ream is performed.

  Further, when a special success / failure determination result is derived as the determination result, execution of at least one of the moving animation, the change animation, and the erasure animation on the change icon may be restricted. Thereby, it may be possible not to interfere with the notice or the production.

  In addition, the reliability may not decrease when the hold icon changes to the hold icon, and the reliability may decrease when the change icon changes from the hold icon or from the change icon to the change icon.

In addition, the variation icon may have an aspect (for example, “gold”) having a jackpot reliability of 100%.
[Second exemplary form]
Next, a gaming table according to the second exemplary form of the present description will be described. About the structure of the pachinko machine 100 by this example form, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 by a 1st example form, description is abbreviate | omitted. Hereinafter, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present exemplary embodiment will be described.
(Example 2-1)
46 and 47 show examples of effect display in Example 2-1 of this exemplary form in time series. FIG. 46 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 1, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. A hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900. In this example, the four characters “Yatsushiro Shogun” as shown in FIG. For the variation icon and each hold icon, for example, a standby animation (rotation in the clockwise direction) in the form shown in FIG. 18A is executed. The period, phase, and the like of the standby animation are not necessarily the same between the plurality of hold icons or between the change icon and the hold icon. For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 46A, the variation icon 801 has the character “army” in the normal position, and the hold icon 901 has the character “yo” in the normal position instead of “army”.

  46 (b) to 46 (f) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is displayed. Is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is executed. In this example, when the animation for deleting the variation icon is started, the standby animation for the variation icon is stopped. That is, the change icon 801 is displayed as a single picture (display mode that does not rotate, deform, scale, etc.) of a predetermined texture image (for example, a texture image in an initial state) during execution of the erase animation. However, the standby animation of the variation icon may also be executed during the execution period of the variation icon deletion animation.

  As shown in FIGS. 46B to 46F, in the erase animation of the variation icon 801, the variation icon 801 moves downward in the variation icon display area 800 and gradually starts from the portion that protrudes outside the variation icon display area 800. Will be erased. In this example, the erase animation of the change icon 801 ends before the next special figure change game is started. Further, in this example, the standby animation of the hold icon 901 is continued even while the deletion animation of the change icon 801 is being executed.

  FIG. 46 (g) to FIG. 47 (d) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure fluctuation game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 1 to 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons is started. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. It moves (FIGS. 46 (g) to (d)). In this example, when the movement animation between the hold / change icon is started, the standby animation of the change icon (hold icon) is stopped. That is, the change icon 802 is displayed as a single picture of a predetermined texture image (for example, an initial texture image) during the movement animation. The standby animation may be canceled at the same time as the start of the moving animation, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the moving animation, or after the moving animation starts, the fluctuation icon 802 is rotated in the clockwise direction. It may be the time when it has rotated to the initial state for the first time. In addition, during the execution of the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the standby animation of the change icons may be executed together. Further, the movement animation and the standby animation may be controlled independently, or the other control state may be switched according to one control state.

  Assume that two suspensions in the special figure 1 have been continuously increased at the time shown in FIG. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 0 to 2. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon in this example, the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 903 (display mode: white) are the respective areas of the hold icon display area 900 (the hold icon 902 is the first area, the hold). The icon 903 rises to the second area) from below (FIG. 46 (h)), and then moves around each area in order to highlight the increase in the holding (FIGS. 47A and 47B). ). In this example, during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the standby animation of the hold icon is not executed. That is, the hold icons 902 and 903 are displayed as a single picture of a predetermined texture image (for example, a texture image in an initial state) until the increase animation ends. In addition, during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the standby animation of the hold icon may be executed together.

  In this example, if the movement animation execution period and the increase animation execution period overlap, the change icon during the movement animation and the hold icon during the increase animation may be displayed overlapping each other. is there. Specifically, a change icon 802 in the process of moving from the first area of the hold icon display area 900 to the change icon display area 800 by the movement animation, and a hold icon in the process of increasing in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 by the increase animation. 902 are displayed overlapping each other (FIGS. 46H and 47A). The change icon 802 has a higher display priority than the hold icon 902, and the change icon 802 is displayed in a layer above the hold icon 902, so that part or all of the hold icon 902 is shielded by the change icon 802.

  On the other hand, there are a change icon 802 in the process of moving from the first area of the hold icon display area 900 to the change icon display area 800 by the movement animation, and a hold icon 903 in the process of increasing in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 by the increase animation. The execution periods of both animations overlap, but the display does not overlap.

  At the time shown in FIG. 47 (c), the increase animation of the hold icon ends. When the increase animation of the hold icon ends, the hold icons 902 and 903 are displayed in the first area and the second area of the hold icon display area 900, respectively. In addition, a standby animation of the hold icons 902 and 903 is started.

The movement animation between the hold / change icons continues even after the increase animation of the hold icon is finished (finished in FIG. 47 (d)). In this example, the movement animation between the hold / change icons starts before the start of the increase animation of the hold icon and ends after the end of the increase animation of the hold icon. That is, in this example, the execution time (scale) of the movement animation between the hold / change icons is longer than the execution time of the increase animation of the hold icon.
(Example 2-2)
48 and 49 show examples of effect display in Example 2-2 of this exemplary form in time series. In this example, it is assumed that the variation icon display area 800 and the variation icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 48A shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 1, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a standby animation of the hold icon 901 is executed.

  FIG. 48 (b) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  48 (c) to 48 (e) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 1 to 0. In the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon deletion animation is started. In the hold icon deletion animation, the transparency of the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually increases (FIGS. 48C and 48D) and eventually disappears. (FIG. 48 (e)).

  FIG. 48 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 5—decoration 1” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. At this time, the suspension of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, so that even if a predetermined stop display period elapses, the next special figure variable game is not started and the state becomes non-variable.

  FIG. 48 (g) shows a state immediately after the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won in the non-variable state and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 based on winning the special figure 1 starting port 230. Since the special figure 1 variable game starts immediately after winning the prize, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 continues to indicate that the special figure 1 hold is 0 (the leftmost LED is lit immediately after winning the prize). May be) When the special figure 1 starting game 230 is won in the non-variable state and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the increase animation of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 900 may be omitted (shortened display).

  FIG. 48 (h) shows a state in which the number of pending in FIG. 1 is increased by one after the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 0 to 1. In the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of the hold icon is started. In this increase animation of the hold icon, a hold increase target area of the hold icon display area 900 (an area where a new hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is displayed. The first area when the hold increases from 0 to 1) In FIG. 5, a hold icon 902 with high transparency (for example, 100%) is displayed, and the hold icon 902 becomes visible by gradually decreasing the transparency of the hold icon 902. The increase animation of the hold icon in this example is a mode opposite to the erasure animation (animation in which the transparency gradually increases) shown in FIGS. In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon is also executed during the execution period of the increase animation of the hold icon. In particular, if the display mode of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon is the same, the increase animation and the deletion animation may be displayed by reversing the reproduction order of the same animation.

  FIG. 49A shows a state in which the number of suspensions in FIG. The special figure 1 hold lamp indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 1 to 4. In the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of three hold icons is started. In the increase animation of the hold icon, the hold icons 903 to 905 having high transparency (for example, 100%) are displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, and the transparency of the hold icons 903 to 905 is gradually lowered. The hold icons 903 to 905 appear. In this example, the execution periods of the increase animations for each of the hold icons 903 to 905 overlap. In this example, since the increase animation of the hold icon 902 has not yet ended when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 to 905 is started, the increase period of the hold icon 902 is the execution period of the increase animation of the hold icon 903 to 905. It overlaps with the duration of the animation. As described above, the execution periods of a plurality of increase animations (in this example, each increase animation of the hold icons 902 to 905) may overlap each other.

  FIG. 49 (b) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 8-decoration 1-decoration 4” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  49 (c) and 49 (d) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 4 to 3.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon deletion animation and a hold icon movement animation are executed.

  In the on-hold icon erasing animation, the transparency of the on-hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the on-hold icon display area 900 gradually increases in the same manner as the on-screen icon 901 deletion animation shown in FIGS. (Fig. 49 (c)) and finally disappear (Fig. 49 (d)).

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 903 to 905 displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 move to the first to third areas, respectively (FIGS. 49C and 49D). )). In this example, the execution period of the hold icon movement animation overlaps with the execution period of the hold icon deletion animation. Further, the standby icon standby animation is also executed during the execution period of the hold icon movement animation and the erase animation.

  In this example, the hold icon during execution of the erase animation and the hold icon during execution of the movement animation may be displayed overlapping each other. Specifically, the hold icon 902 that is being erased from the first area of the hold icon display area 900 by the delete animation and the second area of the hold icon display area 900 are moved from the second area to the first area by the moving animation. The hold icon 903 on the way is displayed overlapping each other. Since the hold icon 902 that is the target of the deletion animation has a higher display priority than the hold icon 903 that is the target of the movement animation, the hold icon 902 is displayed in a layer above the hold icon 903. Thereby, part or all of the hold icon 903 may be blocked by the hold icon 902. However, depending on the transparency of the hold icon 902, the hold icon 903 may be visible even in an overlapping portion with the hold icon 902.

Here, the standby animations of a plurality of hold icons (for example, the four hold icons 902 to 905 shown in FIG. 49B and the three hold icons 903 to 905 shown in FIG. 49D) are synchronized with each other. May be. Further, the standby animation of the hold icon that is executing another animation (for example, increase, movement, or deletion) may be synchronized with the standby animation of the other hold icon. The period of the standby animation of the hold icon may be maintained from a predetermined trigger (for example, power-on, previous jackpot, etc.). In this case, the cycle calculation control may be continuously performed even when the hold icon is not displayed.
(Example 2-3)
50 and 51 show examples of effect display in Example 2-3 of this exemplary form in time series. In this example, it is assumed that the variation icon display area 800 and the variation icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 50A shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 1, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. One hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a standby animation of the hold icon 901 is executed.

  FIG. 50 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  FIG. 50 (c) to FIG. 51 (b) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 1 to 0. In the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon deletion animation is started. In the hold icon erasing animation, the transparency of the hold icon 901 gradually increases in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 and eventually disappears. For example, the transparency of the hold icon 901 is 25% at the time shown in FIG. 50 (c), 50% at the time shown in FIG. 50 (d), and at the time shown in FIGS. 50 (e) and 50 (f). 75%, and 100% at the time shown in FIG. 50 (g) (or the hold icon 901 itself may be deleted). In this example, when the deletion animation of the hold icon is started, the standby animation of the hold icon is stopped.

  Here, at the time shown in FIG. 50 (f), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 0 to 1. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon, in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) with high transparency (for example, transparency 100%) is displayed, and the transparency of the hold icon 902 gradually increases. By lowering, the hold icon 902 becomes visible. For example, the transparency of the hold icon 902 is 75% at the time shown in FIG. 50 (f), 50% at the time shown in FIG. 50 (g), and 25% at the time shown in FIG. 50 (h). , It is 0% at the time shown in FIG. In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon is stopped until the increase animation of the hold icon ends.

  In this example, the hold icon 901 to be deleted and the hold icon 902 to be increased have the same display mode “white”, and the delete animation of the hold icon and the increase animation in a mode opposite to the delete animation are provided. Are executed in the same area (the first area of the hold icon display area 900). When the increase animation is started in the middle of the erasing animation, the apparent transparency of the hold icon gradually increases to a predetermined transparency and then gradually decreases. Note that the hold icon 901 to be deleted and the hold icon 902 to be increased do not have to be in the same display mode, and the execution period of the deletion animation of the hold icon and the execution period of the increase animation are not the same time. Also good. If the erase animation and the increase animation are started almost simultaneously and the execution periods of both animations are substantially the same, the apparent transparency of the held icon may hardly change during the execution of both animations.

  In this example, since the transparency of the hold icon 901 gradually increases from 0% to 75% in FIGS. 50C to 50E, the apparent transparency of the hold icon gradually increases. In FIG. 50 (f), the transparency of the hold icon 901 is 75%, but the hold icon 902 having a transparency of 75% is displayed in an overlapping manner, so that the apparent transparency of the hold icon is lower than 75%. In FIG. 50G, the transparency of the hold icon 901 is 100%, but since the hold icon 902 having a transparency of 50% is displayed in an overlapping manner, the apparent transparency of the hold icon is about 50%. 50 (h) to 51 (a), the hold icon 901 is deleted, and the transparency of the hold icon 902 gradually decreases. As a result, the apparent transparency of the hold icon gradually increases during the period shown in FIGS. 50C to 50E, and reaches 75% transparency at the time shown in FIG. 50E. In the period of FIG. 51 (a), it gradually decreases. In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon is stopped during the period of FIGS. 50C to 51A, but the standby animation may be executed.

  In this example, the erasing animation indicating that the hold is consumed and the increasing animation for canceling the erasing animation are executed in an overlapping manner. As a result, the hold icon that should have gradually faded and disappeared may gradually become darker from a certain point in time. Therefore, there is a case where an illusion can be given as if the change was made without decreasing the hold.

In some cases, it is possible to make an illusion that the number of holdings does not increase despite a game ball entering the starting port.
(Example 2-4)
52 and 53 show examples of effect display in Example 2-4 of this exemplary form in time series. FIG. 52 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 3, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first to third areas of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: white), a hold icon 902 (display mode: white sabotani), and a hold icon 903 (display mode: blue) are displayed. The waiting animation is running. Here, in this example, there are Sabo Hani display modes such as “White Sabo Hani”, “Blue Sabo Hani”, “Red Sabo Hani” as the display mode of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon, and the Sabo Hani display mode is the same as the Spherical system. In addition, the level of reliability is represented by color (white <blue <red), and each display mode of the Sabohan system has higher reliability than the display mode of the same color sphere system.

  The Sabohani-type hold icon 902 and the ball-type hold icons 901 and 903 may have different standby animation periods (for example, the number of texture data). The kick timing of the standby animation may depend on each animation. The period of the standby animation may be synchronized between the hold icon 901 and the hold icon 903 that are the same sphere system but are different in display mode. Further, the period of the standby animation may be synchronized between the change icon 801 and the hold icons 901 and 903 of the same spherical system.

  FIG. 52 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is displayed. Is displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon deletion animation is executed. In the variation icon erasing animation, a predetermined effect moving image is displayed around the variation icon 801, and the effect moving image and the variation icon 801 themselves gradually become smaller and finally disappear. In this example, before the erasing animation of the variation icon 801 is completed, the next special figure 1 variation game game is started.

  52 (c) to 52 (f) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started. When the animation for moving between the hold and change icons and the animation for moving the hold icon are started, the animation for deleting the change icon is not finished. And the execution period of the animation to delete the floating icon overlap.

In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 902 and 903 displayed in the second and third areas of the hold icon display area 900 move to the first and second areas, respectively. Here, in the state shown in FIG. 52 (c), since the deletion animation of the change icon 801 has not yet ended, four icons (change icons 801 and 802, hold icons 902 and 903) are temporarily displayed. . Thereby, since more icons than the actual number of holds can be displayed, it may be difficult for the player to specify the number of holds. Further, the icon displayed in a larger number than the actual number of reservations may be either a fluctuation icon or a reservation icon. In addition, the icons that are displayed in a number larger than the actual number of holds may be configured such that an icon having a different form from both the change icon and the hold icon is displayed. (For example, 801 in FIG. 52 (c)).
At the time shown in FIG. 52 (f), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon in this example, the hold icon 904 (display mode: white) appears at the right end of the hold icon display area 900, and the hold increase target area from the right end (if the hold increases from 2 to 3, 3 areas (shown by broken-line rectangles in the figure) are moved by a predetermined movement distance. The moving speed of the hold icon 904 may be a constant speed or may be accelerated / decelerated in the middle. With the hold icon 904 during the increase animation, a predetermined standby animation may be executed. The standby animation at this time may not be synchronized with the standby animation of other icons.

  FIG. 52 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning combination “decoration 6-decoration 10 (0) -decoration 3” is displayed. "Is stopped. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon deletion animation is executed. In the variation icon erasing animation, a predetermined effect moving image is displayed around the variation icon 802, and the effect moving image and the variation icon 802 themselves gradually become smaller and finally disappear. In this example, before the erasure animation of the variation icon 802 is completed, the next special figure 1 variation game game is started. In the hold icon display area 900, the increased hold icon 904 is in the process of moving from the right end of the hold icon display area 900 toward the third area.

  FIG. 52 (h) to FIG. 53 (b) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable game of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started.

  In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually enlarged. Move to display area 800. In this example, the variation icon 803 itself does not move to the variation icon display area 800 but moves around in the effect display area 208d. This moving animation is executed with a predetermined probability only when, for example, the display mode of the variation icon is a specific display mode (for example, a Sabohan display mode). In this movement animation, the variation icon 803 may overlap a part or all of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (FIG. 52 (h), FIG. 53 (a)), or the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. You may move outside (FIG.53 (b)). As described above, the movement animation between the hold / change icons is not limited to a mode in which the change icons are moved from the hold icon display area 900 to the change icon display area 800.

  In the variation icon display area 800, not the variation icon 803 but the characters “Gekiatsu” are displayed. As described above, the variation icon display area 800 does not necessarily display the variation icon to be varied.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 903 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 moves to the first area. In the hold icon display area 900, the increased hold icon 904 is in the process of moving from the right end of the hold icon display area 900 toward the third area. At the time shown in FIG. 52 (h), the hold increase target area moves from the third area to the second area based on the fact that the hold has been digested, and the target position in the moving animation of the hold icon 904 also changes from the third area. Move to 2 areas. As a result, the movement distance of the hold icon 904 increases from L1 to L2, and the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon 904 becomes longer. Thus, in this example, the movement distance and execution time in the movement animation of the hold icon may change during the execution of the movement animation. When the suspension of the special map 2 on the priority change side is interrupted as in the embodiment 1-4, the movement distance and execution time of the movement animation of the suspension icon may be shortened.

Further, in this example, the standby animation of the hold icon 904 that has reached the target position is synchronized with the cycle of the standby animation of another icon (eg, the hold icon 903) at some timing (eg, the timing when the movement animation ends). It may also be set (FIG. 53 (b)).
(Example 2-5)
54 and 55 show examples of effect display in Example 2-5 of this exemplary form in time series. In this example, it is assumed that the variation icon display area 800 and the variation icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 54A shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 0, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the hold icon display area 900, no hold icon is currently displayed.

  54 (b) to 54 (d) show the subsequent states in the special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 54 (b), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 0 to 1. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase icon of the hold icon, the hold icon 901 appears from the right end of the hold icon display area 900 (the right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208) (FIG. 54B), and the hold increase target area (hold is displayed from the right end). When it increases from 0 to 1, it moves linearly toward the first region) (FIGS. 54 (c) and (d)). At the time shown in FIG. 54 (d), the hold icon 901 reaches the first area, and the increase animation of the hold icon ends.

  The movement distance and execution time of the increase animation of the hold icon vary depending on the position of the hold increase target area. In this example, the first, second, third, and fourth areas are arranged in this order from the left end of the hold icon display area 900, and the hold icon that increases by the increase animation appears from the right end of the hold icon display area 900. The moving distance of the increase animation of the hold icon is the longest when the hold increases from 0 to 1, and the shortest when the hold increases from 3 to 4. When the moving speed of the hold icon in the increase animation is constant, the execution time of the increase animation is the longest when the hold increases from 0 to 1, and the shortest when the hold increases from 3 to 4.

  In this example, during the execution period of the increase animation of the hold icon 901, a change animation that changes the display mode of the hold icon 901 from “white” to “red” is executed (FIG. 54C). Here, the change animation of the hold icon or the variation icon may be merely changing the icon image of a predetermined display mode to an icon image of another display mode.

  In this example, the standby animation (clockwise rotation) of the hold icon 901 is also executed during the execution period of the increase animation of the hold icon 901. After the increase animation of the hold icon 901 ends, only the standby animation is continued.

  FIG. 54 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 5-decoration 9-decoration 1” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  FIGS. 54 (f) and 54 (g) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 1 to 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon deletion animation is started. In the hold icon deletion animation, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 moves linearly to the left and goes out of the display area from the left end of the hold icon display area 900. In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon 901 is executed even during the execution period of the deletion animation of the hold icon 901.

  FIG. 54 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. At this time, the suspension of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, so that even if a predetermined stop display period elapses, the next special figure variable game is not started and the state becomes non-variable.

  FIGS. 55A to 55D show a state after the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won in the non-variable state and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started (FIG. 55 (a)), and the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed (FIG. 55 (c)). . The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the special figure 1 variable game has been started immediately after winning the prize, so that the special figure 1 hold is continuously displayed as 0 (the leftmost LED is lit immediately after winning the prize. You may).

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started (Fig. 55 (a)), and after a predetermined variation time has passed, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for which the hit is notified "decoration 7-decoration 9-decoration". 5 "is stopped and displayed (FIG. 55 (c)).

  In the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of the hold icon is started based on winning the special figure 1 opening 230. However, since the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested immediately after winning a prize, the hold icon deletion animation is executed immediately after the start of the increase animation. In this example, the series of animations shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (d) includes an increase / deletion animation of a hold icon having both an attribute as an increase animation of the hold icon and an attribute as an erase animation of the hold icon. Can be considered. The animation may be an animation in which the increase animation and the erasure animation are continuously performed, or may be stored in advance as a single animation having both attributes.

  In the increase / deletion animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 902 appears from the right end of the hold icon display area 900 (FIG. 55A) and moves linearly toward the left end of the hold icon display area 900 (FIG. 55B). ), (C)), and goes out of the display area from the left end (FIG. 55 (d)). In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon 902 is executed even during the execution period of the increase / erase animation of the hold icon 902.

  The increase / erase animation of the hold icon is started almost simultaneously with the timing when the special figure 1 variable game is started (FIG. 55 (a)), and ends at a timing later than the end of the special figure 1 variable game (FIG. 55). 55 (d)). That is, the execution time (scale) of the increase / erase animation of the hold icon is longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In other words, the execution time of the hold icon increase / erase animation is at least longer than the shortest change time of the special figure change game. The shortest variation time may be the shortest variation time in a predetermined gaming state, or may be the shortest variation time in the game machine.

  Also, in this example, the hold icon 902 when the special figure 1 variable game is finished still reaches the first area of the hold icon display area 900 (the hold increase target area when the hold increases from 0 to 1). (FIG. 55 (c)). In the increase / deletion animation of the hold icon, the time from the appearance of the hold icon at the right end of the hold icon display area 900 to the arrival of the first area is an increase animation of the hold icon when the hold increases from 0 to 1 (FIG. 54 (b) to (d)). The execution time of the increase animation of the hold icon when the hold increases from 0 to 1 is the longest among the increase animations of various hold icons. Therefore, in this example, the longest execution time in the increase animation of the hold icon is at least longer than the shortest change time of the special figure variable game.

Further, in this example, the total display time for a certain hold icon (for example, the sum of the execution time of the increase animation, movement animation and deletion animation of the hold icon, or the execution time of the standby animation of the hold icon) is There is a case where it is longer than the variation time of the special figure variation game corresponding to the hold icon. That is, when the animation is executed in a state where there are one or more holds, the animation may be performed across a plurality of variations.
(Example 2-6)
56 and 57 show an example of effect display in Example 2-6 of this exemplary form in time series. In this example, it is assumed that the variation icon display area 800 and the variation icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 56 (a) shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: white sabotani) and a hold icon 902 (display mode: white sabotani) are displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. At this time, in the hold icon display area 900, the hold increase target area is the third area. In the drawing, the reserved increase target area is indicated by a broken-line rectangle (not actually displayed).

  FIG. 56 (b) shows a subsequent state in the special figure variable game. At this point, it is assumed that the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon in this example, the hold icon 903 (display mode: white sabotani) appears from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900 and gradually moves to the third area. Further, as the retention in FIG. 1 increases from 2 to 3, the retention increase target area moves from the third area to the fourth area.

  Here, in each animation (for example, an increase animation, a deletion animation, a movement animation, etc.) accompanied by the movement of the icon (pending icon or variable icon), the moving speed of the icon may differ depending on the display mode of the icon. For example, the moving speed of the savory icon may be slower than the moving speed of the spherical icon.

  FIG. 56 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 7-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  In this example, the hold icon deletion animation is started at the timing when the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the hold icon erasing animation, the hold icon 901 in the first area gradually moves downward and goes out of the display area from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900.

  Moreover, in this example, the movement animation of a holding | maintenance icon is started at the timing which the special figure 1 variable game is complete | finished. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 gradually moves from the second area to the first area. Since the hold icon 903 in the third area is still executing the increase animation, the start of the movement animation for the hold icon 903 is delayed.

  FIG. 56 (d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, the movement animation of the hold icon 902 that has moved from the second area has ended. In the third area, the increase animation of the hold icon 903 is ended. Due to the decrease in the hold in FIG. 1 from 3 to 2, the hold increase target area moves from the fourth area to the third area.

  56 (e) and 56 (f) show the subsequent states in the special figure 1 variable game. In the hold icon display area 900, the delayed move icon of the hold icon 903 is started based on the end of the increase animation of the hold icon 903 (FIG. 56 (e)). In the moving animation of the hold icon 903, the hold icon 903 gradually moves from the third area to the second area. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (f), the moving animation of the hold icon 903 ends. Here, the movement animation whose execution start is delayed may be different from the normal movement animation. For example, a moving animation with a delayed start of execution may have a moving speed of the hold icon faster than a normal moving animation. Further, the time required for the moving animation may be shortened by stopping the display of at least a part of the animation. However, the display is performed to the extent that it can be seen that the hold icon is moving.

  FIG. 56 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has been completed and the number of pending special figure 1 is increased by one. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 9-decoration 10 (0) -decoration 4” is displayed. "Is stopped. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is completed, in the hold icon display area 900, an erase animation and a move animation of the hold icon are started. In the hold icon erasing animation, the hold icon 902 in the first area gradually moves downward and goes out of the display area from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 903 gradually moves from the second area to the first area.

  Further, when the holding of the special figure 1 increases, the holding icon display area 900 starts an increase animation of the holding icon. In the increase animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 904 (display mode: white sabotani) appears from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900 and gradually moves to the third area. The movement animation of the hold icon 904 from the third area to the second area is delayed until the increase animation of the hold icon 904 ends. Further, as the retention in FIG. 1 increases from 2 to 3, the retention increase target area moves from the third area to the fourth area.

  FIG. 56 (h) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, the moving animation of the hold icon 903 that has moved from the second area has ended. In the third area, the increase animation of the hold icon 903 is continuously performed. Due to the decrease in the hold in FIG. 1 from 3 to 2, the hold increase target area moves from the fourth area to the third area.

  FIG. 57 (a) shows a state in which the holding of special figure 1 is further increased during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3. On the basis of the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, the hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 905 (display mode: white sabotani) appears from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900 and gradually moves to the third area. In the third area, the increase animation of the hold icon 904 is continuously performed separately from the increase animation of the hold icon 905. That is, in the third region, an increase animation of a plurality of hold icons is executed, and a plurality of hold icons are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, as the retention in FIG. 1 is increased from 2 to 3, the retention increase target area moves from the third area to the fourth area.

  In a portion where a plurality of hold icons are overlapped, even if these hold icons are displayed in the same layer, they are displayed in the foreground as the image data is developed in the VRAM in a later order. Therefore, in the overlapping part of the hold icons 904 and 905, the hold icon 905 that is increased later is displayed in front of the hold icon 904 that is increased earlier. In other words, in this example, the hold icons that are increased later have a higher display priority and are displayed in front.

  The order in which the image data is expanded in the VRAM is not necessarily related to the order in which the image data is displayed (the image having a slower display order has a slower order in which the image data is expanded in the VRAM). In other words, an image in which the image data is expanded in the VRAM may be displayed later and displayed so as to be hidden behind other images.

FIGS. 57B to 57D show the subsequent state. When the increase animation of the hold icon 904 in the third area is finished (FIG. 57 (b)), the delayed move animation of the hold icon 904 is started (FIG. 57 (c)), and the hold icon 904 is changed to the third icon. The region moves from the region to the second region (FIG. 57 (d)). Also, the movement of the hold icon 905 to the third area is completed at the time shown in FIG.
(Example 2-7)
58 and 59 show examples of effect display in Example 2-7 of this exemplary form in time series. FIG. 58 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, a fluctuation icon 801 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are displayed and synchronized with the fluctuation icon. The predetermined standby animation is executed. At this time, in the hold icon display area 900, the hold increase target area in FIG. 1 is the third area, and the hold increase target area in FIG. 2 is the first area. In the drawing, each of the reserved increase target areas of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is indicated by a broken-line rectangle (not actually displayed).

  In this example, the special icon 1 and the special figure 2 share the variable icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900. In the hold icon display area 900, the hold increase target areas in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are the same area when the hold number in FIG. 1 is 0, and are different areas in other cases.

  58 (b) to 58 (d) show a state in which the suspension of the special figure 2 is increased by one during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 displays that the special figure 2 hold has increased from 0 to 1. Based on the fact that the suspension of special figure 2 on the priority fluctuation side has increased from 0 to 1, the retention increase target area of special figure 1 moves from the third area to the fourth area, and the reservation increase target area of special figure 2 is the first Move from the first area to the second area. In this way, the reserved increase target area of FIG. 1 is determined based on the sum of the reserved numbers of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, and the reserved increase target area of FIG. 2 is based only on the reserved number of FIG. It is determined. Further, on the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2 and a save animation of the hold icon in FIG. .

  In the increase animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. 2, in the first area where the hold icon 901 shown in FIG. 1 is displayed, for example, an effect moving image 911a representing a cloud is displayed in a layer above the hold icon 901 (see FIG. 58 (b)), when the display size of the effect moving image 911a is gradually reduced, the hold icon 911 (display mode: white) of FIG. 2 newly displayed on the layer below the effect moving image 911a is displayed. Appears (FIGS. 58 (c) and (d)). In this example, the aspect of the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2 is different from the form of the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1 (for example, an aspect that rises from below the hold icon display area 900). Further, the mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 (in this example, “Teihei Tenka” pattern) may be different from the mode of the hold icon in the special figure 1 (in this example, the “Yatsushiro Shogun” pattern). Moreover, the mode of the standby animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be different from the mode of the standby animation of the hold icon in FIG. The increase animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may have a higher display priority than the save animation of the hold icon shown in FIG.

  In the evacuation animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1, the hold icon 901 in the special figure 1 displayed in the first area moves to the second area on the right side, and the hold icon in the special figure 1 displayed in the second area. 902 moves to the third region on the right side (FIGS. 58 (b) to (d)). The movement mode of the hold icon in the evacuation animation is the reverse of the movement animation that moves in the left direction. Note that the save animation is omitted, the hold icon 901 in FIG. 1 is instantaneously moved from the first area to the second area, and the hold icon 902 in FIG. 1 is instantaneously moved from the second area to the third area. It may be moved.

  58 (e) and 58 (f) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special symbol E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 1-ornament 2-ornament 10 ( 0) "is stopped. In the variation icon display area 800, an erase animation of the variation icon 801 in FIG. 1 is executed. In the deletion animation of the variation icon 801 in FIG. 1, a predetermined effect moving image is displayed around the variation icon 801 (FIG. 58 (e)), and the effect moving image and the variation icon 801 itself are gradually reduced (FIG. 58). (F)) and finally disappear. In this example, when the animation for deleting the variation icon is started, the standby animation for the variation icon is stopped. However, the standby animation may be continuously performed during the execution of the erasing animation.

  FIGS. 58 (g) to 59 (d) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 2 variable game. In the special figure 2 display device 214, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 displays that the holding number of the special figure 2 has decreased from 1 to 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Due to the decrease of the suspension in FIG. 2 from 1 to 0, the retention increase target area in FIG. 1 moves from the fourth area to the third area in the suspension icon display area 900, and the retention increase target area in FIG. Moves from the second region to the first region. Moreover, in the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons of the special figure 2, the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the change animation between the hold / fluctuation icons of the special figure 2 Is started.

  In the movement animation between the hold / variation icons of the special figure 2, the hold icon 911 of the special figure 2 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the fluctuation icon 811 and the display size gradually increases. While moving, the display moves to the fluctuation icon display area 800 (FIGS. 58 (g) to 59 (a)). In this example, when the movement animation between the hold / change icon is started, the standby animation of the change icon (hold icon) is stopped.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. 1, the hold icons 901 and 902 shown in FIG. 1 displayed in the second and third areas of the hold icon display area 900 move to the first and second areas, respectively ( 58 (g) to 59 (a)).

In the change animation between the hold / change icons shown in FIG. 2, a crack is first generated in the circular change icon 811 in the moving animation. After the moving animation ends, the fluctuation icon 811 vibrates rattlingly (FIG. 59 (b)), the fluctuation icon 811 breaks and a thousand box appears (FIG. 59 (c)). Is displayed as the fluctuation icon 811 (FIG. 59 (d)). The mode of the change animation between the hold / change icons in FIG. 2 may be a unique mode different from the mode of the change animation between the hold / change icons in FIG.
(Example 2-8)
60 and 61 show examples of effect display in Example 2-8 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIG. 60A shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, a fluctuation icon 801 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are displayed and synchronized with the fluctuation icon. The predetermined standby animation is executed. Although not shown, the reserved increase target area in FIG. 1 in the reserved icon display area 900 is the third area, and the reserved increase target area in FIG. 2 is the first area.

  FIGS. 60B to 60D show a state in which the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 is increased by one during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3. On the basis of the increase in the number of reserved in FIG. 1 from 2 to 3, the reserved increase target area in FIG. 1 moves from the third area to the fourth area. The reserved increase target area in FIG. 2 remains the first area. In addition, based on the increase in the holding of the special figure 1, an increase animation of the holding icon of the special figure 1 is started in the holding icon display area 900.

  In the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1, a predetermined effect moving image 903a is displayed in the third area (FIG. 60B), and when the display size of the effect moving image 903a is gradually reduced, the effect moving image The hold icon 903 (display mode: white) of the special figure 1 newly displayed on the layer below the image 903a appears (FIGS. 60C and 60D).

  FIG. 60E to FIG. 61D show the subsequent state. At the time shown in FIG. 60 (e), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 3 to 4. Based on the fact that the number of reserved in FIG. 1 has increased from 3 to 4, the reserved increase target area in FIG. 1 is outside the display area. The reserved increase target area in FIG. 2 remains the first area. In addition, based on the increase in the holding of the special figure 1, an increase animation of the holding icon of the special figure 1 is started in the holding icon display area 900.

  In the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1, the effect moving image 904a similar to the effect moving image 903a is displayed in the fourth area (FIG. 60 (e)), and the display size of the effect moving image 904a is gradually reduced. Then, the hold icon 904 (display mode: white) of the special figure 1 newly displayed in the layer below the effect moving image 904a appears (FIGS. 60F to 60H).

  It is assumed that the suspension of special figure 2 is increased by one at the time shown in FIG. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 displays that the special figure 2 hold has increased from 0 to 1. Based on the fact that the holding in FIG. 2 has increased from 0 to 1, the holding increase target area in FIG. 2 moves from the first area to the second area. The reserved increase target area in FIG. 1 remains outside the display area. Further, on the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 and a save animation of the hold icon shown in FIG.

  In the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2, the effect moving image 911 a having a mode different from the effect moving images 903 a and 904 a is displayed in a layer above the hold icon 901 in the first region (FIG. 60 (f), (G)) When the display size of the effect moving image 911a is gradually reduced, the hold icon 911 (display mode: white) of the special figure 2 newly displayed on the layer below the effect moving image 911a appears. (FIG. 60 (h) to FIG. 61 (b)).

  In the reserved icon evacuation animation of special figure 1 (evacuation animation 1), the reserved icons 901 to 903 of special figure 1 displayed in the first to third areas respectively move to the second to fourth areas (FIG. 60). (F) to FIG. 61 (b)). The execution period of the hold icon evacuation animation (evacuation animation 1) shown in FIG. 1 is substantially the same as the execution period of the hold icon increase animation shown in FIG. Since the increase animation of the hold icon 904 of the special figure 1 is being executed in the fourth area at the time when the hold icon save animation of the special figure 1 is started, the save icon (from the fourth area to the display area) of the hold icon 904 is being executed in the fourth area. The start of execution of (outward movement) is delayed.

  The change animation of the hold icon 901 may be executed during the execution period of the hold icon save animation of the special figure 1 (FIGS. 61A to 61C). In the change animation of the hold icon 901, a predetermined effect moving image 901a is displayed in front of the hold icon 901 in the display mode “white” (FIG. 61A), and when the effect moving image 901a is gradually reduced, the display is performed. A hold icon 901 whose mode has changed from “white” to “red” appears (FIGS. 61B and 61C).

  Here, in the portion where the images are displayed in an overlapping manner, the effect moving image has a higher display priority than the hold icon, so the effect moving image 911a is displayed in front of the hold icon 901 in FIG. 60 (f), (g)). In addition, since the hold icon of the special map 1 on the non-priority change side has a higher display priority than the hold icon of the special figure 2 on the priority change side, the hold icon 901 of the special figure 1 is more than the hold icon 911 of the special figure 2. Is also displayed on the front side (FIG. 60 (h)). Further, since the display priority of the hold icon increased later is higher, the hold icon 904 of FIG. 1 is displayed in front of the hold icon 903 of FIG. 1 (FIG. 60 (g) to FIG. 61 (a)). .

  Since the increase animation of the hold icon 904 of the special figure 1 in the fourth area ends at the time shown in FIG. 60 (h), the delayed evacuation animation (evacuation animation 2) is started. In this evacuation animation, the hold icon 904 shown in FIG. 1 moves from the fourth area to the outside of the display area (FIGS. 61A to 61C). As described above, the hold icon may be displayed once and then moved out of the display area to be hidden. The hold icon 904 in the evacuation animation may be displayed in an overlapping manner with the evacuation animation hold icon 903 that was previously started (FIG. 61A).

  At the time shown in FIG. 61 (c), the special figure 1 variable game ends. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 9-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 61 (d), the special figure 2 variable game is started. In the special figure 2 display device 214, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 displays that the special figure 2 hold has decreased from 1 to 0. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, the fluctuation icon deletion animation of the special figure 1, the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icon of the special figure 2, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 are started. In accordance with the start timing of the change, the standby animation of each hold icon and the change icon may be synchronized.

  In the variation icon erasing animation of FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 800, for example, an effect moving image 801a having the same form as the effect moving images 903a and 904a is displayed in front of the variation icon 801, and the variation icon 801 is an effect moving image. It is deleted while being hidden by 801a, and then the effect moving image 801a is reduced and deleted.

  In the movement animation between the hold / variation icons of the special figure 2, the hold icon 911 of the special figure 2 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the fluctuation icon 811 and the display size gradually increases. While moving, it moves to the fluctuation icon display area 800.

In the hold icon movement animation of FIG. 1, the hold icons 901 to 903 displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 gradually move to the first to third areas, respectively. In addition, the hold icon 904 outside the display area gradually moves to the fourth area. In this manner, the hold icon that is once hidden may be displayed again.
(Example 2-9)
FIG. 62 shows an example of effect display in Example 2-9 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIG. 62 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 4, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the variation is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), the hold icon 903 (display mode: red), the hold icon 904 (display) Aspect: white) is displayed and a predetermined standby animation is executed.

  FIG. 62 (b) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is executed. In the erase animation of the variation icon 801, a predetermined effect moving image is displayed around the variation icon 801, and the effect moving image and the variation icon 801 themselves are gradually reduced and finally disappear. In this example, when the animation for deleting the variation icon is started, the standby animation for the variation icon is stopped.

  62 (c) to 62 (f) show a state after the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. It moves (FIGS. 62C and 62D).

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 902 to 904 displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 move to the first to third areas, respectively (FIGS. 62C to 62E). )).

  In this example, the change animation of the hold icon may be performed during the execution period of the hold icon movement animation. In the change animation of the hold icon, predetermined effect moving images 903a and 904a are displayed before the hold icons 903 and 904, and when the effect moving images 903a and 904a are gradually reduced, the display mode is changed from “red” to “gold”. A changed hold icon 903 and a hold icon 904 whose display mode has changed from “white” to “red” appear (FIGS. 62C to 62E). By switching the display mode while moving the display position of the hold icon by the moving animation, it may be possible to reliably prevent false recognition of the hold.

  At the time shown in FIG. 62 (d), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 3 to 4. Due to the increase in the holding in FIG. 1, an increase animation of the holding icon is started in the holding icon display area 900. This increase animation is started during the execution period of the hold icon movement animation and the change animation. In the increase animation of the hold icon, a predetermined effect moving image 905a is displayed (FIG. 62 (d)), and when the display size of the effect moving image 905a is gradually reduced, it is newly displayed behind the effect moving image 905a. The held icon 905 (display mode: white) appears (FIGS. 62E and 62F).

  When the hold icon display area 900 shown in FIG. 62A is compared with the hold icon display area 900 shown in FIG. 62F, the display mode of the hold icons in the first, third, and fourth areas is the same. Only the display mode of the hold icon in the second area (actually, the hold icon 902 in FIG. 62A and the hold icon 903 in FIG. 62F) has changed from “white” to “gold”. Therefore, there is a case where the player can have an illusion that the display mode of the hold icon in the second area has changed from “white” to “gold”, which can improve the interest of the game. . In particular, when the movement animation or change animation of the hold icon is shortened or omitted, the player's illusion as described above may be easily generated.

Further, when the movement animation or change animation of the hold icon is shortened or omitted, the state of the hold icon display area 900 may change instantaneously from FIG. 62 (a) to FIG. 62 (f). In that case, since the display mode of the hold icon in the third area is “red” having a low appearance frequency in both the state of FIG. 62A and the state of FIG. It may be difficult for the player to know that the hold icon 901 in the first area has already been consumed and the hold icon 903 in the third area in FIG. 62A has moved to the second area. For this reason, depending on the player, when the state shown in FIG. 62A changes to the state shown in FIG. 62F, the hold icon in the third area does not move, and the hold icon in the second area is displayed. There is a possibility that the mode is misunderstood as “white” in the non-read-ahead state is switched to “gold” with high reliability. For this reason, an increase / decrease in the hold icon and a change in the display mode are emphasized and shown by an animation, so that an effective presentation can be performed and a misrecognition of the hold by the player may be prevented.
(Example 2-10)
63 and 64 show an example of effect display in Example 2-10 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIG. 63A shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 1, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the variation is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed .

  FIG. 63 (b) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 is increased by one during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 1 to 2. In the second area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 902 (display mode: red) is displayed for predicting the advance of the increased hold with high reliability. In this example, based on the prefetch notice with the hold icon 902, the prefetch notice is executed even with the hold icons other than the hold icon 902. As a result, the display mode of the hold icon 901 changes from “white” to “village A”. In the hold icon 901, a standby animation is performed in which the left and right are scrambled at a constant cycle. In the effect display area 208d, characters such as “Wai Wai”, “Gaya Gaya”, “What is it”, “What is it?” Are displayed. At this time, the display mode of the change icon 801 may be changed also in the change icon display area 800. These displays indicate to the player that a special pre-reading notice effect has been started.

  FIG. 63 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed and the number of the special figure 1 holds increased by two. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 1-decoration 10 (0) -decoration 4”. "Is stopped. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased to 4. A hold icon 903 (display mode: villager B) is displayed with a predetermined increase animation in the third area of the hold icon display area 900, and a hold icon 904 (display mode: villager A) is set in the fourth area. Displayed with increasing animation. In the hold icons 903 and 904, a standby animation is performed in which the left and right are scrambled at a constant cycle. The standby animation of the hold icons 901, 903, and 904 is executed asynchronously.

  FIGS. 63D and 63E show a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 4 to 3.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a change icon deletion animation, a hold icon deletion animation, and a hold icon movement animation are executed. During the execution of the special prefetch notice effect, the movement animation between the hold / change icons is omitted, and the hold icon corresponding to the digested hold may be deleted without changing to the change icon. That is, in the case of a change that starts after a special prefetch notice effect is started, the display of the change icon may be omitted in order to attract attention to the hold icon. In this case, two deletion animations (a deletion icon deletion animation and a hold icon deletion animation) may be executed at the same time.

  In the variation icon erasing animation, the variation icon 801 in the variation icon display area 800 is erased in a predetermined manner. The animation of erasing the changing icon during execution of the special pre-reading notice effect may be executed in a special mode different from the normal mode.

  In the hold icon deletion animation, the display size of the hold icon 901 (display mode: villager A) displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 is gradually reduced and finally deleted. The on-hold icon erasing animation during the special pre-reading notice effect may be executed in a special mode different from the normal mode.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 902 to 904 displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 move to the first to third areas, respectively. The movement animation during the special prefetch notice effect may be executed in a special mode different from the normal mode.

  FIG. 63 (f) to FIG. 64 (c) show the subsequent state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game and the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 63 (f), a change animation of the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 is started. In this change animation, a crack is generated in the hold icon 902 and it vibrates. In the hold icons 903 and 904 in the second and third areas, a standby animation is executed in which the villager notices a change in the hold icon 902. As described above, when the change animation is executed with the hold icon 902 that is the target of the prefetch notice, a special mode (for example, a mode for the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice) is used for the hold icons 903 and 904 other than the target. The waiting animation may be executed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 63 (g), in the change animation of the hold icon 902, the hold icon 902 is broken and a thousand car box appears from the inside. Accordingly, the display mode of the hold icon 902 is changed to “thousand boxes”. In the hold icons 903 and 904, a standby animation is performed in which the villagers are happy when they are all over.

  At the time shown in FIG. 63 (h), the special figure 1 variable game ends. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning combination “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 10 (0)”. "Is stopped. In the hold icons 903 and 904 in the hold icon display area 900, a standby animation in which the villagers are pleased with their dreams is continued.

At the time shown in FIG. 64 (a), the special figure 1 variable game corresponding to the target hold of the pre-reading notice is started, and thereafter, the special figure 1 hold is increased by one. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the special figure 1 hold is three. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons, a movement animation of the hold icon, and an increase animation of the hold icon are started.

In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 903 and 904 move from the second and third areas to the first and second areas, respectively.

  In the increase animation of the hold icon, a new hold icon 905 (display mode: villager B) is displayed in the third area. In this manner, the hold icon 905 that has increased after the start of the change corresponding to the target hold of the prefetch notice may also have a specific display mode different from normal. In the hold icon 905, a standby animation similar to the hold icons 903 and 904 is executed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 64 (b), “decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and a reach state is reached in which the variable display is continued only in the symbol display area 208b. In the hold icons 903 to 905, a standby animation in a manner of hitting a reach is executed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 64 (c), the special figure 1 variable game ends. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 8-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the hold icon display area 900, a stand-by animation is executed in the hold icons 903 to 905, in which the change is disappointing.

  FIG. 64 (d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a change icon deletion animation, a hold / change icon movement animation, and a hold icon movement animation are started.

  In the variation icon erasing animation, the variation icon 802 displayed in the variation icon display area 800 is erased in a predetermined manner.

  In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 903 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 904 and 905 displayed in the second and third areas of the hold icon display area 900 gradually move to the first and second areas, respectively.

  The display mode of the hold icons 903 to 905 is changed from the villager mode to the default mode at a predetermined opportunity (for example, a predetermined timing when the fluctuation is stopped or a timing when the fluctuation starts) during execution of these animations or before starting. It returns to a predetermined mode according to the prefetch result. When a new special figure variable game is started, the player can easily focus attention on the hold icon display area 900 in order to confirm the number of holds, so that attention may be easily collected.

As described above, in this example, when changing the display mode and animation of the hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading notice, the display mode and animation of the hold icon that has been increased before and after the hold icon, There is a case where the display mode or animation of the hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice is changed. In other words, the display mode and animation of the hold icon may change based on its own prefetch result, and may change based on another hold prefetch result. Thereby, the player's attention may be gathered more in the prefetch notice. Moreover, it may be possible to prevent misrecognition of a hold subject to a prefetch notice.
(Example 2-11)
FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 show examples of effect display in Example 2-11 of this exemplary form in time series. FIG. 65A shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, a fluctuation icon 801 (display mode: white sabotani) corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: blue sabotani) and a hold icon 902 (display mode: white sabotani) are displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. The standby animations of the fluctuation icon 801 and the hold icons 901 and 902 may be synchronized with each other or may be asynchronous.

  FIGS. 65B to 65D show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning combination “decoration 2-ornament 10 (0)-ornament 1 "Is stopped. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is executed. In the erasure animation of the variation icon 801, the variation icon 801 in the savory manner falls down and is gradually reduced to be erased.

  FIGS. 65 (e) to 65 (g) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. It moves (FIGS. 65 (e) and (f)).

  In the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 moves to the first area (FIGS. 64E and 64F).

  At the time shown in FIG. 65 (g), it is assumed that the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 1 to 2. Due to the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, a new hold icon 903 (display mode: red sabotani) is displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 with a predetermined increase animation.

  FIG. 65 (h) to FIG. 66 (c) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special symbol E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 212, and the symbol combination "decoration 8-decoration 6-decoration 4" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 802 is executed. This erasing animation is executed in a mode different from the normal mode as a special pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading result of the hold corresponding to the hold icon 903. In this erasing animation, the change icon 802 in the savory state falls down (FIG. 65 (h)), and the line of the change icon 802 “I'm not good enough ... I'll ask you ...” is displayed as a balloon. (FIG. 66 (a)), an effect moving image representing an explosion is displayed, and the variation icon 802 is erased by the variation icon 802 flying out of the display area (FIG. 66 (b), (c)). ). The balloon representing the line of the variation icon 802 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol, overlapping the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In some cases, the erasure animation can attract the player's attention to the hold icon 903 to be pre-readed.

  In the second area of the hold icon display area 900, a standby animation of the hold icon 903 is executed. This standby animation is executed in a mode different from the normal mode as a special pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading result of the hold corresponding to the hold icon 903. In this standby animation, the hold icon 903 in a savory state reacts to the line of the fluctuation icon 802 (FIG. 66 (a)), and the line of the hold icon 903 “Make it up!” Is displayed as a balloon (FIG. 66 (b)). )). In some cases, the standby animation can attract the player's attention to the hold icon 903 itself that is the target of the prefetching notice. In the first area, the standby animation of the hold icon 902 is executed in a normal manner.

  FIG. 66 (d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 2 to 1.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are executed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 903 moves from the second area to the first area.

  As described above, in this example, the animation of the variation icon or the hold icon may be executed in a different manner from the normal based on the own prefetch result or another hold prefetch result. Thereby, a player's attention may be able to be attracted to a prefetch notice. Since the player is paying attention to the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 during the period from the change stop to the start of change in which the number of holds changes, the pre-reading notice effect is performed in the areas 800 and 900 during the period. As a result, the player's attention may be collected more effectively.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, when a predetermined hold storage condition is established, holds storage means (for example, RAM 308, special figure 1 random number value) that can store at least predetermined start information as hold. A storage area, a special figure 2 random value storage area, and a hold display means capable of displaying at least one hold icon corresponding to the one hold when the predetermined hold display condition is satisfied (for example, a decorative symbol display) Device 208, a hold icon display area 900, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500), and the hold display means includes a predetermined hold movement condition (for example, start of a special figure variable game, hold) Increase), a predetermined hold movement animation for moving the display position of the predetermined hold icon corresponding to the predetermined hold (for example, a moving animation of the hold icon). , Increasing animation, erasing animation, moving animation between hold and change icons), and when the first hold movement condition is satisfied, the predetermined hold movement condition is satisfied, Even when a second hold movement condition different from the first hold movement condition is satisfied, the predetermined hold movement condition is satisfied, and the hold display means has the first hold movement condition. If established, the first hold movement animation is executed for the first hold icon corresponding to the first hold stored in the hold storage means, and the hold display means is the second hold movement. If the condition is met, a second hold movement animation for a second hold icon corresponding to a second hold different from the first hold stored in the hold storage means. When the second hold movement condition is satisfied during execution of the first hold movement animation, the hold display means executes the first hold movement animation being executed. And the second hold movement animation can be started, and the hold display means is executing when the first hold movement condition is satisfied during the execution of the second hold movement animation. The first reserved movement animation can be started together with the second reserved movement animation.

  According to this structure, since the number of reservations is notified in various ways, it is possible to improve the interest of the game stand.

  Further, according to this configuration, there is a case where the hold display can be made more conspicuous by performing the animation relating to the increase / decrease of the hold number and simultaneously performing notification while clearly informing each hold.

  In addition, according to this configuration, by simultaneously performing a plurality of animations related to the hold, it is possible to improve the frequency with which a plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously while clearly informing each hold. It may be difficult to identify the number of holds.

  Further, according to this configuration, there is a case where it is not necessary to provide display priority order setting or exclusive control for each animation, and the control can be simplified.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, during the period in which the first hold movement animation and the second hold movement animation are performed simultaneously, at least a part of the display of the hold movement animation of one is displayed on the other hold It is characterized by being displayed overlapping with the moving animation.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to easily grasp a plurality of pieces of information regarding the hold only by looking at one point.

  In addition, according to this configuration, while clearly informing the player about the increase / decrease of the hold, there is a case in which an animation that is particularly conspicuous can be arbitrarily conspicuous.

  Further, according to this configuration, there is a case where the player can be made to pay more attention to the reserved animation by shielding a part of one animation from the player so as to be difficult to view.

  In the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, the hold display means displays the first hold icon in a predetermined display form (for example, display form “white”), and the hold display means includes the second hold display means. The hold icon is displayed in the predetermined display mode.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for a player to grasp the number of holds by displaying a plurality of hold icons of the same mode at the same time, and as if it is an excellent platform that makes it easy for a player to accumulate holds. There may be an illusion.

  In addition, according to this configuration, in the case where a pre-reading notice or the like that changes the display mode of the hold icon based on the pre-read result is performed, it may be possible to prevent expected confusion.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, the first hold movement condition is established when the number of holds stored in the hold storage means decreases, and the first hold movement animation is It is characterized by comprising an animation representing a state in which the first hold icon is erased from a predetermined display area.

  According to this configuration, by performing animation to show that the suspension is reduced, it is possible to clearly notify that the suspension, which is the player's right, has been digested and the change is being performed, while other animations and execution periods When there are duplicates, the number of holds may be confused as described above.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, even if the second reserved movement animation is started after the start of the first reserved movement animation, the first reserved movement animation ends. It is characterized in that it can be terminated before.

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to finally notify the correct number of holds while providing a period for displaying a hold icon equal to or greater than the maximum number of holds.

  Further, according to this configuration, by making the length of one animation shorter than the length of the other animation, it may be possible to shorten as much as possible the period in which the animations are duplicated and the number of holds is mistaken.

  In addition, according to this configuration, one animation is started during the execution of the other animation, and is finished before the other animation is finished. Therefore, there may be a case where the number of holds that have been misidentified during the overlap period can be correctly notified. If the animation that has been performed before the overlap period ends during the overlap period, it is difficult to distinguish when it has ended, and there is a risk that the hold will be misidentified.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, when a predetermined hold storage condition is satisfied, holds storage means (for example, RAM 308, special figure 1 random value storage area, special storage that can store at least predetermined start information as hold). FIG. 2 random number storage area) and a predetermined hold display condition, a hold display means that can display at least one hold icon corresponding to the one hold (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, hold) When the predetermined display position change condition is satisfied with the icon display area 900, the first sub control section 400, and the second sub control section 500), the first position (for example, the first to first positions of the hold icon display area 900). A second position different from the first position (for example, the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, the variable icon table) On-hold display position changing means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, on-hold icon display area 900, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, on-hold icon display position that can be changed at least to the area 800, outside the display area) When the change process (step S1215) and the change icon display control process step S1305) and a predetermined display mode change condition are satisfied, the hold icon displayed in the first display mode is displayed as the first display mode. The hold display mode changing means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon display area 900, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, the hold icon change, which can be changed to at least a second display mode different from Processing (step S1211) and variable icon change processing (step S1321)), The display position changing means, when changing the display position of the hold icon from the first position to the second position, a predetermined hold movement animation (for example, a hold icon movement animation, a deletion animation, an increase animation) , A movement animation between hold and change icons) is displayed, and the hold display mode changing means changes the display mode of the hold icon from the first display mode to the second display mode during execution of the hold movement animation. It is made to change to.

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the interest of the game stand can be improved by informing the information regarding the hold in various ways.

  In addition, according to this configuration, the player is notified of the change in the display mode of the hold icon by switching the display mode of the hold icon while attracting the player's attention to the target hold icon by the movement. May be possible and may prevent oversight.

  Further, according to this configuration, while clearly informing that the number of holds has been increased or decreased due to the change of the display position, it is possible to specify the number of holds for a low-skilled player by switching the display mode. Can be difficult. Further, there are cases where a player with low skill level can be confused by simultaneously executing operations having conflicting effects.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, the hold display mode changing means changes the display mode of the hold icon from the first display mode to the second display mode. A change animation (for example, a change animation of a hold icon or a change animation between a hold / change icon) is displayed.

  According to this configuration, the animation is performed while the display position is changed while improving the interest by performing the change of the display mode of the hold with the animation, so even if the animation itself is created roughly, It may be difficult to notice. For this reason, there are cases where the interest can be improved effectively with little effort.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, when a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, a determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure (for example, special drawing 2 related lottery processing (step S229), special figure 1 related If the predetermined lottery process (step S231) and a predetermined symbol variation condition are satisfied, at least symbol variation stop display for stopping and displaying the symbol pattern corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure after performing symbol variation is possible. When a predetermined symbol display means (for example, special symbol display device 212, special symbol 2 display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208) and a predetermined prefetch notice condition are satisfied, a prefetch notice (for example, a hold icon is designated Pre-reading advance notice means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, hold icon display area 900, variable icon display area) 00, a first sub-control unit 400, and a second sub-control unit 500), and the prefetch notice unit may cause the hold display mode change unit to change the display mode of the hold icon as the prefetch notice. It is possible.

  According to this configuration, it may be easy to notice a change in the display mode of the hold icon that is performed as a prefetch notice.

  Further, according to this configuration, the trigger for moving the hold icon is likely to be concentrated at the end of the change or at the start of the change. By performing the pre-reading notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon in accordance with the opportunity, it may be difficult to compete with other notices that are made in accordance with the change, and may not interfere with each other.

  In addition, according to this configuration, since a notice regarding a specific lottery result of a hold is executed together with an animation indicating increase / decrease of the hold, there is a case where it is possible to easily grasp the time until a highly expected change is performed. is there.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, when the first display position change condition is satisfied, the predetermined display position change condition is satisfied, and the first display position change condition is the symbol variation. This is established when the number of holds stored in the hold storage means decreases due to the start of.

  According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to change the display mode of the hold icon at the same time while clearly informing that the hold that is the player's right has been digested due to the change. There may be a case where dissatisfaction caused by a notice of decrease in holding that is not a happy one can be reduced.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, when a predetermined notice condition is satisfied, notice means capable of starting at least notice (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 800, a hold icon display area 900, A first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-control unit 500), and the notification means is capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation icon as the notification when the predetermined notification condition is satisfied. The notice means is capable of displaying at least the hold icon as a look-ahead notice when a predetermined look-ahead notice condition is satisfied, and the notice means, after the symbol variation is started, A variation icon can be displayed, and the display mode of the variation icon is a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The hold display position changing unit changes the display position of the hold icon from the third display position (for example, the first area of the hold icon display area 900) based on the establishment of the first display position change condition. When changing the display position of the hold icon from the third position to the fourth position, the display position of the hold icon is changed to the fourth display position (for example, the fluctuation icon display area 800). The hold movement animation is displayed, and the hold display mode changing means changes the display position of the hold icon from the third position to the fourth position during execution of the hold movement animation. Is changed to the variation icon.

  According to this configuration, since it is clearly notified that the hold icon has been switched to the change icon, it may be clearer that the hold has been digested and the change is being performed. In particular, when a pre-reading notice is made at the time when the hold icon is displayed, it is easier to clearly tell the player that the change being executed is the target change of the pre-reading notice. It may be easier to have a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the present exemplary embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon is a mode selected based on the pre-read result, and a predetermined area (for example, the first of the hold icon display area 900 before and after the execution of the animation indicating increase / decrease of the hold number). The display mode of the hold icon displayed in any one of the fourth areas may be the same display mode (for example, Example 2-9). In this case, it is a condition that the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the hold prefetch, and there are two or more hold icon display modes that change by the hold prefetch. If the number of holds increases during execution of the movement animation of the hold icon, and the number of holds at the time of completion or immediately after the movement animation is the same as the number of holds before execution of the movement animation, misunderstanding is more likely to occur.

  According to this configuration, since the display mode of the hold icon is changed during the execution of the movement animation, it may be possible to prevent misrecognition of the hold that is a target of the pre-reading notice that is easy to occur in the conventional configuration. is there.

  In the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, the modes of conflicting contents (for example, the increase animation and the deletion animation of the hold icon) are paired with each other (for example, one is a mode of gradually decreasing the transparency of the hold icon, The other may be configured to gradually increase the transparency, one to gradually increase the display size of the hold icon, and the other to gradually decrease the display size. This not only makes it seem that the number of holds has not been reduced, but also can cause the player to have an illusion that the state of the reduction has been interrupted in the middle. The effect of making up for that discouragement may occur after making you feel.

  Further, in the present exemplary embodiment, there is a case where a hold icon erasing animation or the like is also performed at the start of the next fluctuation, and therefore the number of holds at the start of the fluctuation may be known. In recent game tables, the smaller the hold, the easier it is to reach, so the smaller the hold, the more frequent the production. Therefore, conventionally, when a reach occurs, it may be unclear whether the reach can be expected. Furthermore, since the relationship between the hold and the change is easy to understand, the relationship between the change being executed and the hold may be easily grasped even if the change time is designed to be significantly short. Furthermore, the player can be illusioned as if a plurality of changes are continuously made by one hold icon, which may improve the operation of the game table.

  Further, in the present exemplary embodiment, there is a case where the hold increase animation is continuously performed even after the target fluctuation is completed (for example, Example 2-5). Thereby, it may be possible to make an illusion as if the number of holdings is increased by one starting ball. In particular, when the variation is continuously performed, the effect may be remarkably exhibited.

  Further, in the present exemplary embodiment, a plurality of increasing animations are simultaneously executed for the same region (for example, Example 2-6). Accordingly, there is a case where the operation can be improved by making an illusion as if a plurality of suspensions are generated by one increase animation. In particular, when the plurality of increased hold icons are in the same mode, there may be a remarkable effect because the hold looks as if it has been split.

  In this exemplary embodiment, the save animation and the increase animation are executed in duplicate (for example, Example 2-7). As a result, it may be easy to understand that the interrupt shown in FIG. 2 has occurred. Conventionally, an advantageous special figure 2 interrupt has occurred, and it was difficult to understand that the fluctuation start due to the disadvantageous special figure 1 hold was delayed. Further, by shielding the disadvantageous hold icon of special figure 1 with the advantageous special figure 2 hold icon, it may be easier to tell the player that special figure 2 is more advantageous.

In this exemplary embodiment, a plurality of movement animations are simultaneously executed in the same manner, and the display manner may change for only one of the hold icons. As a result, there are cases where the change in the display mode of the hold icon can be particularly noticeable as long as the steps are aligned.
[Third exemplary form]
Next, a gaming table according to the third exemplary form of the present description will be described. About the structure of the pachinko machine 100 by this example form, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 by a 1st example form, description is abbreviate | omitted. Hereinafter, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present exemplary embodiment will be described.
(Example 3-1)
67 and 68 show an example of effect display in Example 3-1 of this exemplary form in time series. 67 (a) to 68 (b) show a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. The lower left area of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 800. In the variable icon display area 800, a predetermined condition (for example, that the special figure variable game is being executed and the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game is the predetermined display mode) is established. In this case, one variation icon can be displayed, and the reliability of the variation can be notified by the display mode of the variation icon.

  A horizontally long area below the effect display area 208d and adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area 800 is a hold icon display area 900. In the hold icon display area 900, one or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed. In the holding icon display area 900, the number of holdings of the special figure variable game can be notified by the number of holding icons, and a predetermined reliability can be notified of whether or not the holding is based on the display mode of each holding icon. Is possible. The hold icon display area 900 of this example can display a maximum of four hold icons, and is roughly divided into four areas: a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from left to right. ing. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively.

  At the time shown in FIG. 67A, the hold icon 901 and the hold icon 902 shown in FIG. 1 are displayed in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, respectively. The display mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is, for example, default white. Each of the holding icons 901 and 902 has a circular “Yatsushiro Shogun” pattern, and each of the holding icons 901 and 902 executes a standby animation that rotates clockwise around the center of the circle. In the standby animation of this example, it is assumed that four frames (for example, textures T001 to T004 in FIG. 18A) are periodically repeated. At the time shown in FIG. 67 (a), the hold icons 901 and 902 are both in the initial animation state (for example, T001 in FIG. 18 (a)) in which “8” is the normal position. That is, the animation modes (in other words, the angle, the direction, the motion, the phase, the action, the pose, and the like) of the two hold icons 901 and 902 (in this example, all the hold icons being displayed) are aligned. For example, the standby animations of the two hold icons 901 and 902 are synchronized with each other. In this example, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 800.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 67 (b) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are each rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. For example, it exists in T002 of FIG. That is, even at this time, the animation modes of the two hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 67 (c), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. Due to the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, a new hold icon 903 is displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area 900. The hold icons 901 and 902 previously displayed rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67 (b), respectively, and both of them are animation modes (for example, FIG. 18 (a) ) At T003). That is, even at this time, the animation modes of the two hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned. On the other hand, the newly held hold icon 903 is in an initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the previous hold icons 901 and 902. For example, the standby animation of the hold icon 903 is not synchronized with the standby animation of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 67 (d), the hold icons 901 and 902 are each rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67 (c). For example, it exists in T004 of FIG. That is, even at this time, the animation modes of the two hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode that rotates 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. Even at this time, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  68 (a) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are each rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67 (d), and both are in the initial state where “8” is the normal position. In the animation mode. That is, even at this time, the animation modes of the two hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned. At the timing when the hold icons 901 and 902 become the animation state in the initial state, the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation state in the initial state where “8” is the normal position. At this point, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. Thereafter, the hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise in a state where the animation modes are aligned (FIG. 68 (b)).

In this example, the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation state in the initial state when the hold icons 901 and 902 are in the initial animation state. The hold icon 903 may be aligned with the predetermined animation mode when triggered by the animation mode.
(Example 3-2)
FIG. 69 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-2 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 69 (a) to 69 (d) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 69 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both displayed in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position.

  Assume that at the time shown in FIG. 69 (b) thereafter, the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. Due to the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, an increase animation for displaying a new hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is started in the third area of the hold icon display area 900. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in such a manner that the hold icon 903 gradually rises from the lower side outside the display area to the third area of the hold icon display area 900 (FIGS. 69B and 69C). In this example, the hold icon 903 during the increase animation is maintained in the initial animation state in which “8” is the normal position without executing the standby animation.

Assume that the increase animation of the hold icon 903 is completed at the time shown in FIG. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 previously displayed are in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position. The hold icon 903 for which the increase animation has ended is also in the initial animation mode. That is, when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends, the animation modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. The start timing of the increase animation may be adjusted so that the animation modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 is completed, or the moving speed of the hold icon 903 in the increase animation is adjusted. Alternatively, both the start timing of the increase animation and the moving speed may be adjusted. When the increase animation ends, a standby animation of the hold icon 903 is started, and the three hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned.
(Example 3-3)
FIG. 70 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-3 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIGS. 70 (a) to (d) show states during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 70 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position.

  It is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 has increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 70 (b) thereafter. Due to the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, an increase animation for displaying a new hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is started in the third area of the hold icon display area 900. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in a manner in which the hold icon 903 gradually rises from the lower side outside the display area to the third area of the hold icon display area 900, as in the case of Example 3-2 (FIG. 70 (b). ), (C)). In this example, the hold icon 903 during the increase animation is maintained in the initial animation state in which “8” is the normal position without executing the standby animation.

Assume that the increase animation of the hold icon 903 has ended at the time shown in FIG. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are in an animation mode in which “Y” is the normal position. On the other hand, the hold icon 903 for which the increase animation has ended is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position. That is, when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 does not match the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902. When the increase animation ends, the hold icon 903 rotates clockwise together with the hold icons 901 and 902 in a state where the animation modes are not aligned. After that, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 at a predetermined timing (for example, the same timing as in the above-described or later embodiments).
(Example 3-4)
FIG. 71 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-4 of this exemplary form in time series. 71 (a) to 71 (d) show a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 71 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position.

  It is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 71 (b) thereafter. Due to the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, an increase animation for displaying a new hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is started in the third area of the hold icon display area 900. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in a manner in which the hold icon 903 gradually rises from the lower side outside the display area to the third area of the hold icon display area 900 as in the case of the embodiments 3-2 and 3-3 ( 71 (b), (c)). In this example, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is also executed on the hold icon 903 that is executing an increase animation.

  At the time shown in FIG. 71 (b), the hold icons 901 and 902 are in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 during the increase animation is also in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. That is, at this time, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are already prepared. Thereafter, during the execution of the increase animation and after the end of the increase animation, the hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned (FIGS. 71 (c) and (d)).

At the time when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 is completed (FIG. 71 (d)), the hold icons 901 to 903 are all in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. That is, in this example, when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends, the three hold icons 901 to 903 are all in the initial animation mode. When the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends, the start timing of the increase animation may be adjusted so that all the three hold icons 901 to 903 are in the initial animation mode, or the hold icon in the increase animation The moving speed 903 may be adjusted, or both the start timing of the increasing animation and the moving speed may be adjusted.
(Example 3-5)
FIG. 72 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-5 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 72 (a) to 72 (d) show a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 72 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this point in time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “yo” is the normal position.

  Assume that at the time shown in FIG. 72 (b) thereafter, the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. Due to the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, an increase animation for displaying a new hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is started in the third area of the hold icon display area 900. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in a manner in which the hold icon 903 gradually rises from the lower part outside the display area to the third area of the hold icon display area 900, as in the examples 3-2 to 3-4. 72 (b), (c)). In this example, the standby animation is also executed for the hold icon 903 during the increase animation.

  At the time shown in FIG. 72B, the hold icons 901 and 902 are in an animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 during the increase animation is also in an animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. That is, at this time, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are already prepared. Thereafter, during execution of the increase animation and after the end of the increase animation, the hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned (FIGS. 72 (c) and 72 (d)).

When the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends (FIG. 72 (d)), the hold icons 901 to 903 are all in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. That is, in this example, when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends, the three hold icons 901 to 903 are all arranged in an animation mode other than the initial state.
(Example 3-6)
FIG. 73 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-6 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 73 (a) to 73 (d) show a state during and at the end of a variation of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 73 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 902 of FIG. A hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 73 (b), the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “price” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  It is assumed that a special effect (for example, a super reach effect) for switching from a normal screen background to a predetermined screen background is started at the time shown in FIG. 73 (c). In this example, during the special effect, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon display area 900, each hold icon, etc. are hidden, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the screen.

  Thereafter, the special effect ends, the screen background for the special effect returns to the normal screen background, and a predetermined symbol combination (in this example, a symbol combination “decoration other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 7-decoration 6-decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed after fluctuation for a predetermined time (FIG. 73 (d)). When returning to the normal screen background, the display of the hold icons 901 to 903 in the hold icon display area 900 is resumed. In this example, at least when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. For example, the animation mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 may be arranged at the timing when the display of the hold icons 901 to 903 is resumed (during fluctuation of the symbol combination), or arranged at the timing when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, although not shown, the symbols may be arranged at the timing when the symbols are stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214.

  As an arrangement method of the animation mode of the hold icon, the animation mode of the subsequent hold icon 903 may be aligned with the animation mode of the previous hold icon 901 or 902, or the animation mode of the previous hold icon 901 or 902 is The animation mode of the hold icon 903 may be aligned, or the animation mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 may be aligned with the reference (eg, initial state) animation mode.

Moreover, the animation mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 may be aligned at the timing when the symbol combination for notifying the big hit is stopped and displayed, or the timing at which the subsequent big hit effect ends (for example, the hold icon 901 after the big hit effect ends) ˜903 when the display is resumed).
(Example 3-7)
FIG. 74 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-7 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 74 (a) to 74 (d) show the states during and at the end of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 74 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position.

  Thereafter, at the time point shown in FIG. 74 (b), the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “price” is the normal position.

  It is assumed that a special effect for switching from a normal screen background to a predetermined screen background is started at the time shown in FIG. In this example, during the special effect, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon display area 900, each hold icon, etc. are hidden. In addition, during this special performance, it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 has increased by one.

Thereafter, the special effect ends, the screen background for the special effect returns to the normal screen background, and a predetermined symbol combination (in this example, a symbol combination “decoration other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 7-decoration 6-decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed after fluctuation for a predetermined time (FIG. 74 (d)). When returning to the normal screen background, the display of the hold icons 901 and 902 is resumed, and the display of a new hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is started. In this example, when the display of the hold icon 903 is started, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. That is, the hold icon 903 starts to be displayed in an animation mode that matches the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.
(Example 3-8)
FIG. 75 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-8 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 75 (a) to 75 (c) show the states during and at the end of a certain special figure 1 variable game. 75 (a) and (b) are the same as FIGS. 73 (b) and (c) of Example 3-6.

After the state shown in FIG. 75 (b), the special effect ends, the screen background for the special effect returns to the normal screen background, and a predetermined symbol combination (in this example, a hit is notified in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c). The symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination to be displayed is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation of the predetermined time (FIG. 75 (c)). The display of the hold icons 901 to 903 in the hold icon display area 900 is resumed when returning to the normal screen background. In this example, unlike Example 3-6, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 even when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 may be aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 at a predetermined timing (for example, the same timing as that of the above-described or later embodiments).
(Example 3-9)
FIG. 76 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-9 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 76 (a) to 76 (d) show a state from the variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game to after the start of the fluctuation of the next special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 76 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 902 of FIG. A hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “price” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 76B thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Then, at the time shown in FIG. 76 (c), the special figure 1 variable game ends. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 76 (d), the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Based on the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon 901 is deleted with a predetermined deletion animation, for example. The hold icons 902 and 903 move from the second and third areas of the hold icon display area 900 to the first and second areas, respectively, with a predetermined moving animation, for example. At this point, the animation modes of the two hold icons 902 and 903 are aligned. The timing at which the animation modes of the hold icons 902 and 903 are aligned may be, for example, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable game is started, or the timing at which the movement of the hold icons 902 and 903 is completed. The timing at which the movement of the hold icons 902 and 903 is started may be the timing at which the hold icons 902 and 903 are being moved. In this example, regardless of the animation mode immediately before each of the hold icons 902 and 903, they are arranged in a predetermined animation mode. For this reason, the rotation of the hold icons 902 and 903 may be discontinuous. The animation mode to be aligned may be an animation mode (first frame) in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, or may be an animation mode other than that.

Here, the animation modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned at the timing when the symbol combination for notifying the big hit is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c after the fluctuation period shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b). It may be arranged at the timing when the subsequent big hit effect is finished.
(Example 3-10)
FIG. 77 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-10 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 77 (a) to (d) show a state from a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game to after a change start of the next special figure 1 variable game. 77A to 77C are the same as FIGS. 76A to 76C of Example 3-9.

At the time shown in FIG. 77 (d), the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Based on the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon 901 is deleted with a predetermined deletion animation, for example. The hold icons 902 and 903 move from the second and third areas of the hold icon display area 900 to the first and second areas, respectively, with a predetermined moving animation, for example. At this time (for example, when the special figure 1 variable game is started, when the movement of the holding icons 902 and 903 is completed, when the movement of the holding icons 902 and 903 is started, when the holding icons 902 and 903 are moving At the timing), the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 902. The present embodiment is different from Embodiment 3-9 in that the rotation of the hold icon 902 is not discontinuous.
(Example 3-11)
FIG. 78 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-11 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. At the time shown in FIG. 78 (a), the effect mode (effect state) is the predetermined mode A. At this time, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 903 (display mode) of FIG. : White) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this point in time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “yo” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

Thereafter, it is assumed that the effect mode is switched from mode A to another mode B at the time shown in FIG. This switching of the effect mode may be based on the player's operation or may not be based on the player's operation. Further, the switching of the effect mode may be accompanied by switching of the control state (internal state) of the pachinko machine 100, or may not be accompanied by switching of the control state. In this example, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902 at the timing when the effect mode is switched from mode A to mode B. As a method of aligning the animation mode of the hold icon, the animation mode of the previous hold icon 901, 902 may be aligned with the animation mode of the subsequent hold icon 903, or the animation mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 is a reference (for example, The animation state in the initial state may be aligned. Moreover, the animation mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 may be arranged only when the effect mode is switched to a specific mode.
(Example 3-12)
FIG. 79 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-12 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. At the time shown in FIG. 79 (a), the control state of the pachinko machine 100 is a predetermined state (for example, the probability variation state). At this time, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 903 (display mode) of FIG. : White) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this point in time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “yo” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 79 (b), it is assumed that one hold is consumed and the control state is switched from a predetermined state to another state (for example, a normal state). Here, the switching of the control state may be accompanied by a change of the production state, or may not be accompanied by a change of the production state. In this example, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 902 at the timing when the control state is switched from a predetermined state to another state. As a method of aligning the animation mode of the hold icon, the animation mode of the previous hold icon 902 may be aligned with the animation mode of the subsequent hold icon 903, or the animation mode of the hold icons 902 and 903 becomes the reference animation mode. May be aligned. For example, in the case of the falling lottery type, when the control state is switched based on winning the falling lottery, the animation mode of the hold icon may not be aligned.
(Example 3-13)
FIG. 80 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-13 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIGS. 80 (a) to (d) show the states during and at the end of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 80 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 902 of FIG. A hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 80 (b) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in an animation mode in which the “price” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 80C, a special effect (for example, a super reach effect) for switching from a normal screen background to a predetermined screen background is started. In this example, during the special effect, the variable icon display area 800 is hidden, and the hold icon display area 900 moves to the right corner of the screen and is deformed vertically. In the hold icon display area 900 moved to the right corner of the screen, the hold icons 901 to 903 are reduced and displayed vertically. In the area near the hold icon display area 900, the number of holds may be displayed as a number.

  In this example, when the position of the hold icon display area 900 changes, when the shape of the hold icon display area 900 changes, when the position of the hold icons 901 to 903 changes, or the display size of the hold icons 901 to 903 At the timing when changes are made, the animation modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. With the reduced hold icons 901 to 903, the standby animation may be executed as before the reduction, or may not be executed.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 80 (d), the special effect ends, the screen background for the special effect returns to the normal screen background, and the display of the hold icon display area 900 and the hold icons 901 to 903 returns. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a predetermined symbol combination (in this example, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed after fluctuation for a predetermined time. .

When the standby animation of the hold icons 901 to 903 is not executed during the special effect, the standby animation when the display of the hold icons 901 to 903 is restored is, for example, the initial animation mode (first frame). Starts from. When the standby animation of the hold icons 901 to 903 is executed during the special effect, the standby animation when the display of the hold icons 901 to 903 returns to the original state is, for example, the animation state in the initial state, or when the special effect ends. The animation mode (or the next frame) or the animation mode (or the next frame) immediately before the start of the special effect is started.
(Example 3-14)
FIG. 81 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-14 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIGS. 81 (a) to 81 (d) show the state during and at the end of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 81 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 902 of FIG. A hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 81 (b) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in an animation mode in which the “price” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Then, at the time shown in FIG. 81 (c), a special effect (for example, a super reach effect) for switching from the normal screen background to the predetermined screen background is started. In this example, during the special effect, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon display area 900, and the hold icons 901 to 903 are hidden, and the hold number is displayed as a number in the area at the right corner of the screen.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 81 (d), the special effect ends, the screen background for the special effect returns to the normal screen background, and the hold icon display area 900 and the hold icons 901 to 903 are displayed again. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a predetermined symbol combination (in this example, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed after fluctuation for a predetermined time. .

In this example, the animation modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are arranged at the timing when the hold icons 901 to 903 are redisplayed after the special effect ends. The standby animations of the hold icons 901 to 903 after the re-display include, for example, the animation mode in the initial state, the animation mode (or the next frame) immediately before the special presentation start of the previous hold icons 901 and 902, and the subsequent hold icon 903. Starts from one of the animation modes (or the next frame) immediately before the start of the special effect.
(Example 3-15)
FIG. 82 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-15 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 82 (a) and 82 (b) show the state during the variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 82 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 902 of FIG. A hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902.

It is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon 901 changes from white to another display mode (for example, blue) based on the prefetching result at the time shown in FIG. When the display mode of the hold icon changes, a predetermined change animation may be accompanied. In this example, the timing at which the display mode (for example, color) of the previous hold icon 901 changes (for example, when a change animation is involved, the timing at which the change animation is started, the timing at which the change animation ends, or the change animation In the middle), the animation mode of the subsequent hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902. Note that the animation mode of the hold icon 903 may be aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902 at the timing when the display mode of the subsequent hold icon 903 changes. At the timing when the display mode of the hold icon changes, the player pays attention to the change in the display mode of the hold icon, so that even if the animation mode of the hold icon is aligned, it may be possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. is there.
(Example 3-16)
FIG. 83 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-16 of this exemplary form in time series. 83 (a) and 83 (b) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 83 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position.

  It is assumed that the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 83 (b). In addition, this hold is a prefetch target hold, and prefetch notifications regarding the increased hold and the previous hold are collectively executed when the hold increases. In the third area of the hold icon display area 900, a new hold icon 903 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon 903 is, for example, red for notifying the success or failure of the hold with relatively high reliability. Further, the display mode of the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 changes from white (default) to, for example, red. The change in the display mode may be accompanied by a predetermined change animation. The display mode of the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 remains white.

In this example, the animation modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are arranged at the timing when the prefetch notifications for a plurality of holds are collectively executed. That is, in this example, the animation mode of the newly displayed hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation modes of the previous hold icons 901 and 902 when the display of the hold icon 903 is started. In this example, the display mode of the hold icon 901 remains white, but the display mode of the hold icon 901 may be changed to a predetermined display mode.
(Example 3-17)
84 to 85 show examples of effect display in Example 3-17 of this exemplary form in time series. FIG. 84 (a) to FIG. 85 (b) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 84A, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. At the time shown in FIG. 84 (b) thereafter, the animation modes of the two hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned.

  It is assumed that the hold (pre-reading target hold) in FIG. 1 has increased at the time shown in FIG. In the third area of the hold icon display area 900, a new hold icon 903 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed, and a standby animation is started. The display mode of the hold icon 903 is “red”, for example. The hold icon 903 may be displayed in the state of the display mode “red” from the beginning, or may be changed to the display mode “red” after being displayed in the default display mode (for example, white). When the display mode changes from default to “red”, a predetermined change animation may be accompanied. When the hold icon 903 is displayed in the third area, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902. After the hold icon 903 is displayed, an effect moving image representing an aura is displayed around the hold icon 903 (back side) as an example of a look-ahead change mode (FIGS. 84D and 85A). )).

  At the time shown in FIG. 85 (a), the hold icons 901 and 902 are both in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is the normal position. At the timing when the hold icons 901 and 902 become the animation state in the initial state, the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation state in the initial state where “8” is the normal position. At this point, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. Thereafter, the hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned (FIG. 85 (b)).

  FIGS. 86A and 86B show the states after FIGS. 84A to 84D as modifications of the present embodiment. At the time shown in FIG. 86 (a), the hold icons 901 and 902 are both in the initial animation state in which “8” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “General” is in the normal position. At this time, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

At the time shown in FIG. 86 (b), the display of the effect moving image around the hold icon 903 ends. In this example, when the display of the effect moving image ends, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902. Thereafter, the hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned. It should be noted that the animation mode of the hold icon is aligned after the display of the effect moving image is completed, and the animation mode of the hold icon 901 and 902 is set to a predetermined mode (for example, the first time). It may be when it becomes (state).
(Example 3-18)
FIG. 87 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-18 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 87 (a) to 87 (d) show a state from the end of a special figure 1 variable game to the start of the next special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 87 (a), a certain special figure 1 variable game has ended. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed. In the first to third areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 903 (display mode: white) of FIG. Is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time shown in FIG. 87 (b), the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started.

  In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 801 and jumps from the first area to the upper left first, and then to the lower left. It moves down and moves to the fluctuation icon display area 800 located on the left side of the first area (FIGS. 87 (b) and (c)). Here, even after the hold icon 901 becomes the change icon 801, the standby animation is continuously executed. In this example, the fluctuation icon 801 is erased when moved to the fluctuation icon display area 800, but the fluctuation icon 801 moved to the fluctuation icon display area 800 is displayed as it is until the end of the fluctuation. Also good.

  The movement animation of the hold icon is executed in the same manner as the movement animation between the hold / change icon. That is, in the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 first jumps from the second area to the upper left and then lowers to the lower left, and the left of the second area. Move to the first area located next to it. The hold icon 903 displayed in the third area also moves to the second area in the same manner.

  In this example, the image of each icon during the movement animation (the standby animation is also running) is the same as the image of each icon when the standby animation is being executed independently, but the standby animation is being executed independently. The image may be a different image from the above, or the images may be common and different in size. Further, the standby animation may be interrupted during the movement animation.

  Further, in this example, the movement animation of the fluctuation icon 801 (hold icon 901), the movement animation of the hold icon 902, and the movement animation of the hold icon 903 are all executed simultaneously in synchronization with each other in the same manner. Need not be executed at the same time. For example, the image of the icon itself may be different between the movement animation of the fluctuation icon 801 (movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icon) and the movement animation of the hold icons 902 and 903, and the size of the icon itself may be different. It may be different or only the size may be different. In addition, the execution times of the moving animations may or may not overlap.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 87 (b), the variation icon 801 and the hold icon 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which the “price” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the change icon 801 and the hold icon 902.

Each moving animation ends at the time shown in FIG. 87 (c), and the change icon 801 is deleted. At this time, the hold icons 902 and 903 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. Thus, in this example, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 and the animation mode of the hold icon 902 are aligned at the timing when each moving animation is completed. Thereafter, the hold icons 902 and 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned (FIG. 87 (d)).
(Example 3-19)
FIG. 88 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-19 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 88 (a) to 88 (d) show a state from the end of a special figure 1 variable game to the start of the next special figure 1 variable game. FIG. 88 (a) is the same as FIG. 87 (a).

The next special figure 1 variable game is started at the time shown in FIG. 88 (b), and the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are started as in FIG. 87 (b). At this time, the change icon 801 and the hold icons 902 and 903 are arranged in an animation mode in which “Year” is the normal position. Thus, in this example, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 and the animation mode of the variation icon 801 and the hold icon 902 are aligned at the timing when each moving animation is started. Thereafter, with the change icon 801 and the hold icons 902 and 903, the movement animation and the standby animation are executed in a state where the animation modes are aligned (FIGS. 88 (c) and (d)).
(Example 3-20)
89 and 90 show examples of effect display in Example 3-20 of this exemplary form in time series. FIGS. 89 (a) to 90 (b) show a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 89 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. Is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. Even at the time shown in FIG. 89 (b) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position.

  At the time shown in FIG. 89 (c), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. Here, in this example, the new hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 900 at a predetermined synchronization timing that arrives at a predetermined cycle (in this example, the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is in the initial state). Timing) only. At the time shown in FIG. 89 (c), since it is not the synchronization timing, the display of the new hold icon in the third area is delayed (in the figure, the display of the hold icon in the third area is delayed). Is represented by a dashed circle). Although not shown in the figure, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the holding of special figure 1 has increased at this time.

  Even at the time shown in FIG. 89 (d), the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is a mode in which “Yay” is the normal position, and since it is not the synchronization timing, the display of a new hold icon is delayed.

At the time shown in FIG. 90A thereafter, the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is in the initial state in which “8” is the normal position, and a predetermined synchronization timing arrives. Therefore, display of a new hold icon 903 based on the hold increase at the time of FIG. 89 (c) is started at this timing. Thereafter, the hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned (FIG. 90 (b)).
(Example 3-21)
FIG. 91 and FIG. 92 show examples of effect display in Example 3-21 of this exemplary form in time series. 91 (a) to 92 (b) show a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 91 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. Is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. Even at the time shown in FIG. 91B thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position.

  Assume that at the time shown in FIG. 91 (c), the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one. Here, in this example, as in Example 3-20, a new hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 900 at a predetermined synchronization timing that arrives at a predetermined cycle (in this example, the hold icon 901, Only the timing at which the animation mode 902 is in the initial state). At the time shown in FIG. 91 (c), since it is not the synchronization timing, the display of a new hold icon in the third area is delayed.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 91 (d), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is further increased by one. At this point in time, the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is a mode in which “yo” is the normal position, and since it is not the synchronization timing, the display of a new hold icon in the fourth area is also delayed.

Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 92A, the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is in the initial state in which “8” is the normal position, and a predetermined synchronization timing arrives. Therefore, a new hold icon 903 based on the hold increase at the time of FIG. 91 (c) and a new hold icon 904 based on the hold increase at the time of FIG. 91 (d) are simultaneously displayed at this timing. . Thereafter, the hold icons 901 to 904 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned (FIG. 92 (b)). In this example, an example in which two suspensions continuously increase between the predetermined synchronization timing and the next synchronization timing has been described, but the suspension is performed between the predetermined synchronization timing and the next synchronization timing. The same applies to the case where two are increased simultaneously.
(Example 3-22)
93 and 94 show examples of effect display in Example 3-22 of this exemplary form in time series. 93 (a) to 94 (b) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 93 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. Is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. At the time point shown in FIG. 93B thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 93 (c), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. Further, as the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold, “Sabohani” having a different outer shape from the default display mode is selected based on the pre-read result or the like. A new hold icon 903 (display mode: Sabohani) is displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area 900, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the standby animation of this example, it is assumed that three frames (for example, textures T001 to T003 in FIG. 18D) are periodically repeated. At the time shown in FIG. 93C, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an initial animation mode (for example, T001 in FIG. 18D).

  At the time point shown in FIG. 93 (d), the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “price” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in the animation mode of the next frame in the initial state (for example, T002 in FIG. 18D).

  At the time point shown in FIG. 94A thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in an animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. In this example, the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation state in the initial state at the timing when the hold icons 901 and 902 become the animation state in the initial state. That is, at this time, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned.

Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 94B, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 becomes an animation mode of the next frame in the initial state.
(Example 3-23)
FIG. 95 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-23 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 95 (a) and 95 (b) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. Prior to the time shown in FIG. 95 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) in FIG. 1 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, and the time shown in FIG. 95 (a). Then, it is assumed that the hold in FIG. 1 is increased by one and a new hold icon 902 (display mode: red) is started to be displayed in the second area. The hold icon 901 is in an animation mode in which “General” is in the normal position. The hold icon 902 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon. In this example, when a hold icon of the display mode “red” is newly displayed, a predetermined effect moving image (FIG. 84D, FIG. 85A, etc.) as an example of the prefetch change mode after a predetermined time has elapsed. Is displayed around the hold icon. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 95A, an effect moving image is scheduled to be displayed around the newly displayed hold icon 902.

It is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 95 (b) thereafter. In the third area of the hold icon display area 900, a new hold icon 903 (display mode: Sabohani) is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the display mode “savohani” has higher reliability than the display mode “red”. In this example, the look-ahead change mode (for example, display of the effect image) of the hold icon of the display mode “red” is canceled when a new hold icon is displayed thereafter. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 95 (b), the display of the effect moving image around the hold icon 902 is canceled based on the display of the new hold icon 903 after the hold icon 902 itself. . Canceling the display of the effect moving image may be performed before starting the display of the effect moving image, or may be performed after starting the display of the effect moving image. The display of the effect moving image for the hold icon 902 is canceled when a hold icon that satisfies a specific condition (for example, a hold icon with higher reliability than the hold icon 902) is newly displayed. If a hold icon that does not satisfy is newly displayed, it may not be canceled.
(Example 3-24)
FIG. 96 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-24 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 96 (a) and 96 (b) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. Is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icon 901 is in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 902 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901.

Assume that at the time shown in FIG. 96 (b), the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one. In addition, as a display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold, “Sabohani” is selected based on the prefetch result or the like. A new hold icon 903 (display mode: Sabohani) is displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area 900, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In this example, at the timing when the hold icon 903 with high reliability is newly displayed, the animation mode of each of the hold icons 901 to 903 is aligned with the animation mode in the initial state, for example. That is, at this time, all of the hold icons 901 to 903 are in the animation state in the initial state.
(Example 3-25)
FIG. 97 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-25 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 97 (a) and 97 (b) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 97 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: blue) of FIG. Is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icon 901 is in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 902 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901. That is, in this example, since the reliability of the hold icon 902 is not so high, when the hold icon 902 increases, the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902 are not aligned.

At the time shown in FIG. 97 (b), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. In addition, as a display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold, “Sabohani” is selected based on the prefetch result or the like. A new hold icon 903 (display mode: Sabohani) is displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area 900, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In this example, at the timing when the hold icon 903 with high reliability is newly displayed, the animation mode of each of the hold icons 901 to 903 is aligned with the animation mode in the initial state, for example. That is, at this time, all of the hold icons 901 to 903 are in the animation state in the initial state. Note that the animation mode of each of the hold icons 901 to 903 may be arranged only at the timing when the hold icon having a display mode (for example, Sabohani) having a different external shape from the default display mode is displayed.
(Example 3-26)
FIG. 98 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-26 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 98 (a) to 98 (d) show states during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 98 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. Further, an increase animation of the hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is started in the third area based on the fact that the hold in FIG. 1 has increased by one. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 to 903 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position.

At the time shown in FIG. 98 (b), it is assumed that the hold in FIG. 1 is increased by one before the increase animation of the hold icon 903 is completed. Based on the increase in the hold, an increase animation of the hold icon 904 (display mode: white) is started in the fourth area of the hold icon display area 900. In this example, when a new increase animation in the fourth area is started, the increase animation of the previous hold icon 903 in the third area is canceled (skipped). At this time point, the hold icons 901 to 904 are arranged in an animation mode in which “yo” is the normal position. Thereafter, while the hold icons 901 to 904 maintain the state in which the animation modes are aligned, the increase animation of the hold icon 904 is continued in the fourth region (FIGS. 98C and 98D).
(Example 3-27)
FIG. 99 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-27 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (c) show a state from the end of a special figure 1 variable game to the start of the next special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 99 (a), the special figure 1 variable game is finished, and the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The The hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both displayed in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, and a standby animation is executed. Yes. Further, at this point, the hold in FIG. 1 is increased by 1, and a hold icon 903 (display mode: red) is newly displayed in the third area. At the time shown in FIG. 99 (a), an effect moving image as an example of a prefetch change mode is scheduled to be displayed around the newly displayed hold icon 903. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902.

At the time shown in FIG. 99 (b), the next special figure 1 variable game is started, and the decorative display variable display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started. These moving animations are executed in the same manner as in Example 3-18. Even during the execution of these moving animations, the standby animation is continuously executed. In this example, the display of the effect moving image around the hold icon 903 is canceled based on the movement animation of the hold icon 903 being executed. Further, in this example, the animation modes of the hold icons 902 and 903 are aligned at the timing when the movement animation ends (FIG. 99 (c)).
(Example 3-28)
FIG. 100 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-28 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. FIGS. 100A to 100D show a state from the end of a special figure 1 variable game to the start of the next special figure 1 variable game. 100 (a) to 100 (c) are the same as FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (c), and thus description thereof is omitted. In this example, based on the movement animation of the hold icon 903 being executed, the display of the effect moving image around the hold icon 903 is postponed until the end of the movement animation. Therefore, after the movement animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 100D, a predetermined effect moving image is displayed around the hold icon 903 increased before the movement animation is started.
(Example 3-29)
FIG. 101 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-29 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 101 (a) to (d) show a state from the end of a certain special figure 1 variable game to the start after the next special figure 1 variable game is started. FIG. 101 (a) is the same as FIG. 99 (a). At the time shown in FIG. 101 (b), the next special figure 1 variable game is started, and the decorative display variable display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started. These moving animations are executed in the same manner as in Example 3-18. Even during the execution of these moving animations, the standby animation is continuously executed. In this example, the effect moving image around the hold icon 903 is displayed even while the moving animation is being executed. The display of the effect image starts, for example, almost simultaneously with the start of the moving animation, and ends almost simultaneously with the end of the moving animation. Further, in this example, the animation modes of the hold icons 902 and 903 are aligned at the timing when the movement animation ends (FIGS. 101 (c) and (d)). The effect moving image may be displayed overlapping with other reserved icons 902 and decorative symbols. In this case, the effect moving image may be displayed behind or behind the other on-hold icon 902 or the decorative design.
(Example 3-30)
102 and 103 show examples of effect display in Example 3-30 of the present exemplary embodiment in time series. 102 (a) to 103 (b) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 102 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. At the time shown in FIG. 102 (b) thereafter, the two hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position.

  It is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 has increased at the time shown in FIG. In the third area of the hold icon display area 900, a new hold icon 903 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed, and a standby animation is started. The initial display mode of the hold icon 903 is “white”, and the next display mode (for example, the final display mode) that is changed at a predetermined timing is “red”. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The increased hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902. Here, after the hold icon 903 is newly displayed in the initial display mode “white”, it changes to the next display mode “red” at the timing when the previous hold icon becomes the initial animation mode. At this time, since the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is not in the initial state, the display mode of the hold icon 903 remains “white”.

  At the time shown in FIG. 102 (d) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are in an animation mode in which “yo” is in the normal position, and the hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position. Even at this time, since the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is not in the initial state, the display mode of the hold icon 903 remains “white”.

Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 103 (a), the hold icons 901 and 902 are in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position. At the timing when the hold icons 901 and 902 are in the initial animation mode, the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902. Thereby, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. Further, the display mode of the hold icon 903 is switched from “white” to “red” at the timing when the hold icons 901 and 902 are in the initial animation state.

Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 103 (b), an effect moving image is displayed around the hold icon 903.
(Example 3-31)
In the above Examples 3-1 to 3-30, the hold icon of FIG. 1 was described as an example, but it is of course possible to combine the hold icon of FIG. FIG. 104A shows an example in which the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 900. In this example, the hold icon display area 900 is roughly divided into two on the left and right. The left part of the hold icon display area 900 is a special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, and the right part is a special figure 2 hold icon display area 960. Each of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 can display a maximum of four hold icons in a left-justified manner, and the four first to fourth areas from left to right. It is divided into areas. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth holding ranks in each of FIG. 1 and FIG. In FIG. 104 (a), four special figure 1 hold icons 901 to 904 are displayed in the first to fourth areas of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, and the first of the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 is displayed. In the fourth area, four special figure 2 hold icons 911 to 914 are displayed. The shape of the special figure 1 hold icons 901 to 904 is circular, and the shape of the special figure 2 hold icons 911 to 914 is a square different from the shape of the special figure 1 hold icon.

  104 (b) and 104 (c) show an example different from that shown in FIG. 104 (a). In this example, the hold icon display area 900 can display a maximum of eight hold icons in a left-justified manner and is divided into eight areas of first to eighth areas from left to right. In this example, in the first to eighth areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icons with higher priority are displayed on the left side (first area side). In the case of the special figure 2 priority change machine, the special figure 2 hold icon on the priority change side has a higher priority than the special figure 1 hold icon, and in each of the special figure 2 and special figure 1 the higher the priority is, the earlier hold icon. . That is, the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game to be executed next is arranged in the first area adjacent to the variable icon display area 800. In FIG. 104 (b), four special figure 1 hold icons 901 to 904 are displayed in the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900. In FIG. 104 (c), four special figure 2 hold icons 911 to 914 are displayed in the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, and four special figure 1 hold icons are displayed in the fifth to eighth areas. 901 to 904 are displayed.

  FIG. 105 (a) shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure variable game in the example shown in FIGS. 104 (b) and 104 (c). At the time shown in FIG. 105 (a), the special figure 1 hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the special figure 1 hold icon 902 (display mode: white) are displayed in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position.

  Then, at the time shown in FIG. 105 (b), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 2 is increased by one. Based on the increase in the hold on the priority change side, the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902 in the first and second areas move to the second and third areas, respectively. When the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902 move, the above-described evacuation animation may be accompanied. In addition, a special figure 2 hold icon 911 is newly displayed in the first area. When the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is newly displayed, a predetermined increase animation may be accompanied. At this time, the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902 in the second and third areas are aligned in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The special figure 2 hold icon 911 in the first area is in an initial animation state in which “8” is the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation form of the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time shown in FIG. 105 (c) after that, the special figure 1 holding icons 901 and 902 in the second and third areas are arranged in an animation mode in which “yo” is the normal position. The special map 2 hold icon 911 in the first area is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the special map 1 hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time shown in FIG. 105 (d) thereafter, the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902 in the second and third areas are aligned in the initial animation state in which “8” is the normal position. At the timing when the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902 become the animation state in the initial state, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is aligned with the animation state in the initial state where “8” is the normal position. At this point, three hold icons 901, 902, and 911 are aligned. This example is common to Example 3-1 and the like in that the retained icon 911 that is increased later matches the animation mode of the retained icons 901 and 902 that are increased earlier, but the retained icon 911 corresponding to the previous change is used. Is different from the embodiment 3-1 and the like in that it matches the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 corresponding to later changes.

  FIGS. 106A and 106B are diagrams for explaining a phenomenon that may occur when an image is reduced. When an image (for example, a holding icon) is reduced by the VDP compression / enlargement function, the aspect ratio may change. For example, the image 1001 in FIG. 106 (a) and the image 1002 in FIG. 106 (b) have a circular outer shape and a 3 × 4 pattern placed in the outer shape. On the other hand, in images 1011 and 1012 in which the vertical and horizontal directions of these images 1001 and 1002 are reduced to ½, the pattern changes to horizontal 3 × vertical 3. Here, the line width of the edge of the pattern may be reduced or may not be reduced. In such a case, considering that the same image data is used, the image 1001 (image 1002) and the image 1011 (image 1012) have the same mode (for example, shape, pattern, color, etc.) and only the size. Can be considered different. Considering that the aspect ratios of the patterns actually displayed are different, it can be considered that the image 1001 (image 1002) and the image 1011 (image 1012) have different modes and sizes.

  FIGS. 107A to 107C are diagrams for explaining what kind of texture data needs to be provided when displaying an animation for enlarging / reducing an image. In this example, while executing a standby animation in which an image (for example, a hold icon) is enlarged and reduced as time passes as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the image is further greatly reduced / reduced as shown in FIG. 107 (b). Execute the moving animation to move. For example, the movement animation is started at the timing when the image in the standby animation becomes the maximum size. In this case, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the image size range enlarged / reduced by the standby animation is individually provided with texture data, and the image size range enlarged / reduced by the moving animation is provided with texture data. Instead, any of the texture data for standby animation may be enlarged or reduced by the VDP function. Further, for the range of the image size that is enlarged / reduced by the moving animation, one texture data may be provided for the moving animation, and the texture data may be enlarged / reduced by the VDP function. Also, individual texture data may be provided for the range of the image size that is enlarged or reduced by the moving animation.

  108A to 108D are diagrams for explaining a phenomenon that may occur when the transparency is changed. When the transparency is increased in the gradation-displayed image (for example, the hold icon) as shown in FIG. 108 (a), it gradually becomes transparent from the lightly colored part (right part in the figure) as shown in FIG. 108 (b). Becomes invisible. For this reason, when the animation which increases / decreases transparency using the same image data is performed, it may be visually recognized so that the aspect (for example, a shape, a pattern, a color) of a display image may change in the said animation.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), when an animation for increasing / decreasing transparency is executed using a character image “Large” whose color is lighter toward the right side, the shape of the character image “Large” particularly in the right side of the animation It may be visually recognized to change. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), an animation for increasing / decreasing transparency using a character string image including four character images “eight”, “large”, “general”, and “army” whose colors become lighter in order. When executed, the character string image “eight majors” may be visually recognized as “eight majors”, “eight majors”, “eights”, and the like in the animation.

  Considering that the same image data is used in the above case, this animation can be considered as an animation in which the aspect is the same and only the transparency is changed. Further, in consideration of the fact that the actually displayed mode is different, this animation can be considered as an animation in which the mode and the transparency change.

  109 (a) and 109 (b) are diagrams illustrating overlapping display between the hold icons or between the hold icon and another image. The hold icon 991 shown in FIG. 109 (a) has a main body portion 991a that is a main part of the hold display, and an additional portion 991b (effect image) that is an additional part of the hold display. When the hold icon 991 is displayed overlapping with another image (for example, another hold icon or an image other than the hold icon (including a decorative pattern)), the main body portion 991a is displayed in front of the other image. The additional portion 991b may be displayed in the back of another image. Further, both the main body portion 991a and the additional portion 991b may be displayed in front of other images. Further, both the main body portion 991a and the additional portion 991b may be displayed in the back of another image. Further, the main body portion 991a may be displayed in the back of another image, and the additional portion 991b may be displayed in front of the other image. Further, the additional portion 991b may overlap with other images, but the main body portion 991a may not overlap with other images. Further, both the main body portion 991a and the additional portion 991b may not overlap with other images.

  FIG. 109 (b) shows an example of a standby icon standby animation (corresponding to FIG. 18 (b)). When this standby animation is executed, the hold icon first rotates once, and then stops rotating and remains stationary in the initial state. The initial rotation of the hold icon can also be considered part or all of the increase animation of the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold icon may be rotated at least twice instead of once, and may remain stationary after the rotation is stopped in another state, or once or A combination of a plurality of rotations and stationary for a predetermined time may be repeated at a predetermined cycle. When such an animation is executed, the hold icon may not overlap with another image (for example, another hold icon or an image other than the hold icon) during the first rotation period. Even if it overlaps with the other image, the hold icon may be displayed in front of other images. Further, during the first rotation period, a change in the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change in prefetching) may not be performed. As a result, it may be noted that the holding has increased.

  110 to 112 show examples of the animation of the hold icon. In the animation of the reserved icon of the princess character shown in FIG. 110 (a), an image with the princess facing to the right (left in the figure) (animation mode 1, initial state) and an image with the princess facing to the front (Animation mode 2) and an image (animation mode 3) with the princess facing to the left (right in the figure) are sequentially displayed repeatedly. In the animation of the hold icon of the chief character shown in FIG. 110 (b), an image (animation mode 1, initial state) where the chief is facing right (left in the figure), and an image where the chief is facing front. (Animation mode 2) and an image (animation mode 3) in which the number is facing to the left (right in the figure) are sequentially displayed repeatedly. The animation shown in FIG. 110 (a) is different from the animation shown in FIG. 110 (b), but the scale of one cycle and the animation mode in each frame (in other words, direction, motion, action, pose) are common. doing.

  In the animation of the reserved icon of the princess character shown in FIG. 111 (a), an image with the princess facing right (animation mode 1, initial state) and an image with the princess facing the front (animation mode 2) , And an image with the princess facing left (animation mode 3) are sequentially displayed repeatedly. In the animation of the hold icon of the watchdog character shown in FIG. 111 (b), an image in which the watchmaker is facing right (animation mode 1, initial state), and an image in which the watchmaster is facing front (animation mode 2) The image in which the number is facing left (animation mode 3) and the image in which the number is facing front (animation mode 2) are repeatedly displayed in sequence. The animation shown in FIG. 111 (a) and the animation shown in FIG. 111 (b) are different in character and one-cycle scale, but have many identical portions (common portions) in the animation mode.

  In the animation of the reserved icon of the princess character shown in FIG. 112 (a), an image with the princess facing the front (animation mode 2, initial state) and an image with the princess facing the left (animation mode 3) An image with the princess facing front (animation mode 2), an image with the princess facing left (animation mode 3), and an image with the princess facing right (animation mode 1) Displayed sequentially and repeatedly. In the animation of the holding icon of the watchdog character shown in FIG. 112 (b), an image in which the watchmaker is facing front (animation mode 2, initial state), and an image in which the watchmaster is facing left (animation mode 3) The image with the number length facing left (animation mode 1) and the image with the number length facing left (animation mode 3) are sequentially displayed repeatedly. The animation shown in FIG. 112 (a) and the animation shown in FIG. 112 (b) are different in character and scale of one cycle, but have the same part (common part) of the animation mode. For example, both animations include both images with each character facing right, but the number of frames from the initial state is different (fifth frame for the princess character animation and third frame for the animation of the Bancho character).

  113 and 114 show an example of the hold display in time series. At the time point shown in FIG. 113 (a), it is assumed that there is one holding period during the variable period of the special figure variable game. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: princess) is displayed, and a standby animation (repeating four frames of animation modes 1, 2, 3, 2) is executed. At this time, the hold icon 901 is in the animation state 1 (rightward) in the initial state. At the time shown in FIG. 113 (b) thereafter, the hold icon 901 is in animation mode 2 (front-facing).

  It is assumed that the suspension is increased by one at the time shown in FIG. In the second area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 902 (display mode: number length) is newly displayed, and a standby animation (repeating four frames of animation modes 1, 2, 3, and 2) is executed. At this time, the hold icon 901 is in the animation mode 3 (leftward). The hold icon 902 is in the initial animation mode 1 (rightward), and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901.

  At the time shown in FIG. 113 (d), the hold icon 901 is in animation mode 2 (front-facing). The hold icon 902 is in animation mode 2 (front-facing), and is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901.

  At the time shown in FIG. 114 (a), the hold icon 901 is in the animation state 1 (rightward) in the initial state. At this point, the synchronization control is executed based on the fact that the hold icon 901 is in the initial animation mode 1, and the animation mode of the subsequent hold icon 902 is aligned with the animation mode of the previous hold icon 901. Thereby, the animation mode of the hold icon 902 becomes the animation mode 1 (rightward) in the initial state. As a result, even at this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 have the same animation mode.

  At the time shown in FIG. 114 (b) thereafter, the hold icon 901 is in animation mode 2 (front-facing). The hold icon 902 is in animation mode 2 (front-facing), and is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901.

  FIG. 115 shows another example of the hold display in time series. At the time shown in FIG. 115 (a), it is assumed that there is two suspensions during the variation period of the special figure variable game. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, a fluctuation icon 801 (display mode: white (default)) corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed. In the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: princess) and a hold icon 902 (display mode: Bancho) are displayed, and standby animations are respectively executed. At this time, the hold icon 901 is in animation mode 2 (front-facing). The hold icon 902 is an animation mode 2 (front-facing) and is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901.

  At the time shown in FIG. 115 (b) thereafter, the hold icon 901 is in animation mode 3 (leftward). The hold icon 902 becomes the animation mode 3 (leftward), and is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901.

  It is assumed that the display mode of the change icon 801 changes from the default “white” to “thousand boxes” at the time shown in FIG. The change in the display mode may be accompanied by a predetermined change animation. In this example, with the change in the display mode of the variation icon 801, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned with the animation mode 1 (rightward) in which each character faces the variation icon 801 side.

  FIG. 116 shows a modification of the types of special drawings, decorative symbols, and ordinary drawings in the present exemplary embodiment. In FIG. 116 (a), ten types of special drawings "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J" are shown as the stop symbol patterns of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. "Special Figure A" is a 15R special jackpot symbol, "Special Figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol, "Special Figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol (suddenly probable), and "Special Figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol (Special figure E) is a 2R big hit symbol (hidden probability change), "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit symbol (sudden normal), and "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, “Special figure I” is the first off symbol, and “Special figure J” is the second off symbol.

  When notifying 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A" or 15R jackpot of "Special Figure B", as shown in FIG. 116 (b), three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7”). -Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  2R big hit called "special figure E" hidden probability change, 2R big hit suddenly called "special figure F", or first special hit of "special figure G", second of "special figure H" When notifying the small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. When notifying 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “Special Figure C” or 2R jackpot called “Short Time Reduction” of “Special Figure D”, “Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. To do. When notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 116B are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. .

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, when a predetermined hold storage condition is established, holds storage means (for example, RAM 308, special figure 1 random number value) that can store at least predetermined start information as hold. A storage area, a special figure 2 random value storage area, and a hold display means capable of displaying at least one hold icon corresponding to the one hold when the predetermined hold display condition is satisfied (for example, a decorative symbol display) Device 208, hold icon display area 900, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500), and the hold display means animates the hold icon (for example, hold icon standby animation, increase animation) , Moving animation, erasing animation, moving animation between hold and change icons) To.

  According to this configuration, the entertainment of the game can be improved by displaying the hold icon as an animation.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, the hold display means can display a plurality of the hold icons by animation. For example, all of the plurality of displayed hold icons may be displayed with animation, or only some of the plurality of displayed hold icons may be displayed with animation.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, when a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, a determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure (for example, special drawing 2 related lottery processing (step S229), special figure 1 related It further has a lottery process (step S231)).

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, when a predetermined symbol variation condition is satisfied, at least a symbol variation stop display is executed to stop and display a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure after performing symbol variation. It further has a possible symbol display means (for example, special symbol display device 212, special symbol 2 display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208).

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present exemplary embodiment, main control means (for example, the main control unit 300) that performs control related to the progress of the game, and sub-control that performs control related to the effect based on the control command transmitted from the main control means. Means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-control unit 500), and the hold display means can display the hold icon based on the control of the sub-control means. To do.

  Moreover, in this example form, the timing which arranges the animation aspect of a several pending | holding icon may be the start timing of a special figure variable game. Here, the start timing of the special figure variable game may be a timing at which the special figure variable display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, or It may be the timing at which the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, when the variation start timing of each decorative symbol does not match in each of the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, it may be the first variation start timing of the three decorative symbols. It may be the change start timing of the third symbol, or may be the change start timing of the third symbol. Or you may make it align the animation aspect of a several hold | maintained icon only at the change start timing of the first symbol among three decoration symbols.

  In the present exemplary embodiment or other exemplary embodiments, the animation of the hold icon or the variable icon is one in which at least one of the shape, pattern, color, transparency, size, position, rotation angle, etc. of the icon changes over time. Contains. That is, the animation of the hold icon or the change icon may be one in which the shape of the icon changes, or one in which the shape does not change. For example, only the color may change without changing the shape of the icon.

  In the present exemplary embodiment or other exemplary embodiments, the various animations for the hold icon and the change icon may be a sprite or a movie.

  The exemplary embodiments and various examples described above can be implemented in combination with each other.

  In this explanation, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a game machine, but the game machine is not limited to this. You may apply to an enclosure-type game machine etc.

The game table according to the above exemplary embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.
(Appendix 1)
When a predetermined hold storage condition is satisfied, hold storage means capable of storing at least predetermined start information as a hold,
When a predetermined hold display condition is established, hold display means capable of displaying at least one hold icon corresponding to one hold; and
When a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the determination result determination unit capable of executing at least the determination of success / failure;
When a predetermined symbol variation condition is established, after performing symbol variation, a symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation stop display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination;
When a predetermined notice condition is satisfied, a notice means capable of executing at least the prescribed notice;
A game machine equipped with
The notice means is capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation icon as the notice when the predetermined notice condition is satisfied,
The notice means is capable of displaying the variation icon after the symbol variation is started,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the variation icon has a mode related to the hold icon.
(Appendix 2)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
A holding icon storage means capable of storing one or a plurality of holding icons having different modes;
Fluctuation icon storage means capable of storing one or a plurality of fluctuation icons having different modes;
When the first notice condition is met, the notice condition is met,
Even when the second notice condition different from the first notice condition is established, the notice condition is established,
When the first notice condition is satisfied, the notice means determines a predetermined form from the change icons stored in the change icon storage means as the notice, and the change icon is used in the form. Can be displayed at least,
When the second notice condition is satisfied, the notice means determines a predetermined form from the hold icons stored in the hold icon storage means as the notice, and the hold icon is used in the form. Can be displayed at least,
The variation icon storage means stores at least a common variation icon,
The game table, wherein the hold icon storage means stores at least a common hold icon in the same mode as the common variation icon.
(Appendix 3)
In the game stand described in Appendix 2,
The gaming table, wherein the variation icon storage means stores at least a unique variation icon having a different form from the common variation icon.
(Appendix 4)
In the game stand described in Appendix 3,
The hold icon storage means stores at least a unique hold icon in a mode different from the common variation icon and the unique variation icon,
The game table, wherein the variation icon storage means stores a larger number of the unique variation icons than the number of the unique reservation icons stored in the reservation icon storage means.
(Appendix 5)
When a predetermined hold storage condition is satisfied, hold storage means capable of storing at least predetermined start information as a hold,
When a predetermined hold display condition is established, hold display means capable of displaying at least one hold icon corresponding to one hold; and
When a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the determination result determination unit capable of executing at least the determination of success / failure;
When a predetermined symbol variation condition is established, after performing symbol variation, a symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation stop display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination;
If a predetermined notice condition is satisfied, a notice means capable of at least starting the prescribed notice,
A game machine equipped with
The notice means is capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation icon as the notice when the predetermined notice condition is satisfied,
The notice means is capable of displaying the variation icon after the symbol variation is started,
The notice means is capable of at least stopping the display of the change icon when a predetermined notice stop condition is satisfied after the change icon is displayed,
When the first notice stop condition is satisfied, the predetermined notice stop condition is satisfied,
Even when a second notice stop condition different from the first notice stop condition is satisfied, the predetermined notice stop condition is satisfied,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the variation icon has a mode related to the hold icon.
(Appendix 6)
In the game stand described in Appendix 5,
The first notice cancellation condition is established during a predetermined symbol variation display period,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second notice stop condition is satisfied after the first notice stop condition is satisfied during the predetermined symbol variation display period.
(Appendix 7)
In the game stand according to appendix 5 or 6,
The second notice stop condition is established with a first probability when the symbol display unit executes a specific symbol variation display in which the symbol mode corresponding to the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. ,
The second notice stop condition is the first probability when the symbol display unit executes symbol variation display that stops and displays a symbol aspect corresponding to a result determination result different from the specific result determination result. Is established with a second probability different from
The game machine characterized in that the first probability is higher than the second probability.
(Appendix 8)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 5 to 7,
When the first notice stop condition is satisfied, the notice means stops the display of the fluctuation icon in the first mode.
The game machine is characterized in that the notice means stops the display of the variable icon in a second mode different from the first mode when the second notice stop condition is satisfied. .
(Appendix 9)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 5 to 8,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the notice means is capable of at least resuming the display of the change icon when a predetermined notice resumption condition is satisfied after the display of the change icon is stopped.
(Appendix 10)
When a predetermined hold storage condition is satisfied, hold storage means capable of storing at least predetermined start information as a hold,
When a predetermined hold display condition is established, hold display means capable of displaying at least one hold icon corresponding to one hold; and
When a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the determination result determination unit capable of executing at least the determination of success / failure;
When a predetermined symbol variation condition is established, after performing symbol variation, a symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation stop display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination;
When a predetermined notice condition is satisfied, a notice means capable of executing at least the prescribed notice;
A game machine equipped with
The notice means is capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation icon as the notice,
The notice means is capable of displaying the variation icon after the symbol variation is started,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the variation icon has a mode related to the hold icon.
(Appendix 11)
In the game stand described in Appendix 10,
A holding icon storage means capable of storing one or a plurality of holding icons having different modes;
Fluctuation icon storage means capable of storing one or a plurality of fluctuation icons having different modes;
When the first notice condition is met, the notice condition is met,
Even when the second notice condition different from the first notice condition is established, the notice condition is established,
When the first notice condition is satisfied, the notice means determines a predetermined form from the change icons stored in the change icon storage means as the notice, and the change icon is used in the form. Can be displayed at least,
When the second notice condition is satisfied, the notice means determines a predetermined form from the hold icons stored in the hold icon storage means as the notice, and the hold icon is used in the form. Can be displayed at least,
The variation icon storage means stores at least a common variation icon,
The game table, wherein the hold icon storage means stores at least a common hold icon in the same mode as the common variation icon.
(Appendix 12)
In the game stand described in Appendix 11,
The gaming table, wherein the variation icon storage means stores at least a unique variation icon having a different form from the common variation icon.
(Appendix 13)
In the game stand described in Appendix 12,
The hold icon storage means stores at least a unique hold icon in a mode different from the common variation icon and the unique variation icon,
The game table, wherein the variation icon storage means stores a larger number of the unique variation icons than the number of the unique reservation icons stored in the reservation icon storage means.

  According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to realize a gaming machine that can effectively improve the interest of the player by executing a highly continuous notice.

Subsequently, although there is a description overlapping with that described above, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine # 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail.
[Embodiment 1]
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine # 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine # 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine # 100 includes an outer frame # 102, a main body # 104, a front frame door # 106, a door with a ball storage tray # 108, a launcher # 110, and a game board # 200 on its front side (game Prepare for the person).

  The outer frame # 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body # 104 is a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is provided inside the outer frame # 102, has a locking function, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame # 102 via the hinge portion # 112. It is a door member. The main body # 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion # 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) where the pachinko machine # 100 is installed can open and close the main body # 104, and a main body opening sensor # 1041 for detecting that the main body # 104 is opened is provided. Yes.

  The front frame door # 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body # 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine # 100 via a hinge portion # 112 so as to be openable and closable with a locking function, and is configured in a frame shape. Thus, the door member has an opening # 116 on the inside. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door # 106, and a front frame door sensor # 1061 for detecting that the front frame door # 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door # 106 is provided with a transparent plate member # 118 made of glass or resin at the opening # 116, and a speaker # 120 and a frame lamp # 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area # 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door # 106 and the front surface of the game board # 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door with ball storage tray # 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body # 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine # 100 so as to be locked and openable. This door with ball storage tray # 108 is opened by pressing open lever # 1081, which can be operated with front frame door # 106 open. Further, a door sensor with ball storage tray # 1082 for detecting that the door with ball storage tray # 108 is opened is also provided. The door # 108 with a ball storage tray is an upper plate in which a plurality of game balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as “balls”) can be stored and a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device # 110 is provided. # 126, a lower plate # 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate # 126, and a ball removal that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate # 126 to the lower plate # 128 by the player's operation Button # 130, a ball discharge lever # 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate # 128 by the player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a launching device # by the player's operation 110, a ball launch handle # 134 that launches the game ball guided to 110 into the game area # 124 of the game board, and a chance button that changes the effect mode of various effect devices # 206 (see FIG. 118) by the player's operation. # 136 , A chance button lamp # 138 that is built in the chance button # 136 and emits the chance button # 136, and a ball lending operation button # 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the amusement store. And a return operation button # 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display unit # 144 for displaying the player's balance and the card unit status. In addition, the pachinko machine # 100 shown in FIG. 117 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan # 128 is filled with game balls.

  The launching device # 110 is attached below the main body # 104, and the launching rod # 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle # 134 is operated by the player, and the game ball hits the tip of the launching kit # 146. Launching rod # 148. While the ball launching handle # 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device # 110 can play the game ball every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. Fire towards # 124.

  The game board # 200 has a game area # 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body # 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space # 114 of the main body # 104. The game area # 124 can be observed from the opening # 116 after the game board # 200 is mounted on the main body # 104. In FIG. 117, the specific configuration of the game area # 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 118 is an external view of the pachinko machine # 100 of FIG. 117 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine # 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank # 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank # 150 located below the ball tank # 150. A tank rail # 154 is provided for guiding a ball that has passed through a communication hole formed at the bottom of 150 and dropped to the dispensing device # 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device # 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device # 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail # 154 when mounted in a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that has passed through the tank rail # 154 and has flowed into the payout device # 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. By doing so, the game balls that have stayed temporarily are sent one by one downward to the payout device # 152. That is, the payout device # 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit # 600. The game balls that have passed through the payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate # 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine # 100. Based on the establishment of a predetermined grant condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout apparatus # 152 in the figure, there are a main board case # 158 and a main control section # 300 that house a main board # 156 that constitutes a main control section # 300 (see FIG. 120) that performs control processing of the entire game. A first sub-board case # 162 that houses a first sub-board # 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit # 400 (see FIG. 120) that performs a control process related to an effect based on the generated processing information, and a first sub-control unit A second sub-board case # 166 that houses a second sub-board # 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit # 500 (see FIG. 120) that performs a control process related to an effect based on the processing information generated by # 400, a game ball The payout board # 170 having an error release switch # 168 that constitutes a payout control unit # 600 (see FIG. 120) that performs control processing related to the payout of the game and that releases an error by the operation of a game shop clerk is stored. The payout board case # 172, the launch board case # 176 that houses the launch board # 174 that constitutes the launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 120) that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball, and supplies power to various electrical gaming machines The power supply management unit 660 (see FIG. 120), and the power supply switch # 178 for turning on / off the power by the operation of the game shop clerk and the RAM clear signal that is operated when the power is turned on to output the RAM clear signal to the main control unit # 300 A power board case # 184 that houses a power board # 182 provided with a switch # 180, and a CR interface # 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller # 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 119 is a schematic front view of the game board # 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board # 200, an outer rail # 202 and an inner rail # 204 are arranged, and a game area # 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device # 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area # 124. The effect device # 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device # 208 at substantially the center thereof, and around the normal symbol display device # 210, the first special symbol display device # 212, and the second special symbol display device. # 214, a normal symbol hold lamp # 216, a first special symbol hold lamp # 218, a second special symbol hold lamp # 220, and a high-probability medium lamp # 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device # 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body # 224, and details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device # 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device # 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device # 208 is divided into four symbol display regions # 208a, a left symbol display region # 208a, a middle symbol display region # 208b, a right symbol display region # 208c, and an effect display region # 208d. The middle symbol display area # 208b and the right symbol display area # 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area # 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas # 208a, # 208b, # 208c, and # 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device # 208. Although the liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device # 208, it may be configured to display various effects and various game information without using the liquid crystal display device. Other display devices including a device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device # 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device # 212 and the second special figure display device # 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. These first special figure display device # 212 and second special figure display device # 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device # 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device # 212 or the second special symbol display device # 214 in an enhanced form. The decorative symbol display device # 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp # 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (general figure variable games to be described later in detail) that are on hold. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4).

  The first special figure hold lamp # 218 and the second special figure hold lamp # 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (detailed variable games described later in detail) being held, In the present embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold. In other words, this is equivalent to reserving execution of the determination based on the start information.

  The high-probability lamp # 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-accuracy lamp # 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. ing. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In this specification, the term “control state” is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine # 100). However, the term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, there are a general winning opening # 226, a general opening start # 228, a first special drawing starting opening # 230, a second special drawing starting opening # 232, and a variable winning opening around the effect device # 206. # 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes # 226 are arranged on the game board # 200, and when a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a winning in the general winning holes # 226 (general winning holes). 118), the payout device # 152 shown in FIG. 118 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate # 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate # 126, and with these configurations, the winning balls are paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that entered the general winning opening # 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine # 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The usual start port # 228 is configured by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area # 124. In this embodiment, the game board # One is arranged on the left side of 200. Unlike the ball that has entered the general prize opening # 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port # 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the normal map start port # 228, the pachinko machine # 100 starts the general map variable game by the general map display device # 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port # 230 is arranged at the center of the game board # 200. This first special figure starting port # 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port # 230, the payout device # 152 shown in FIG. 118 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are used as prize balls. While discharging to the top plate # 126, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device # 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the first special figure starting port # 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine # 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port # 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region where the size of the first special diagram starting port # 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port # 232 is disposed below the general view start port # 228. That is, the second special figure starting port # 232 is provided on the right side of the game board # 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port # 232, a pair of blade members # 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. The pair of blade members # 2321 and the second special figure starting port # 232 are combined. This corresponds to the variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip. The pair of blade members # 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port # 232. That is, when the pair of blade members # 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port # 232, and the state in which the pair of blade members # 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device # 210 wins and displays the symbol stopped, the pair of blade members # 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port It is possible to enter a ball into # 232 (easy winning state), and an open state where the pair of blade members # 2321 is open is an easy winning state. That is, the second special figure starting port # 232 has an entrance (game ball entrance) of a small size (corresponding to the first size) and a large size (corresponding to the second size). A variable start area in which the ease of entry of a game ball, which changes from either size to the other size, is equivalent to an example of a second start area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port # 230. In a state where the pair of blade members # 2321 are opened, the game balls that have entered the game area # 124 are more variable start areas than the game balls that enter the first special figure start port # 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the second special figure starting port # 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the entrance size of the first special figure starting port # 230 or smaller than the entrance size of the first special figure starting port # 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port # 232, the payout device # 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate # 126. And the special figure changing game by the second special figure display device # 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port # 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine # 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening # 234 is arranged below the center of the game board # 200. The variable winning opening # 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member # 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening # 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member # 2341 changes its state from any one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state at the variable winning opening # 234 of the present embodiment, the door member # 2341 is a game of the game board # 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface of the person. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable prize opening # 234 of the present embodiment is on the player side until the door member # 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board # 200. It is a stationary state that has been rotated. The variable winning opening # 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game, which will be described later, is started. When the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening may be any one that allows a game ball to be won when the game ball passes or enters, and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device # 212 or the second special figure display device # 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member # 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening # 234, the payout device # 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate # 126 as prize balls. . Note that the ball that entered the variable prize opening # 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine # 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members # 236 and game nails # 238 called windmills are disposed in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and the lowermost part of the inner rail # 204 Is provided with an out port # 240 for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine # 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate # 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine # 100, the launch motor is driven with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle # 134, and passes through the outer rail # 202 and the inner rail # 204 by the launcher # 146 and the launcher # 148. And launch into game area # 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area # 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the hitting direction changing member # 236, the game nail # 238, etc., and the winning hole (general winning hole # 226, variable winning hole #) 234) and the start opening (first special figure start opening # 230, second special figure start opening # 232), or without winning any of the winning openings and start openings, or ordinary start start opening # 228 Just pass through to reach Out Exit # 240.

<Directing device # 206>
Next, the rendering device # 206 of the pachinko machine # 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device # 206, a warp device # 242 and a stage # 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body # 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. Has been established. In addition, a decorative symbol display device # 208 and a shielding device # 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device # 206. That is, in the effect device # 206, the decorative symbol display device # 208 and the shielding device # 246 are located behind the warp device # 242, the stage # 244, and the effect movable body # 224.

  Warp device # 242 discharges the game ball that has entered warp inlet # 242a provided at the upper left of effect device # 206, to stage # 244 below the front surface of effect device # 206, from warp outlet # 242b.

  Stage # 244 can roll a ball discharged from warp exit # 242b or a ball that has been picked up by game nail # 238 or the like. A special route # 244a that makes it easy to enter the mouth # 230 is provided.

  In this embodiment, the production movable body # 224 includes an upper arm portion # 224a and a forearm portion # 224b simulating the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm # 224b at the position of the motor and elbow is provided. The effect movable body # 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device # 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device # 246 includes a latticed left door # 246a and right door # 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device # 208 and the front stage # 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door # 246a and the right door # 246b, respectively. That is, left door # 246a and right door # 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor drives the pulley. In the state where the left door # 246a and the right door # 246b are closed, the shielding device # 246 overlaps the respective inner end portions and shields the player so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device # 208. In the state where the left door # 246a and the right door # 246b are opened, the inner end portions thereof slightly overlap the outer end portions of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device # 208. All are visible. Further, the left door # 246a and the right door # 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively. For example, one of the decorative symbols can be identified so that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Only the part can be shielded. In addition, the left door # 246a and the right door # 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device # 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, and the shoji portion of the lattice hole is a semi-transparent lens body. The display by the decorative pattern display device # 208 on the back may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely closed (shielded), and the decorative pattern display device # 208 on the rear is displayed. You may make it completely invisible.

  117, the decorative lamps such as the speaker # 120 and the frame lamp # 122, the decorative symbol display device # 208, the effect movable body # 224, and the shielding device # 246 shown in FIG. 119 correspond to the effect means. The decorative symbol display device # 208 corresponds to an example of decorative symbol display means.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine # 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine # 100 can be broadly classified according to a main control unit # 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit # 300. The first sub-control unit # 400 that mainly controls the production, the second sub-control unit # 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit # 400, and the main control unit # 300 Payout control unit # 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls in response to a command transmitted by the player, a launch control unit 630 that performs launch control of game balls, and a power source that controls power supplied to the pachinko machine # 100 And a management unit 660. In the present embodiment, the main control unit # 300, the first sub control unit # 400, and the second sub control unit # 500 are composed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (# 300, # 400). , # 500) may be composed of a common circuit board, and the first sub-control unit # 400 and the second sub-control unit # 500 are different from the circuit board of the main control unit # 300. It may be composed of one common circuit board. Therefore, each of the main control unit # 300, the first sub control unit # 400, and the second sub control unit # 500 has predetermined control means (for example, main control means (# 300), first sub control means (# 400), Second sub-control means (# 500)), or a combination of these three control units (# 300, # 400, # 500) can be regarded as a predetermined control means, A combination of the first sub-control unit # 400 and the second sub-control unit # 500 may be regarded as a predetermined control unit (for example, a sub-control unit).

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit # 300 of the pachinko machine # 100 will be described.

  The main control unit # 300 includes a basic circuit # 302 that controls the entire main control unit # 300. The basic circuit # 302 includes a CPU # 304 and a ROM for storing control programs and various data. # 306, RAM # 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O # 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer # 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, WDT # 314 is installed to monitor program processing abnormalities. Note that other storage devices may be used for ROM # 306 and RAM # 308, and this is the same for first sub-control unit # 400, which will be described later. The CPU # 304 of the basic circuit # 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator # 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit # 302 includes a random number generation circuit # 318 (three random number generation circuits included in this circuit) for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator # 316a is received. ), The main body opening sensor # 1041, the front frame door sensor # 1061, the door sensor with ball storage tray # 1082, and the lower tray # 128 shown in FIG. 117 are filled with game balls. Receiving signals output by various sensors # 320 including a ball full sensor for detecting the bottom plate, a ball detecting sensor provided in each start opening, winning opening entrance and variable winning opening, A sensor circuit # 322 for outputting a comparison result with the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit # 318 and the basic circuit # 302, a first special figure display device # 212, and a second special figure display device # 214. A drive circuit # 324 for performing display control, a drive circuit # 326 for performing display control of the universal map display device # 210, and various status display units # 328 (for example, the universal map hold lamp # 216, the first special display Drive circuit # 330 for performing display control of the figure holding lamp # 218, the second special figure holding lamp # 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp # 222, etc.), the second special figure starting port # 232, and the variable winning port # 234 A drive circuit # 334 for controlling various solenoids # 332 for opening and closing the etc. is connected.

  The main control unit # 300, more precisely, the basic circuit # 302 of the main control unit # 300 is a game control unit that performs game control, and includes a later-described determination unit, start information prefetching unit, and advance determination unit. And control the driving (lighting and extinguishing operation) of the first special figure holding lamp # 218 and the second special figure holding lamp # 220.

  The random value generation circuit # 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit # 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit # 318 can be roughly classified into two types of methods: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit # 318 obtains an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors # 320 to the sensor circuit # 322. The random number generation circuit # 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. Use.

  When the ball detection sensor among the various sensors # 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port # 230, the sensor circuit # 322 disturbs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected. It outputs to the numerical value generation circuit # 318. Receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit # 318 latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port # 230, and the latched value is built in the random value generation circuit # 318. Is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port # 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit # 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting port # 232, the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port # 232 is used. The value at that timing is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port # 232, which is incorporated in the random value generation circuit # 318. Further, when the random value generation circuit # 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won a prize at the general start port # 228, similarly, the random number generation circuit # 318 at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the general start port # 228. The value is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the usual start port # 228, which is incorporated in the random value generation circuit # 318.

  In addition, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a general winning opening # 226, a first special figure starting opening # 230, a second special figure starting opening # 232, a variable winning opening # 234, etc. Examples include a sensor that detects a sphere that has won a winning opening, and a sensor that detects a sphere that passes through a normal start port # 228.

  Further, an information output circuit # 336 is connected to the basic circuit # 302, and the main control unit # 300 inputs information provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit # 336. Game information of the pachinko machine # 100 (for example, information indicating a control state) is output to the circuit # 350.

  The main control unit # 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit # 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit # 300. When the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit # 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit # 338 is an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit. Equivalent to.

  In addition, the main control unit # 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) # 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input from the output circuit # 340, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit # 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit # 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit # 600. The first sub-control unit # 400 and the payout control unit # 600 can communicate with each other. The information communication between the main control unit # 300, the first sub control unit # 400, and the payout control unit # 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit # 300 is the first sub control unit # 400 and the payout control unit. It is configured so that a command signal can be transmitted to # 600, but a command signal etc. cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit # 400 and the payout control unit # 600 to the main control unit # 300. ing.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit # 400 of the pachinko machine # 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit # 400 includes a basic circuit # 402 that mainly controls the first sub-control unit # 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit # 300. The basic circuit # 402 Includes CPU # 404, RAM # 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O # 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency # 412 is installed. The CPU # 404 of the basic circuit # 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator # 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit # 402 is connected to a ROM # 406 for storing a control program and various effects data. The ROM # 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit # 402 includes a sound source IC # 416 for controlling the speaker # 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit # 420 for controlling various lamps # 418, and an effect movable body # 224. A drive circuit # 422 for performing drive control, an effect movable body sensor # 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body # 224, and a chance button detection sensor # 426 that detects pressing of the chance button # 136 shown in FIG. And a sensor circuit # 428 that outputs detection signals from the production movable body sensor # 424 and the chance button detection sensor # 426 to the basic circuit # 402.

  Further, a second sub-control unit # 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) # 208 and the shielding device # 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit # 400.

  The sub-control unit that combines the first sub-control unit # 400 and the second sub-control unit # 500 receives the command signal from the main control unit # 300 that is the game control unit, and based on the received command signal, Controls the production means such as the symbol display device # 208.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>
Next, the payout control unit # 600, the launch control unit # 630, and the power management unit # 660 of the pachinko machine # 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit # 600 controls the payout motor # 602 of the payout device # 152 shown in FIG. 118 based on signals such as commands mainly transmitted by the main control unit # 300, and the control output by the payout sensor # 604. Based on the signal, whether or not the payout of the winning ball or the rental ball is completed is detected, and communication with a card unit # 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine # 100 is performed via the interface unit # 606. Do.

  The launch control unit # 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit # 600 to instruct to permit or stop the launch, and a ball launch handle by the player output from a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle # 134. Based on the control signal instructing the firing intensity corresponding to the operation amount of # 134, control of firing motor # 632 for driving firing rod # 146 and firing rod # 148 shown in FIG. The ball feeding device # 634 for supplying the ball to # 110 is controlled.

  The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine # 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit # 600 and the second sub-control unit # 500. Main control unit # 300, first sub control unit # 400, and firing control unit 630 receive a predetermined voltage from payout control unit # 600. The power management unit # 660 supplies power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM # 308 of the main control unit # 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. A power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided. A predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit # 660 to the payout control unit # 600 and the second sub control unit # 500, and the main control unit # 300, the first sub control unit # 400, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit # 600. A predetermined voltage may be supplied to the unit # 630, or a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  In an island facility provided at a game machine installation sales store, a 100V AC power source is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine # 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power management unit 660 of the main control unit # 300. Although not shown in FIG. 120, the main control unit # 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage ( 5V) is supplied to the CPU # 304 provided in the basic circuit # 302 of the main control unit # 300. The direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power management unit # 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit # 338 and the start signal output circuit # 340 of the main control unit # 300. The voltage monitoring circuit # 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port # 310 of the basic circuit # 302 when the voltage value of the supply current of # 12V falls below a predetermined value (9v in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit # 338 is monitoring the voltage value of the power line connecting the power management unit # 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit # 338 through which a 12V DC current flows, and this power line is a predetermined power source. It corresponds to an example of a line. Note that the low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU # 304. The power management unit # 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Further, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5 V) may be supplied to the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit # 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power management unit # 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU # 304 can operate. Further, when WDT # 314 times out, a reset signal is output from WDT # 314 to CPU # 304. When WDT # 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU # 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop due to a lightning strike or an illegal act. . In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT # 3141. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit # 340 and the reset signal from the WDT # 3141 are input to the CPU # 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit # 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT # 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is cut off and immediately restored, that is, when the power supply is automatically restored without turning on the power switch # 178, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT # 3141 times out, and the main control unit # In 300, a reset process is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit # 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when executing the system reset operation, the values of the core of CPU # 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, the main process of the main control unit # 300, which will be described later, is executed, and the game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of CPU # 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit # 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of a main control unit # 300, which will be described later, is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, referring to FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (c), the first special symbol display device # 212, the second special symbol display device # 214, the decorative symbol display device # 208, and the normal symbol display device of the pachinko machine # 100. The types of special maps and general maps that are stopped and displayed by # 210 will be described.

  FIG. 121 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode (first symbol mode) of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port # 230, and the second special figure start port # 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device # 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. (Figure change game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device # 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment "variable display of special figure 2". (Special map variable game) is performed. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device # 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When time elapses, the second special symbol display device # 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special symbol 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays in which the stop symbol form of FIG. 1 or 2 is stopped after starting the “figure display of special figure 1 or 2” may be referred to as a special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 121 (a), ten types of special drawings from “special drawing A” to “special drawing J” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 121 (a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, six types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F") are prepared as the stop pattern modes of special figures. “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure C” is a 2R special jackpot symbol, which is called sudden change. When these symbols (special drawings A and C) are stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol, which is called a sudden reduction. When the special figure B or the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and “Special figure F” is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal. When the special figure E is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. When the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the present embodiment, the number of operations of the variable prize opening # 234 shown in FIG. 119 is represented, and the 15th round is one or more opening / closing operations of the variable prize opening # 234 (one operation). Means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). In the big hit game, this specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (# 15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. In the pachinko machine # 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit or the short time big hit is the difference in the probability of winning the big hit (special big hit or short time big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In this embodiment, during the big hit game, the special figure shifts to a low probability state, and if the special figure A, special figure C, and special figure E are won, the special figure will be displayed until the next big hit after the big hit game ends. A high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the special figure B, special figure D, and special figure F are won, the special figure low probability state remains even after the big hit game ends. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of a first probability control state. In addition, a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game is finished is sometimes referred to as a special figure probability change. Is an example of a second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state. In this specification, the term “control state” is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine # 100). However, the term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit # 300, and the main control unit # 300 corresponds to an example of a probability control state transition unit.

  In addition, if the special drawings A to D are won, all of them shift to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state) after the big hit game ends. The electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Say. This electric support state is one of the control states prepared for this pachinko machine # 100, and may be referred to as a time-short state. That is, the electric support state (time-short state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is also prepared in the RAM # 308 of the main control unit # 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/101 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/101 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 12 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members # 2321 of the second special figure starting port # 232 tends to be longer (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the pair of blade members # 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, a pair of blade members # 2321 that can be opened only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port # 228, open three times in the electric support state (for example, open for 1.7 seconds) 3 times and the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port # 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the power is supported during the big hit game, a large number of games are placed in the second special figure starting port # 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the probability of entering the second special figure starting port # 232 increases, Good. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port # 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, in the second special figure starting port # 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The second special figure starting port # 232 has a large size in the electric support state over a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when special figure A and special figure C are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) is maintained until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is completed. When the special figure B and the special figure D are stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure variable game is performed 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is finished, and the non-electric support state is displayed at the 101st time. Transition to (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without special support (special figure E, special figure F) is won, it does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. In the non-electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port # 232 is kept small. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port # 232 is large, and the entry rate of game balls is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure start port # 232, which is the variable start area, at the first approach rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball is the second special figure. The vehicle enters the start port # 232 at a second approach rate that is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as small hit symbols in addition to the big hit symbol. The special figure G shown in FIG. 121 (a) is a first small hit symbol, and the special figure H is a second small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member # 2341 of the variable prize opening # 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member # 2341 is kept open for a maximum of 1.5 seconds per operation. . When opening the door member # 2341 at the small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If this happens, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door member # 2341 of the variable prize opening # 234 performs one or more opening / closing operations, and the player's advantage is relatively high. Therefore, the big hit gaming state corresponds to an example of a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In this embodiment, two types of lost symbols are also prepared. The special figure I shown in FIG. 121 (a) is the first loss symbol, and the special figure J is the second loss symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member # 2341 of the variable prize opening # 234 is not opened and closed, and the player's advantage is relatively low. In addition, a losing symbol other than “special symbol I” and “special symbol J” (for example, a third losing symbol or the like) may be prepared. In this embodiment, the losing symbol includes a plurality of types of symbols. It is a waste.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine # 100 of the present embodiment, the hit control state of the second advantage (the big hit control state and the small hit control state) where the player's advantage is high, and the second advantage Is provided with a low-priority loss control state of the first advantage, and the pachinko machine # 100 is in either a hit control state (second control state) or a loss control state (first control state). Take one control state. That is, after a symbol form corresponding to a specific success / failure determination result among the determination results is stopped and displayed, a gaming state (hit control state) advantageous to the player is started. The transition of these control states is also performed by the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300, and the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 corresponds to an example of a game control unit (control state transition unit. Although the door member # 2341 of the variable winning opening # 234 performs the opening / closing operation, it is almost impossible to expect a ball entering the variable winning opening # 234, so the small hit control state is set to the first advantage level. It can also be regarded as a control state (first control state).

  In the pachinko machine # 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as jackpot symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as jackpot symbol 2.

  The first special figure display device # 212 and the second special figure display device # 214 are notification means for informing the determination result (lottery result), and the symbol corresponding to the determination result after the start of the symbol variation. This corresponds to an example of symbol display means for performing symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the modes (special symbols A to J).

  FIG. 121 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port # 230 or the second special view start port # 232, that is, that a ball has entered the first special view start port # 230. Or on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port # 232, the left symbol display area # 208a of the decorative symbol display device # 208, the middle symbol display In each symbol display area of area # 208b and right symbol display area # 208c, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” → Perform “decorative display of decorative symbols” to switch the display in the order. In other words, the decorative symbol display device # 208 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner separately from the first special symbol display device # 212 and the second special symbol display device # 214. And the stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect) which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying “Special Figure A” that is a 15R special jackpot or “Special Figure C” that is a 2R special jackpot, the “decoration” in which three odd-numbered decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas # 208a to # 208c. The symbol combination 2 ”(for example,“ decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3 ”,“ decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5 ”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. When notifying “Special Figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot, “decoration pattern combination 1” (for example, “decoration 2—decoration” in which three same-numbered ornamental patterns are arranged in the symbol display areas # 208a to # 208c. “2-decoration 2”, “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying “special drawing E” that is a hidden probability change, “special drawing F” that is suddenly normal, “special drawing G”, and “special drawing H” that are small hits, the symbol display area # In 208a to # 208c, “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” such as “decoration 1—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. In the case of notification, “decorative symbol combination 4” such as “decoration 1 -decoration 3 -decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas # 208a to # 208c. Further, when notifying “special drawing I” and “special drawing J” which are lost, symbols other than “decorative symbol combination 1” to “decorative symbol combination 4” are displayed in symbol display areas # 208a to # 208c. A combination of decorative symbols (for example, loose eyes) is stopped and displayed. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol stop symbol pattern (for example, “decorative symbol combination 2”) after starting this “decorative symbol variable display” is displayed. Sometimes referred to as variable display.

  In addition, the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 121 (a)) of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 and one decorative symbol displayed in each of the symbol display areas # 208a to c in the middle left and right of the decorative symbol display device # 208. The stop symbol pattern (see FIG. 5B) is larger for the decorative symbol (see FIG. 9B).

  FIG. 121 (c) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (second symbol mode). In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general diagram B” which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that a sphere has passed through the general start port # 228, the general display display device # 210 is turned on in all seven segments and the central one Performs “variable display of ordinary map” (general diagram variable game) that repeats the lighting of the segment. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 121 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, a series of displays in which the stop symbol pattern of the usual figure is stopped and displayed after the "variable display of the usual figure" is started may be referred to as a usual figure variable display. The universal symbol display device # 210 corresponds to an example of auxiliary symbol notifying means.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by CPU # 304 of main control unit # 300 shown in FIG. 120 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM # 308 of the main control unit # 300 shown in FIG. 120 includes a big hit special figure 1 random number counter, a small hit special figure 1 random number counter, a lost special figure 1 random number counter, and a special figure 2 of these counters. Counter is provided. The RAM # 308 is also provided with a random number counter for generating the special figure fluctuation time first determination random number value and the special figure fluctuation time second determination random value. Further, in the RAM # 308, the number of holdings of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 winning random value, the special figure 1 for the big hit, the special figure 1 for the small hit, the special figure 1 random value for the loss, the special figure 1 random value for the lose The result of 1 determination of success / failure, the result of special figure 1 determination, the special figure 1 variation time, and the number of reservations, random number values, and result of special figure 2 are stored. Also, in RAM # 308, a special storage unit that is divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery) is prepared separately for Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. Has been. As will be described later, the special-purpose 1 winning random number value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure, as will be described later, One random number value for determining one variation time is set as one set, and the five random number values are stored for each area in a winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit # 300 shown in FIG. 120 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) # 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU # 304 of the basic circuit # 302 receiving this activation signal resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 122 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM # 306.

  In step S # 101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of CPU # 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of I / O # 310, various variables stored in RAM # 308 Initial setting, operation permission to WDT # 314, initial value setting, and the like. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT # 314.

  In step S # 103, the value of the counter of WDT # 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT # 314 is restarted.

  In step S # 105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit # 338 is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit # 300 via the second sub-control unit # 500. When the voltage value of the power source is less than a predetermined value (9v in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. If the low voltage signal is on (CPU # 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S # 103. If the low voltage signal is off (CPU # 304 detects that the power supply is cut off). If not, the process proceeds to step S # 107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S # 103, and step S # 105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. The

  In step S # 107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer # 312, a predetermined port of the I / O # 310 (for example, for testing) The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port and the output port to the first sub-control unit # 400, the setting for permitting writing to the RAM # 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S # 109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before the power interruption). If the state before the power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit # 302 of the main control unit # 300 is initialized). If the state is to be set), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S # 113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk of a game store or the like operates a RAM clear switch # 180 provided on the power supply board # 182 shown in FIG. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the basic circuit # 302 should be set to the initial state. Proceed to step S # 113. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM # 308 is read, and the power status information indicates information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S # 113 to set the basic circuit # 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, the RAM # A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (e.g., all areas) 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is It is determined whether the value is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S # 111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is When the value is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S # 113 to set the pachinko machine # 100 to an initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S # 113.

In step S # 111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM # 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM # 308 at the time of power interruption is read, and after setting the register again, the permission of interrupt is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU # 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine # 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S # 115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Also, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM # 308 mounted in the basic circuit # 302 in the main control unit # 300 shown in FIG. In step S # 111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power interruption, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit # 400 in step S # 233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit # 300, which will be described later. Is done.

In step S # 113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM # 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM # 308 of the main control unit # 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S # 113) of the main control unit # 300 has been performed. Like the power recovery command, the normal return command is a step in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit # 300. In S # 233, the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit # 400.

  In step S # 115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, 4 for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter, the big hit special figure random value counter, the small hit special figure random value counter, and the lose special figure random value counter, respectively. Three initial value generation random number counters and three random number counters for generating the normal timer random number value, the special figure 1 variation time determination random value, and the special figure 2 variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random numbers is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM # 308, and the acquired value is 1 Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit # 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S # 115 except during the timer interrupt process starting at predetermined intervals.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit # 300 shown in FIG. 120 includes a counter timer # 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The main control unit timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S # 201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU # 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S # 203, the WDT # 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment), so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a process abnormality), the WDT # 314. Are periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every about 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S # 205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors # 320 shown in FIG. 120 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of I / O # 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor # 320 in the RAM # 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in RAM # 308 in each sphere detection. This is read from the previous detection signal storage area provided for each sensor, and this information is stored in the detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in RAM # 308 in the previous detection signal storage area. Information about the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected (approximately 2 ms before) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM # 308, and this information is described above. Is stored in the previous detection signal storage area. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S # 205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. Then, it is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S # 205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM # 306 of the main control unit # 300 shown in FIG. 120 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). ing. In this step S # 205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past # 3 times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, this time If it coincides with the information) indicating that there is a detection signal, it will enter the general winning opening # 226, the variable winning opening # 234, the first special figure starting opening # 230, and the second special drawing starting opening # 232. Or, it is determined that the normal start port # 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning openings # 234, # 230 and these starting openings # 230, # 232, # 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor that detects the winning at the general winning opening # 226, the winning is made to the general winning opening # 226. If the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent processing is performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the general prize opening # 226. The ROM # 306 of the main control unit # 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). Yes. After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S # 207 and step S # 209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S # 115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit # 300. Random value, universal timer random number, big hit special figure 1 random value, small hit special figure 1 random value, lost special figure 1 random value, special figure 1 variable time determining random value, big hit special figure 2 random value The random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number for small hits, the special figure 2 random value for losing, and the random value for determining the special figure 2 variation time is updated. For example, if a numerical value range that can be taken as a normal winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM # 308, and the acquired value is 1 Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM # 308 is obtained by acquiring a value from a random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the acquired value. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value stored in (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the normal winning random number value, The initial value set this time is set to the above-described initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the normal winning random number and to determine that the random counter for generating the normal winning random value has made one round next. Remember it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM # 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random value related to the special figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value related to the special figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S # 211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit # 300 is updated.

  In step S # 213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol change / stop display on the normal symbol display device # 210, and the time for the symbol change / stop display on the first special symbol display device # 212. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for timing the time, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop display the symbol on the second special symbol display device # 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for measuring the opening time, the predetermined closing time, the predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S # 215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes # 234, # 230 and starting holes # 230, # 232, # 228 are won, RAM # 308 is provided for each winning hole or each starting hole. The value of the winning ball number storage area is read and 1 is added to set the original winning ball number storage area.

  In step S # 217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, if there is a winning at the first special figure starting port # 230 and the number of the special figure 1 variable games on hold is less than a predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment), a predetermined Get start information. That is, if the number of holdings is less than a predetermined number, special figure 1 winning random number value, big hit special figure 1 random value, small hit special figure 1 random value, lost special figure 1 random value, and special figure 1 variation time Get random number for decision. The special figure 1 winning random value acquired here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (a value of hardware random number + a value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the special figure 1 random number for big hit, the special figure 1 random value for small hit, the special figure 1 random value for lose, and the random value for determining special figure 1 variation time are obtained from a software random number counter provided in the RAM # 308. A value obtained by processing the derived software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The combination of the random number generation circuit # 318 shown in FIG. 120, the software random number counter provided in the RAM # 308, and the main control unit # 300 that performs random number processing generates and derives start information. This corresponds to an example of start information deriving means (first start information deriving means, second start information deriving means). The various random values (starting information) acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the holding storage unit of FIG. 1 provided in the RAM # 308. Remembered. The reserved storage unit of FIG. 1 has a predetermined first upper limit number (here, four) of start information acquired when a game ball enters the first special figure start port # 230 (first start area). This corresponds to the first starting information storage means capable of storing up to. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM # 308, and the values stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. The area may be used as the first start-up information storage unit, and the reserved storage unit and the temporary area in FIG. 1 may be used as the first start-up information storage unit. Further, the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 adds # 1 to the value of the number of reservations in FIG. 1 stored in the RAM # 308, and the number of reservations in FIG. 1 increases by # 1. Therefore, the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit. Also for special figure 2, as in special figure 1, each random value which is start information is acquired, and the set random number value is stored in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM # 308 for one set of start information. Is stored in the same manner, and 1 is added to the value of the number of reservations in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM # 308. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 stores the start information acquired when the game ball enters the second special figure start port # 232 (second start area) up to a predetermined second upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to the second start information storage means that can be stored. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM # 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. May be used as the second start-up information storage unit, and the reserved storage unit and the temporary area in FIG. 2 may be used as the second start-up information storage unit.

  Further, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general map starting port # 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment), the general timing at that timing is also determined. The value of the random number counter for generating the selected winning random value is acquired as the starting winning random number value which is the starting information, and stored in a random number storage area different from that for the special drawing provided in the RAM # 308. In this winning acceptance process, a predetermined ball detection sensor is used to win (win) the first special figure starting port # 230, the second special figure starting port # 232, the ordinary drawing starting port # 228, or the variable winning port # 234. Sphere) is detected, transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit # 400 includes a first special figure starting port # 230, a second special figure starting port # 232, a general figure starting port # 228, and a variable The winning acceptance information indicating the presence / absence of winning (winning) in winning opening # 234 is set.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the start information is not acquired and the process proceeds to step S # 219.

  In step S # 219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. 120. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit # 600 shown in FIG. 120 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set, indicating that data is set) in bit 7, bit 6 shows power-on information (when it is on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of payout requests after encryption processing is indicated.

  In step S # 221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-mentioned general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device # 210 is repeatedly turned on and off.・ Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device # 210 performs normal fluctuation display (normal figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. When the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device # 210 is turned on / off to control the state, and the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device # 210 is set so as to display the lost symbol display mode. ON / OFF drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the. The RAM # 308 of the main control unit # 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device # 210 is configured so that either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 121 (c)) or the lost symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 121 (c)) is displayed. Confirm display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM # 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM # In the setting area 308, the normal operation is set, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), the opening / closing drive solenoid (# 332) of the blade member # 2321 of the second special figure starting port # 232 has a blade A signal for holding the member # 2321 in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM # 308. In this way, the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 that performs the opening control of the pair of blade members # 2321 corresponds to an example of a variable start region control unit that performs variable start region control. On the other hand, if it is in the non-electric support state, in the setting area of the RAM # 308, the non-operating state is set, and the solenoid for opening / closing the blade member # 2321 of the second special figure starting port # 232 (# 332) Does not output any signal. By doing so, the blade member # 2321 remains closed. A signal for maintaining the blade member # 2321 in the closed state may be output without fail.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 0.1 second), a signal for holding the blade member # 2321 in a closed state is output to the solenoid for opening / closing driving of the blade member # 2321 (# 332), and a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM # 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the normal state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM # In the setting area 308, “not working” is set. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is a loss, the usual figure loss flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of RAM # 308, “Normally inactive” is set. In the normal state update process in the case where the normal is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S # 223.

  Subsequently, in step S # 223, a general drawing related lottery process is executed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port # 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the general map variable game that is on hold If the number of is 1 or more, whether or not to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area described above The hit determination to be determined is performed, and in the case of winning, the ON flag is set to ON in the RAM # 308. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected to display the variable map on the map display device # 210, and this variable display time is stored as a map variable display time in the map variable time storage area provided in the RAM # 308. To do. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the general figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM # 308, and every time a hit determination is made, A value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special figure prefetch process (step S # 224) is executed. This special figure prefetch process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S # 225). Then, a special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S # 227). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device # 214 is turned on. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is repeated. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device # 214 performs the fluctuation display of special figure 2 (special figure 2 fluctuation game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S # 233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM # 308 of the main control unit # 300 has a 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first lose flag, second lose flag, probability change flag, and short time flag. Each flag is provided. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the special figure in the special figure related lottery process to be described later Based on the determination result (stop pattern mode of the special figure), the 7 segment LED constituting the second special figure display device # 214 is controlled to be turned on / off, and the special figure 2 stop is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM # 308. Make a setting to represent something. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device # 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time reduction symbol ( Special Figure D), Hidden Probability Pattern (Special Figure E), Sudden Normal Design (Special Figure F), First Small Hit Pattern (Special Figure G), Second Small Hit Pattern (Special Figure H), First Loss Pattern ( Any one of the special symbol I) and the second lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM # 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM # 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the short time number, and the subtraction result is 1 to 0. If it becomes, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is turned off during the big hit game or the small hit game. That is, the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 enters the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (during the second control state). Transition.

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S # 233) to be described later is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the symbol is special figure 2 is additionally stored in RAM # 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM # A special figure 2 in operation is set in the setting area 308, and an image for notifying the player that a predetermined winning effect period (for example, # 3 seconds), that is, a big hit by the decorative symbol display device # 208 starts, is displayed. In order to wait for a certain period, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM # 308. In addition, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S # 233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening # 234, the door member is connected to the opening / closing drive solenoid (# 332) of the door member # 2341 of the variable winning opening # 234. A signal for holding # 2341 in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM # 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S # 233).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member # 2341 in the closed state is output to the solenoid for opening / closing of the door member # 2341 of the variable prize opening # 234 (# 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM # 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S # 233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM # 308 for setting so as to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device # 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set.

  As described above, the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 performs the hit control advantageous to the player after the second special figure display device # 214 stops and displays the symbol form corresponding to the winning / failing determination result. The state is started and corresponds to an example of a game control means. Further, the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing change control of the open / closed state of the door member # 2341 of the variable winning opening # 234 during the big hit gaming state. The ROM # 306 of the main control unit # 300 stores the opening / closing pattern of the door member # 2341 of the variable prize opening # 234, and the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 receives from the ROM # 306, An open / close pattern corresponding to the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful is acquired.

  Further, the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 sets on the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM # 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game based on the stop symbol mode indicated by the special figure determination result. . That is, the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 turns on both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. Set to. When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Further, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the number of times of electric support provided in the RAM # 308 is stored. Set the power support count # 100 times in the section. When the probability variation flag is set to ON, it is in a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit after the big hit game is high (a special figure high probability state). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is not set to ON (set to OFF), it is a special figure low probability state. Therefore, the setting state of the probability variation flag affects the result of the determination of success / failure (special drawing lottery). In addition, when the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state, the electric chew is easy to open (for example, easy to hit), the opening time based on one hit is long, and the number of times of opening based on one hit is large. The variable starting area control is performed so as to be advantageous to the player. On the contrary, if the time reduction flag is set to OFF, it is in a non-electric support state, and the variable start area control is performed so as to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the setting state of the time reduction flag also affects the variable start area control. Therefore, information indicating the setting state of the probability variation flag and / or the time reduction flag corresponds to an example of game control information, and the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 corresponds to an example of game control information determination means.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S # 233).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is set in the setting area of the RAM # 308. Set inactive. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the loss flag is on, the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from # 1 to 0) is also performed. In the setting area of RAM # 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S # 225 and step S # 227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 that executes this special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. The main control unit # 300 first performs the process for the special figure 2 (the special drawing 2 related lottery process), and then performs the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process). In this way, the main control unit # 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the game ball has entered the first special figure start port # 230 at the same timing. The start information is acquired based on the game, and the start information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure start port # 232, or the special condition 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 change Even if the start conditions of the game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Therefore, the special figure 1 variable game does not start to change. That is, the pachinko machine # 100 of the present embodiment performs special figure 2 priority fluctuation, and the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port # 232 (determination of special figure 2) is determined. The drawing is prioritized over the lottery based on the winning at the starting port # 230 (determination of special figure 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine # 100 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first special start area, the random number value is stored in the first random number storage area up to the maximum number of reservations, and the second special start A winning storage unit that stores up to the maximum number of reserved random numbers in the second random value storage area when a game ball is won in the area, both the first random value storage area and the second random value storage area When the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area, the time when the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area and the time when the random number value is stored in the second random number value storage area. The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the second random value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the first random value storage area, and the second random value storage is performed. If a random value is stored in the area, the second value The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the numerical value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the second random number value storage area, and the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area. In the case where it has been determined, there is provided a go / no-go determination means for making a go / no-go determination based on the random number value stored in the first random value storage area. Further, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device # 212 or the second special figure display device # 214 is performed by the main control unit # 300, and the second special figure start port # 232. The result notification of the success / failure determination based on winning a prize is given priority over the result notification of the determination of success / failure based on the winning of the first special figure starting port # 230, and the start information for which the determination of success / failure is not performed is performed. In the state where only the start information of FIG. 1 remains among the start information of FIG. 1 and the start information of FIG. 2, when the start information of FIG. 2 is newly stored, it is newly stored. The notification of the result of the success / failure determination based on the start information of FIG. 2 is performed prior to the notification of the result of the determination of success / failure based on the already stored start information of FIG. Further, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information, when start information is stored in both of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the second start information When starting information is acquired from the storage means and the starting information is stored in one of the first starting information storing means and the second starting information storing means, the starting information is stored. The starting information is obtained from the information storage means. In addition, the special figure 2 state lottery process is performed first after the special figure 2 state update process of step S # 225, and then the special figure 1 state update process of step S # 227 is performed, and then the special figure 1 state lottery process. Processing may be performed.

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is executed (lottery), determination of the special figure to be stopped, and determination of the variation time are performed. The CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the success / failure determination means. In the special figure 2 related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this determination, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. That is, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device # 214 is in the special figure fluctuation display or the stop display, and if any one is being displayed, the main control unit timer interrupt process If neither of the displays is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during operation of the special figure or not during operation of the special figure. Returning to the process, if the special figure is set to inactive, it means that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not the predetermined validity determination condition is satisfied. The determination as to whether or not the game is appropriate is determined by referring to the holding storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM # 308 and determining whether or not the holding number of the special figure 2 variable game is larger than zero. If the hold number is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and the most recently stored starting information is stored from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 provided in the RAM # 308. One set of random numbers (Special Figure 2 Winning Random Value, Big Bonus Special Figure 2 Random Value, Small Bonus Special Figure 2 Random Value, Loss Special Figure 2 Random Value, and Special Figure 2 Variation Time Random Number ) And the starting information (a set of random values) still stored in the holding storage unit is transferred from the area currently stored to the adjacent area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, the hold number stored in the RAM # 308 is subtracted by # 1. One set of random numbers from the reserved storage section of the special map 2 of the RAM # 308 (the special figure 2 winning random value, the big hit special figure 2 random value, the small hit special figure 2 random value, and the lost special figure 2 random value , And the special figure 2 variable time determination random number value), the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  FIG. 124 (a) is a diagram showing a success / failure determination high probability table, and FIG. 124 (b) is a diagram showing a success / failure determination low probability table. These tables are stored in the ROM # 306 of the main control unit # 300.

  The CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 refers to the probability variation flag when the startup information is taken out from the holding storage unit of the RAM # 308, and if the probability variation flag is on, it is in the special figure high probability state. Based on which random number range in the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. 10 (a) belongs to the winning random number value (possible numerical range is 0 to 65535), the result is “big hit” as the special figure 2 success / failure determination result. , "Small hit" or "losing" is derived. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, it is in the special figure low probability state. Therefore, based on which random number range in the special figure 2 winning random number value shown in FIG. Then, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” is derived as the special figure 2 determination result. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” corresponds to determination of success / failure.

  Next, the symbol of the special figure 2 is determined based on the special figure 2 determination result.

  FIG. 124 (c) is a diagram showing a special figure determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM # 306 of the main control unit # 300. In this special figure determination table, a random number range corresponding to the stop pattern form of the special figure (see FIG. 121 (a)) is defined for each success / failure determination result.

  CPU # 304 of main control unit # 300, if the special figure 2 determination result is a big hit, special figure for big hit out of one set of random values previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of RAM # 308 2 The random number value (possible numerical range is 0 to 99) is determined as to which random number range of the jackpot the result of determination of success / failure in the special figure determination table shown in FIG. As the determination result of FIG. 2, “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” are determined. If the special figure 2 determination result is a small hit, the special figure 2 random number for small hits (possible numerical values) out of one set of random values previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM # 308. The range is 0 to 99), it is determined to which random number range of the small hits the result determination result in the special figure determination table shown in FIG. "Special figure G" or "Special figure H" is determined. Further, if the special figure 2 determination result is a loss, the special figure 2 random value for the loss (a numerical value range that can be taken is out of one set of random values previously acquired from the storage unit of the RAM # 308. 0-99) determines which random number range out of the losing judgment results in the special figure determination table shown in FIG. "Or" Special Figure J "is determined. The special figure 2 decision result decided here is information representing the symbol form of special figure 2 to be stopped and displayed by the second special figure display device # 214.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation time (special diagram 2 variation time) in the symbol variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined based on the special diagram 2 determination result. For the determination of the variation time here, the special figure 2 variation time determination random value among the random values for one set previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM # 308 (possible numerical range is 0 to 65535). Is used.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a special figure 2 variation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM # 306 of the main control unit # 300. This special figure 2 variable time determination table is composed of tables 1 to 5, and table 1 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a jackpot symbol (special figures A and B) of 15R. Yes, Table 2 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a 2R big hit symbol (Special C to F) or a small hit symbol (Special G, H). Tables 3 to 5 are This is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a lost symbol (Special Figure I, J).

  Each table of Tables 1 to 5 defines a correspondence relationship between the variation time and the random number selection range of the special figure 2 variation time determination random value. In addition, in each table shown in FIG. 125, the name of the variation pattern representing the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device # 208 corresponding to each variation time is also shown for reference. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device # 208 are associated one-to-one. The main control unit # 300 may determine up to the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device # 208 corresponding to the variation time of the special figure, but in the present embodiment, the information indicating the variation time determined here is the first The first sub control unit # 400 determines an effect mode in the decorative symbol display device # 208 corresponding to the variation time. In this embodiment, ten types of variation patterns are prepared. These fluctuation patterns include a fluctuation pattern with a reach effect and a change pattern without a reach effect. In the present embodiment, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B are prepared as reach effects. The normal reach generally stops and displays decorative symbols in which two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas # 208a and # 208c shown in FIG. 119) are equal, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, medium symbol display area # 208b) is a state in which it is variably displayed (reach state), that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed stops displaying a specific symbol (a symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped) This is a state where the combination of jackpot symbols ("decorative symbol combination 1" and "decorative symbol combination 2" shown in Fig. 121 (b)) is stopped and displayed.

  Super reach A and super reach B are a type of reach in which the production effect is improved by adding a special variable display or the like to normal reach.

  In addition, long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, and the like are known as super reach, and special reach such as special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like are also known. In the present specification, the term “reach” means a variation of the decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special reach. This reach is an effect of notifying the player after the success / failure determination and notifying the result of the success / failure determination that the result of the special determination's success / failure determination (lottery) will be the winning determination result. Thus, whether or not to perform reach is determined after determining whether or not to reach. In the case of no reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively short, in the super reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively long, and in the normal reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is the time between no reach and the super reach.

  When the special figure 2 determination result is special figure A or special figure B (see Table 1), both are 15R jackpot symbols with electric support, and as shown in Table 1, the longest fluctuation time of 65 seconds Is most likely to be selected, and the variation time of # 15 seconds is the least likely to be selected. In this case, a reach effect is performed in the decorative symbol display device # 208.

  If the special figure 2 decision result is a 2R big hit symbol (Special Fig. C to F) or a small hit symbol (Special G, H) (see Table 2), the fluctuation time is uniformly 12 seconds. To be elected. In this case, the decorative symbol display device # 208 temporarily turns off the decorative symbol combination (decorative symbol combination 3, decorative symbol combination 4) that has been stopped and displayed after the change without reach, so-called chance all extinction. Is done.

  When the determination result of the special figure 2 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the table used differs depending on whether or not it is in the electric support state and the number of reservations in the special figure 2. The CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 determines a table to be used with reference to the time reduction flag and the number of reservations in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM # 308.

  If the determination result of the special figure 2 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J) and the support status is 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 1 to 3, the table 3 is used. In this case, it is in the electric support state, and in order to speed up the digestion of the special figure 2, the shortest fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is uniformly selected. Changes will be made.

  Table 4 is used when the determination result of special figure 2 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the support status is zero, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is zero. In this case, in order to save the special figure 2 hold, the fluctuation time of 8 seconds, which is somewhat longer, is uniformly selected, and reach design is not performed in the decorative symbol display device # 208.

  When the special figure 2 determination result is a losing symbol (special figure I, J) and the non-electric support state, the table 5 is used regardless of the number of holdings in the special figure 2. In the non-electric support state, if there is a prize at the second special figure starting port # 232, it is a rare case that the normal figure variable game was won under the low figure probability state, and the special figure 2 priority change machine Then, in the state where the special figure 1 variable game is continuously performed, the special figure 2 variable game is interrupted and preferentially digested. In this case, the fluctuation time of 8 seconds (losing without reach) is selected with a high probability, as shown in Table 5, without shortening or extremely shortening the fluctuation time of FIG. However, a variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds may be selected. When the variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds is selected, the decorative design display device # 208 performs a reach effect.

  As described above, the special figure 2 variation time is determined, and the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S # 229) ends.

  Subsequently, special drawing 1 related lottery processing (step S # 231) is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is read as “special figure 1”. That is, in the special drawing 1 related lottery processing, one set of random values (the special drawing 1 winning random value, the big hit special drawing 1 random value, the small hit special drawing 1 from the reserved storage unit of the special drawing 1 of the RAM # 308. Random value, special figure 1 for losing, and random value for determining special figure 1 variation time) are taken out, based on one set of random values (starting information), whether or not special figure 1 is judged (lottery) Execution, determination of special figure for stop display, and determination of variation time. In the execution of the success / failure determination, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 124 (a) and FIG. 124 (b) is used, and the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 124 (c) is used. For the determination of the variation time, a variation time determination table shown in FIG. 126 is used.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the special figure 1 variation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM # 306 of the main control unit # 300. This special figure 1 variation time determination table is composed of tables 6 to 9, and the table 6 is a table used when the special figure 1 decision result is a 15R jackpot symbol (special figures A and B). The content is the same as the content of the table 1 shown in FIG. The table 7 is a table used when the special figure 1 determination result is a 2R big hit symbol (Special Drawings C to F) or a small hit symbol (Special Drawings G and H). The table 2 shown in FIG. It is the same content as.

  Tables 8 and 9 are tables used when the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figures I and J). Even when the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the table used differs depending on whether or not it is in the electric support state and the number of holdings in the special figure 1.

  When the determination result of the special figure 1 is a losing symbol (special figures I and J), the non-electric support state and the holding number of the special figure 1 is 3, the table 8 is used. In this case, in order to expedite digestion of the special figure 1, there is a high probability that a short variation time of 3 seconds is selected, and when a variation time of 3 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device # 208 provides a reach effect. It is not performed and a shortening variation is performed.

  When the special figure 1 decision result is a losing symbol (special figure I, J) and the non-electric support state and the special figure 1 hold number is 0 to # 2 or the electric support state (the hold number is irrelevant) ) Uses the table 9. This table 9 has the same contents as the contents of the table 5 shown in FIG.

  In addition to the time shown in FIG. 125 and FIG. 126, it may be provided as the fluctuation time of the special figure symbol display. For example, the time from 1.5 seconds to 150 seconds every other second may be used as the variable time.

  In step S # 233, which is performed following the special drawing 1-related lottery process in step S # 231, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit # 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit # 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, and bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, winning round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, special command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and the special symbol variation time. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (result of determining a special symbol), information indicating a control state, and the like, a winning effect start command and an end effect start are included. In the case of a command, information indicating a control state is included, and in the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating a control state, a per-round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port # 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port # 232, the variable winning port # 234 Including the presence or absence of a prize.

  Further, in the above-described general command rotation start setting transmission process, the information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), the information indicating the control state, and the special figure variation time stored in the RAM # 308 as the command data Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set.

  In the above-described general command rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, etc. stored in the RAM # 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM # 308 and effect control that is output to the decorative symbol display device # 208, various lamps # 418, and the speaker # 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating information, information indicating a control state, information indicating the number of first special figure variable games or second special figure variable games held, etc. is set. Receiving the winning effect start command, the first sub-control unit # 400 transmits a winning effect control command to the second sub-control unit # 500 based on the winning effect start command. Receiving the winning effect control command, the second sub-control unit # 500 displays, on the decorative symbol display device # 208, an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started for a predetermined opening effect period (for example, 3 seconds). Let the jackpot game start.

  In the above-described general command end effect start setting transmission process, command control is stored in RAM # 308, and effect control is output to decorative symbol display device # 208, various lamps # 418, and speaker # 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the information, information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. are set. Receiving the end effect start command, the first sub control unit # 400 transmits the end effect control command to the second sub control unit # 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit # 500 that has received the end effect control command causes the decorative symbol display device # 208 to display an image for notifying the player that the big hit is to be ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). The game ends.

  In the general command big prize opening release transmission process described above, information indicating the number of hit rounds stored in the RAM # 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the current round number stored in the RAM # 308, information indicating the control state, the first special figure variable game or the second special that is held. Information indicating the number of figure-changing games is set.

  In step S # 215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM # 308 in the command data of the special figure pending increase command, Information indicating the control state and information of special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance are set.

  Further, in this step S # 215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit # 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit # 400 a universal map change start command indicating that the normal map change display has started (is) as a general map-related command. From the main control unit # 300 to the first sub-control unit # 400, a normal change change command indicating that the normal change display has been stopped, and a pair of blade members # 2321 has started to open. An electric chew opening start command indicating (doing) or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members # 2321 are closed (doing) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit # 400, it is possible to determine the presentation control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit # 300, and to be included in the output schedule information according to the command type included in the received output schedule information. The contents of the effect control can be determined based on the command data information. Further, the first sub-control unit # 400 obtains the number of remaining rounds until all winning rounds are completed based on the number of winning rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit # 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit # 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information in bit 7 (indicating that data is set when on), and power on bit 6. Information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 for the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 for after encryption processing The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 123, an external output signal setting process (step S # 235) is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM # 308 is output to the information input circuit # 350 separate from the pachinko machine # 100 via the information output circuit # 336.

  In step S # 237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal statuses of the various sensors stored in the signal status storage area in step # 205 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a glass frame open error or the bottom pan full error is monitored to detect a glass frame open error. Alternatively, device information indicating whether there is a glass frame opening error or whether there is a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit # 400 when a lower pan full error is detected. Also, various solenoids # 332 shown in FIG. 120 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port # 232 and the variable prize opening # 234, or the normal circuit via the drive circuits # 324, # 326, and # 330. Display data to be output to the symbol display device # 210, the first special symbol display device # 212, the second special symbol display device # 214, the various state display unit # 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O # 310. Also, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S # 219) is output to the first sub-control unit # 400 via the output port of the I / O # 310.

  In step S # 239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON in order to determine whether or not a power interruption (power interruption) has been detected. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S # 241. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), step S # is performed. Proceed to 243.

  In step S # 241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S # 201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main shown in FIG. Return to processing.

On the other hand, in step S # 243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of RAM # 308, and the input / output port is initialized. The power interruption process is performed, and then the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.
<Processing of first sub-control unit # 400>
The process of the first sub control unit # 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU # 404 of the first sub-control unit # 400.

  First, in step S # 301 in FIG. 5A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting in step S # 301 is executed. In this initial setting, initial setting of I / O port # 410 shown in FIG. 120, initialization processing of a storage area in RAM # 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S # 303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S # 305.

  In step S # 305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S # 307, command processing is performed. The CPU # 404 of the first sub control unit # 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit # 300. In this command processing, power recovery sub-side flag setting processing and the like are performed, and details will be described later.

  In step S # 309, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S # 307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from ROM # 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. I do. In this effect control process, a start-side winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process, a change disclosure sub-side notice execution process, and a power recovery sub-side flag setting process are also performed. Each of these processes will be described later in detail.

  In step S # 311, when it is detected that the chance button # 136 shown in FIG. 117 is pressed, the effect data updated in step S # 309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button # 136. .

  In step S # 313, when there is a command to the sound source IC # 416 in the effect data read in S # 309, this command is output to the sound source IC # 416.

  In step S # 315, if there is a command to drive circuit # 420 for various lamps # 418 in the effect data read in S # 309, this command is output to drive circuit # 420.

  In step S # 317, if there is a command to drive circuit # 422 for effect movable body # 224 in the effect data read in S # 309, this command is output to drive circuit # 422.

  In step S # 319, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit # 500 in the effect data read in S # 309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to S # 303. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit # 400 will be described using FIG. 127 (b). FIG. 127B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit # 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit # 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit # 300. In step S # 331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit # 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM # 408, and this command reception interrupt process ends.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU # 404 of the first sub control unit # 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 127 (c). FIG. 127 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit # 400. The first sub-control unit # 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every # 2 ms). Timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt. Are executed in a predetermined cycle.

  In step S # 341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the timer variable storage area of RAM # 408 described in step S # 303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Add # 1 and store in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S # 303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S # 343 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit # 500 set in step S # 319, update processing of the random number value for production, etc. are performed. This timer interrupt process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit # 500>
In the second sub-control unit # 500, the decorative symbol display device # 208 is controlled based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit # 400. The second sub-control unit # 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device # 208. This image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads out the picture information stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit # 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit # 500, and displays it using the display area (work area) of the VRAM An image is generated and displayed on the decorative symbol display device # 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub-control unit # 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device # 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the GPU attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Subsequently, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When a generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1) to finish the process. To do.

  The second sub control unit # 500 also executes control of the shielding device # 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit # 400.

<Special figure look-ahead processing>
Next, the special figure prefetching process (step S # 224) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 123 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing relating to special figure 2 in special figure prefetching processing.

  The CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 refers to the time reduction flag in the RAM # 308 and determines whether or not power support is in progress (step S # 224a). If the time reduction flag is off and the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S # 224i of the process related to FIG. 1, and if the time reduction flag is on and the electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S # 224i. Proceed to # 224b. In step S # 224b, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port # 232. In this determination, the determination is made by determining whether or not the holding in the holding storage unit of the special map 2 of RAM # 308 has increased. That is, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port # 232 that is within the upper limit number (4 in this case) of the reserved storage of the special figure 2. If it is determined in step S # 224b that there has been a prize (increase in the number of reserved figures in FIG. 2), the process proceeds to step S # 224c.

  In step S # 224c, first, a set of start-up information acquired in the previous winning acceptance process (step S # 217) is pre-read from the reserved storage unit of FIG. 2 provided in the RAM # 308. That is, with the winning of the second special figure starting port # 232 as a trigger, the starting information generated based on the winning is prefetched. Therefore, the newest starting information is prefetched before the determination of validity (based on the special figure 2 lottery process) based on the starting information is performed. The CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 that performs this prefetching corresponds to an example of start information prefetching means. In the prefetching here, only the winning portion (holding increment) is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that pre-reading here means that the start information is read first before the validity determination (main lottery), but in the following explanation, the word pre-reading is referred to as the predecessor (result of true / false determination (main lottery)). Sometimes used to mean read.

  In the ROM # 306 of the main control unit # 300, a pre-determination high probability table having the same contents as the contents of the success / failure determination high probability table shown in FIG. A low probability table for prior determination having the same contents as the contents of the probability table is prepared. In step S # 224c, with reference to the probability variation flag, one of the pre-determination high probability table and the pre-determination low probability table is selected, and the pre-read start information is selected using the selected table. Based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in FIG. 2, it is determined in advance whether or not the result of the determination of success / failure will be a success / failure determination result of a big hit (specific determination result of determination). That is, with the winning of the second special figure starting port # 232 as a trigger, it is determined in advance whether or not the winning / failing determination result based on the starting information generated based on the winning becomes the big hit determination result. Therefore, this pre-determination is executed before the determination of validity (based on the special figure 2 lottery process) based on the start-up information, and the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300 that makes this pre-determination is an example of a pre-determination unit. The result determined in advance here is treated as the result of prior determination in FIG.

  If the result of the pre-determination is a big hit determination result, the process proceeds to step S # 224e. On the other hand, if it is not the big hit determination result, this time, using the selected table, it is pre-determined whether the result of the determination is a small hit determination result (step S # 224d), where If the result of the previous determination is the result of the determination of whether or not the bonus is hit, the process proceeds to step S # 224f, and otherwise, the process proceeds to step S # 224g.

  In the ROM # 306 of the main control unit # 300, a special figure preliminary determination table having the same contents as the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 124C is also prepared. Using the special figure predetermination table, in step S # 224e, the big hit symbol is preliminarily determined based on the big hit special figure 2 random value in the pre-read start information, and in step S # 224f, the small hit The special symbol 2 is determined in advance based on the special figure 2 random value, and in step S # 224g, the lost symbol is determined in advance based on the special figure 2 random value for loss. The special figure pre-determination in steps S # 224e-g is also executed before the success / failure determination (special figure 2 related lottery process) based on the pre-read start information is performed. Treated as a result.

  Subsequent to steps S # 224e-g, step S # 224h is executed. In the ROM # 306 of the main control unit # 300, a special figure 2 variable time prior determination table having the same contents as the special figure 2 variable time determination table shown in FIG. 125 is also prepared. In step S # 224h, using the special figure 2 fluctuation time pre-determination table, the special figure fluctuation time is preliminarily determined based on the special figure 2 fluctuation time determining random value in the pre-read start information. The prior determination of the variation time in step S # 224h is also executed before the success / failure determination (special drawing 2 related lottery process) based on the pre-read start information is performed. Treated as a result. Instead of the variation time, the effect mode (variation pattern) in the decorative symbol display device # 208 may be determined in advance. In addition, the production modes may be divided into groups, and for example, only “out of reach / normal reach lose” group or “reach A out of reach / reach B lose” group may be selected. Or, it belongs to the group of reach production of “per normal reach, normal reach lose, per reach A, per reach B, per reach A, per reach B” or “super shortened lose, shortened lose, lose, chance all extinguished” It may be determined in advance whether it belongs to the group without reach.

  When the execution of step S # 224h is completed, the process related to special figure 2 ends, and the process advances to the process related to special figure 1.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing relating to special figure 1 in special figure prefetching processing.

  The processing related to special figure 1 (steps S # 224i to step S # 224o) is the same as the processing related to special figure 2 (steps S # 224b to step S # 224h). In the processing related to the figure, the one set of starting information acquired in the previous winning acceptance process (step S # 217) is pre-read from the holding storage unit of FIG. , And special figure 1 variation time prior judgment result is obtained.

  Special figure 1 or 2 pre-determined result (special figure successful / pre-determined result), special figure 1 or 2 pre-determined result (special figure pre-determined result), and special figure 1 or 2 variation time pre-determined The result (special map variation time preliminary determination result) is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM # 308 as the preliminary determination information in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the order of the hold by the predetermined upper limit number. The newly stored pre-determined information (special map rejection pre-determined result, special figure pre-determined result, special figure variation time pre-determined result) is pre-determined as special figure 1 or special figure 2 information. It is included in the command data of the increase command and transmitted from the main control unit # 300 to the first sub control unit # 400.

  After executing the special figure prefetching process described above, the main control unit # 300 executes the special figure related lottery process, and based on the same start information as the prefetched start information targeted in the special figure prefetch process. The figure determination result, the special figure determination result, and the special figure variation time are obtained again.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit # 300 has obtained the special figure pre-determination result and the special figure variation time pre-determination result. However, the main control unit # 300 pre-reads without obtaining these pre-determination results. The start information is included in the command data of the special figure hold increase command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit # 400, and the first sub-control unit # 400 pre-specifies the special figure pre-determination result and special figure variation time in advance as necessary. An aspect in which a determination result is obtained may be used.

<Sub-pre-reading notice execution process at start-up prize>
Next, the start winning time sub-side pre-reading notice execution process executed in the effect control process (step S # 309) in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 127 (a) will be described in detail.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the flow of the sub-side pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting winning a prize.

  The start side winning side pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 130 is an effect control process (step S1307) in the first sub-control unit main process determined to have received the special figure hold increase command in the command process (step S # 307). This is executed in S # 309). A pre-reading execution flag is also prepared in the RAM # 408 of the first sub-control unit # 400. First, in step S # 3091a, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading execution flag is set to ON. If it is set to on, the process proceeds to step S # 3091h, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S # 3091b.

  In the present embodiment, a special figure 1 hold display area is provided on the left side of the effect display area # 208d of the decorative symbol display device # 208, and a special figure 2 hold display area is provided on the right side thereof. In the special figure 1 hold display area, a hold display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the hold storage section of the special figure 1 is displayed in the order in which the start information is stored in the hold storage section of the special figure 1 (winnings). In order) from the oldest to the left. In the special figure 2 hold display area, a hold display corresponding to a set of start information stored in the hold storage section of the special figure 2 is displayed in the order in which the start information is stored in the hold storage section of the special figure 2 (winnings). In order) from the oldest to the left. The number of hold indications corresponds to the hold number. Each time the first sub control unit # 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the first sub control unit # 400 transmits a hold increase command to the second sub control unit # 500 in step S # 3091i described later, and the second sub control unit # 500 Controls the decorative symbol display device # 208 based on the hold increase command to increase the number of hold displays by one. On the other hand, every time the first sub-control unit # 400 receives a symbol change start command that is a sign of the reservation, the second sub-control unit # 500 transmits a hold decrease signal to the second sub-control unit # 500. Based on the hold decrease signal, the decorative symbol display device # 208 is controlled to reduce the number of hold displays by one. As described above, in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the special figure determination pre-determined result, the special figure pre-determined result, and the special figure variation time prior are included as information on the pre-determined special figure 1 or special figure 2. Judgment results are included. The RAM # 408 of the first sub-control unit # 400 is provided with a pre-determination result storage area, and these pieces of information included in the special figure hold increase command are stored as pre-determination information in the pre-determination result storage area. The special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are divided into the predetermined upper limit numbers and stored in order of suspension. Each time the CPU # 404 of the first sub-control unit # 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the CPU # 404 displays one or more hold displays corresponding to the advance determination result stored in the advance determination result storage area this time. A display instruction signal for displaying only the time based on the result of the special figure fluctuation time prior determination included in the received special figure hold increase command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit # 500. It may be made to disappear.

  The hold display corresponds to an example of the start hold display, and the combination of the first sub control unit # 400, the second sub control unit # 500, and the decorative symbol display device # 208 corresponds to an example of the start hold number notifying unit.

  The hold display is displayed on the left side from the hold display corresponding to the old start information for each hold display area. For this reason, for example, when the old hold is consumed while two hold displays are displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area, the hold display corresponding to the old hold disappears and the new hold is displayed. It appears that the hold display corresponding to is raised to the position where the hold display corresponding to the older hold was displayed. That is, it appears that the hold display corresponding to the new new hold is shifted leftward.

  There are roughly two types of display modes for holding display.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a display mode of the hold display.

  One of the two types of display modes is a predetermined display mode, which is a display mode of a non-patterned and white round graphic. This predetermined display mode is a display mode when the pre-reading notice is not performed, and is a display mode in which the reliability is not displayed. The pre-reading notice here is a notice of notice using the display mode of the hold display based on the preliminary determination result of the predetermined start information performed by the main control unit # 300. This pre-reading notice is a notification for making a notice about the result of the determination on whether or not the predetermined starting information is appropriate before the execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the predetermined starting information. In the present embodiment, this is a notification for notifying that the result of the determination of whether or not the predetermined start information is true will be a big hit (here, more limited to 15R big hit (15R special big hit or 15R big hit)). It should be noted that the prefetching notice includes a false prefetching notice that gives a false notice as if the pre-determined result is not a big hit of 15R but a big hit of 15R. Therefore, the pre-reading notice indicates that the result of the success / failure determination may be a 15R jackpot, a prior notification that suggests to the player, or the player's expectation that the result of the success / failure determination will be a 15R jackpot. It can be said that it is information. In addition, the degree of reliability mentioned here is just how correct the result of the determination is a specific determination result (here, 15R big hit (Special Figure A or Special Figure B shown in FIG. 121 (a))). Is the degree (%) representing (hereinafter the same). The predetermined display mode is a default display mode.

  Another type of display mode is a specific display mode when pre-reading notice is performed. In the specific display mode, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared according to the reliability. Here, six types of specific display modes are prepared. The specific display mode indicating that the reliability is 5% is a display mode of a round figure in which many black dots are scattered on a white background. The specific display mode indicating that the reliability is 10% is a display mode of a round figure in which a white background is left-down hatched. The specific display mode indicating that the reliability is 30% is a display mode of a round figure in which a white background is hatched to the right. The specific display mode indicating that the reliability is 50% is a display mode of a round graphic with cross-hatching on a white background. The specific display mode indicating that the reliability is 80% is a display mode of a non-patterned gray round figure. The specific display mode indicating that the reliability is 100% is a display mode of a non-patterned black round graphic. In the present embodiment, the predetermined start information is stored before the predetermined symbol variation display corresponding to the predetermined start information stored in the start information storage means (RAM # 308 of the main control unit # 300). It is provided with notice means (decorative symbol display device # 208) capable of giving a notice about the result of the validity determination based on the result.

  In step S # 3091b shown in FIG. 130, a pending change lottery is performed. In the pending change lottery, first, a primary lottery is performed. The CPU # 404 of the first sub-control unit # 400 acquires the primary dedicated random number from the RAM # 408 at the timing of executing the primary lottery, and performs the lottery based on the acquired primary dedicated random number. In this primary lottery, when the pre-determination result is a 15R big hit (15R special big hit or 15R big hit), one type of display mode is selected from a predetermined display mode and six types of specific display modes. On the other hand, when the pre-determination result is 2R big hit, small hit, or loss, one of the predetermined display modes and five specific display modes excluding the specific display mode indicating that the reliability is 100% is selected. Select the type of display. In this primary lottery, the selection probability of the predetermined display mode is the highest, and the higher the reliability, the lower the selection probability. For example, the selection probability of the specific display mode indicating that the reliability is 5% is 30%, whereas the selection probability of the specific display mode indicating that the reliability is 80% is 3%. Moreover, the selection probability of the specific display mode indicating that the reliability is 100% is 1% only when the pre-determination result is a big hit of 15R. In addition, when the prior determination result is a big hit of 15R, the selection probabilities for the six types of specific display modes may be higher than the selection probabilities for the predetermined display modes.

  Next, a secondary lottery is performed. The CPU # 404 of the first sub-control unit # 400 acquires the secondary dedicated random number from the RAM # 408 at the timing of executing the secondary lottery, and performs the lottery based on the acquired secondary dedicated random number. When the predetermined display mode is selected in the primary lottery, the hold display in the predetermined display mode is displayed with an execution probability of # 100%. On the other hand, in the specific display mode, depending on the reliability, the execution probability when the pre-determined result is 15R big hit (15R special big hit or 15R big hit), and the pre-determined result is 2R big hit, small hit, and lost. The execution probability of is determined. For example, in the specific display mode indicating that the reliability is 5%, the execution probability is 5% when the pre-determination result is a big hit of 15R, whereas the pre-determination result is a 2R big hit, a small hit, and a loss. The execution probability is 95%. Further, in the specific display mode indicating that the reliability is 80%, the execution probability is 20% when the prior determination result is 2R big hit, small hit, and lost, whereas the prior determination result is 15R. The execution probability in the case of big hit is 80%. Furthermore, when the specific display mode indicating that the reliability is 100% in the first lottery is selected, the execution probability is 100%.

  The predetermined display mode, which is the default display mode, can also be regarded as a display mode with 0% reliability.

  The reliability may be jackpot probability × selection rate of display mode / (big hit probability × display mode selection rate + losing probability × display mode selection rate).

  In step S # 3091c executed subsequent to step S # 3091b, it is determined in step S # 3091b whether or not the execution of the hold display in the specific display mode has been won. Winning here means winning for pre-reading notice. In other words, when the hold display is displayed in the predetermined display mode (default display mode), the selection is unsuccessful, and the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed to a specific display mode corresponding to the reliability corresponds to the win. If unsuccessful (no pre-reading notice), the process proceeds to step S # 3091i, and if successful (pre-reading notice is made), the number of pre-reading notices is set (step S # 3091d), and step S # 3091e. Proceed to In this embodiment, the number of executions of the pre-reading notice is set in the symbol variation display unit of one special figure, and here, the same number as the number of holdings is set as the number of executions in the execution number setting area prepared in the RAM # 408. Set. More specifically, in the case of the electric support state, the number of holdings in FIG. 2 is set as the number of executions, and in the case of the non-electric support state, the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is set as the number of executions.

  In step S # 3091e, the pre-reading execution flag prepared in RAM # 408 is set to ON. The pre-reading execution flag is a flag that determines whether or not the pending display can be executed in the specific display mode. When the pre-reading execution flag is set to ON, the display mode of the pending display is changed to the specific display mode according to the reliability. This is a state in which a changed prefetch notice is performed. That is, the pre-reading execution flag is set to ON only when the display mode of the hold display is changed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current number of holds is two or more (step S # 3091f). That is, if two or more pieces of pre-determination information are not stored in the pre-determination result storage area provided in the RAM # 408 of the first sub-control unit # 400, the process proceeds to step S # 3091i. Proceed to S # 3091g. In addition, in this step S # 3091f, it is determined whether or not the number of hold of the special figure (either special figure 1 or special figure 2) on which the hold display according to the specific display mode is executed is two or more. When displaying the hold display of special figure 1 and the hold display of special figure 2 without dividing, it is determined whether or not the total number of hold of special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is two or more. May be. Furthermore, even if the hold display of special figure 1 and the hold display of special figure 2 are displayed separately, whether or not the total number of hold of special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is two or more. It may be determined.

  In step S # 3091g, the reliability represented by the specific display mode determined to be executed in step S # 3091b is stored in the RAM # 408 of the first sub-control unit # 400. A display mode change flag is also prepared in the RAM # 408 of the first sub-control unit # 400, and in step S # 3091h executed following step S # 3091g, the display mode change flag is set to ON, The process proceeds to step S # 3091i.

  In step S # 3091i, a hold increase command is output to the second sub-control unit # 500, and this start winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process is terminated. The hold increase command here is a command for designating a display mode (whether a predetermined display mode or a specific display mode) and instructing to increase the hold display by one in the specified display mode. # 500 controls the decorative symbol display device # 208 based on the hold increase command, and the decorative symbol display device # 208 increases the hold display of the designated display mode by one. In the present embodiment, when the pre-reading execution flag is already turned on (Yes in the determination of step S # 3091a), the hold display indicating the increased hold is displayed in a predetermined display mode. However, even if the pre-reading execution flag is already turned on, the hold display indicating the increased hold may be displayed in the specific display mode.

<Sub-notice execution process at the start of change>
Next, the change start time sub-side notice execution process executed in the effect control process (step S # 309) in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 127 (a) will be described in detail.

  FIG. 132 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the change start sub-side notice execution process.

  In step S # 3092a, it is determined whether the prefetching execution flag prepared in RAM # 408 is set to ON. Here, the state in which the prefetch execution flag is set to ON is a state in which a prefetch advance notice is performed in which the display mode of the hold display is changed to the specific display mode. If the pre-reading execution flag remains off, the process proceeds to step S # 3092g, and if the pre-reading execution flag is set to on, the process proceeds to step S # 3092b. In step S # 3092b, it is determined whether or not the display mode change flag prepared in RAM # 408 is set to ON. If the display mode change flag remains off, the process proceeds to step S # 3092d, and if the display mode change flag is set to on, the process proceeds to step S # 3092c.

  In step S # 3092c, table appearance change processing is performed.

  FIG. 132B is a flowchart showing the flow of the display mode changing process in step S # 3092c.

  In the display mode change process, first, a display mode change lottery process S # 601 is performed. In a state in which this display mode change lottery process S # 601 is executed, there are a hold display indicating the hold to be digested this time, a hold display in a specific display mode, and one or more (here, a maximum of two) start hold displays. It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device # 208. In the display mode change lottery process, whether or not to change the reliability represented by the specific display mode is determined by lottery. That is, the reliability represented by the specific display mode of the hold display indicating the hold to be digested later than the hold to be digested this time is changed.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining a display mode change lottery table stored in the ROM # 406 of the first sub-control unit # 400. 133 (b) to (d) show how the display mode of the hold display displayed on the decorative symbol display device # 208 changes. In these figures, examples of non-electric support are shown, but in order to avoid the complexity of the drawing, the reserved display of special figure 2 is omitted, and the reserved display of special figure 1 is shown larger (hereinafter referred to as “reserved display”). The same applies to the figure). As shown on the left, the hold display becomes a hold display indicating a hold with an older timing at which the start information is stored in the hold storage unit of the special drawing. In the upper part of FIGS. 133 (b) to (d), a state in which the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed is shown, and all three hold displays are made. On the other hand, in the lower part of each figure, the oldest hold (hold indicated by the leftmost hold display h1-0) is digested, and a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started together with the special symbol variation display is shown. .

  FIG. 133 (a) shows a display mode change lottery table. In this display mode change lottery table, an individual table to be used is defined based on the relationship between the reliability (%) and the number of times of the pre-reading notice execution twice or three times. The CPU # 404 of the first sub-control unit # 400 is provided with the reliability stored in the RAM # 408 of the first sub-control unit # 400 in step S # 3091g and the RAM # 408 of the first sub-control unit # 400. The individual table is determined with reference to the number of pieces of pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination result storage area (corresponding to the number of pre-reading notice executions that is the number of holds). For example, when the reliability is 100% and the number of pre-reading notice executions is 2, the individual table A is determined, and when the reliability is 50% and the pre-reading notice execution number is 2, the individual table E is determined. In each individual table, whether or not to change the reliability represented by the already displayed specific display mode and how to change it are defined by the random number range. The individual table is also stored in the ROM # 406 of the first sub-control unit # 400. The CPU # 404 of the first sub-control unit # 400 acquires a dedicated random number (possible range is 0 to 99) from the RAM # 408 at the timing of executing the display mode change lottery process, and uses the determined individual table A lottery will be conducted based on a dedicated random number.

  For example, in the individual table A, the probability of not changing the reliability represented by the already displayed specific display mode is 50%. Further, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the display mode of the hold display h2-100 in the specific display mode indicating the reliability of 100% is changed to the specific display mode indicating the reliability of 50% (the hold display h1 after the change). -50) and the display mode of another hold display h3-0 (predetermined display mode in the present embodiment) is also changed to a specific display mode representing 50% reliability (see post-change hold display h2-50). The probability is 10%. In this mode of change, all of the reliability before the change excluding the hold that is digested this time is distributed equally to all the hold displays that are displayed after the start of symbol variation of the special figure based on the hold that is digested this time. This corresponds to a change mode in which the previous reliability and the total value of the reliability expressed by the display modes of all the hold displays displayed after the change are the same. In addition, here, it was distributed to all the hold display that is displayed after the start of the symbol change of the special figure based on the hold that is digested this time, but if three hold display is displayed, some of the hold displayed You may distribute to a display. Furthermore, the specific display mode representing the reliability of 100% is changed to the specific display mode representing the reliability of 50%, and the probability that the other display mode for holding display (the predetermined display mode in this embodiment) is not changed is 3%. is there. This change mode corresponds to a change mode in which the total value of the reliability expressed by the display modes of all the hold displays displayed after the change is lower than the reliability before the change. Although not shown here, other changes such as a change mode in which the total value of the reliability expressed by the display mode of all the hold display displayed after the change is higher than the reliability before the change, etc. Variations are also provided.

  Even in the individual table E, the probability that the reliability represented by the already-displayed specific display mode is not changed is 50%. Further, as shown in FIG. 133 (c), the display mode of the hold display h2-50 in the specific display mode indicating the reliability of 50% is changed to the specific display mode indicating the reliability of 30% (the hold display h1 after the change). -30), and the display mode of the other hold display h3-0 (predetermined display mode in the present embodiment) is changed to a specific display mode representing 10% reliability (see the hold display h2-10 after the change). The probability is 15%. This change mode corresponds to a change mode in which a part (40% in this case) of the reliability before the change is distributed to all the hold indications displayed after the start of the symbol variation of the special figure based on the hold that is currently digested. . As a result, the total value of the reliability expressed by the display modes of all the hold displays displayed after the change is lower than the reliability before the change. In addition, although it distribute | distributed to all the hold displays currently displayed here, when three hold displays are displayed, you may distribute to the one part hold display currently displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 133 (d), the display mode of the hold display h2-50 in the specific display mode indicating the reliability of 50% is changed to a predetermined display mode (see the hold display h1-0 after the change). A specification that represents a display mode (a predetermined display mode in this embodiment) of one hold display h3-0 that is different from the reliability represented by the specific display mode before the change (here, 80%, which is a high level of reliability). The probability of changing to the display mode (see the hold display h2-80 after the change) is 4%. This change mode corresponds to a change mode in which the total value of the reliability expressed by the display mode of all the hold display displayed after the change is higher than the reliability before the change, and the reliability is improved. Doing so may improve the fun of the game. Although not shown here, the specific display mode representing the reliability of 50% is changed to the predetermined display mode, and another display mode of the hold display (predetermined display mode in the present embodiment) is changed to the specific display before the change. A mode for changing to a specific display mode that represents the same reliability (50% here) as the reliability represented by the mode, that is, a mode for changing the display mode, a reliability level before the change, and all pending displayed after the mode change Other change modes such as a change mode in which the total value of the reliability expressed by the display mode is the same are also prepared.

  Further, when the reliability is # 100% and the number of pre-reading notice executions is 3, the individual table B is determined.

  FIG. 133E shows the individual table B.

  Even in this individual table B, the probability of not changing the reliability represented by the already-displayed specific display mode is 50%. Further, the specific display mode representing 100% reliability is changed to the specific display mode representing 30% reliability, and the remaining two hold display modes (predetermined display modes in this embodiment) also represent 30% reliability. The probability of changing to the specific display mode is 10%.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device # 208 includes the hold display in the specific display mode (hereinafter referred to as the specific start hold display) and one or more hold displays different from the specific start hold display. The display mode of the specific start hold display is changed to a different display mode in the state displayed on the screen, and at least one hold display of one or a plurality of hold displays is changed from the predetermined display mode to the specific display mode. is there. Note that one or more hold displays different from the specific start hold display are all hold displays in a predetermined display form in this embodiment, but the one or more hold displays include a hold display ( A hold display different from the specific start hold display) may be included.

  In step S # 602 executed following step S # 601 shown in FIG. 132 (b), it is determined whether or not the display mode change is won in step S # 601. Winning here refers to the display mode of the specific start hold display in a state where the specific start hold display and one or more hold displays different from the specific start hold display are displayed on the decorative symbol display device # 208. This means that the display mode is changed to a different display mode, and at least one of the one or more hold displays is changed from a predetermined display mode to a specific display mode. That is, if the display mode of the specific start hold display is not changed, the selection is unsuccessful, and the case where the display mode of the specific start hold display is changed corresponds to the win. If it is unsuccessful, the display mode changing process ends. If it is successful, the process proceeds to step S # 603. In step S # 603, a display mode change instruction command is output to the second sub-control unit # 500, and this display mode change process ends. The display mode change instruction command here is a command for designating the display mode in each hold display and instructing to display the hold display in the specified display mode. The second sub-control unit # 500 displays the display mode. The decorative symbol display device # 208 is controlled based on the change instruction command, and the decorative symbol display device # 208 displays the hold display of the designated display mode.

  In step S # 3092c, table appearance change processing is performed.

  In step S # 3092d shown in FIG. 132 (a), which is executed following the display mode changing process, the value of the execution count setting area prepared in RAM # 408 is subtracted by 1, and then the value of the execution count setting area is subtracted. Whether or not becomes 0 is determined (step S # 3092e). If the value of the execution count setting area is not 0, the process proceeds to step S # 3092g. If it is 0, the pre-reading execution flag is set to OFF (step S # 3092f), and the process proceeds to step S # 3092g. In step S # 3092g, the display mode change flag prepared in RAM # 408 is set to OFF. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

  In step S # 3092h, which is executed following step S # 3092g, a lottery process for normal common notice is performed. In the normal common notice here, for example, an effect in which a specific character appears before the reach effect that is executed during the symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device # 208, and then the advancement to the reach effect is announced. Corresponds. In the lottery process for the normal common notice, a lottery process based on a predetermined dedicated random number is performed using a lottery table (not shown), and the lottery process is usually common according to the determination result and the effect form in the decorative symbol display device # 208. In the case of performing the advance notice and performing the common common notice, a lottery for selecting one kind of notice form from a plurality of kinds of notice forms is performed. Next, a normal notice command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit # 500 (step S # 3092i). On the decorative symbol display device # 208, a normal notice is displayed based on the normal notice command. When the execution of step S # 3092i is completed, the change start sub-side notice execution process ends.

  The CPU # 404 of the first sub-control unit # 400 that executes the start winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 130 and the fluctuation start sub-side notice execution process shown in FIG. This corresponds to an example of the start hold display control means. The combination of the first sub-control unit # 400, the second sub-control unit # 500, and the decorative symbol display device # 208 that execute these processes corresponds to an example of the pre-reading notice unit.

  In the first embodiment, the display mode changing process shown in FIG. 132 (b) is triggered by the start of the special symbol display. This is triggered by the timing at which the hold display is displayed as if it has been shifted to the left one by one, but the display mode change processing may be performed during the symbol variation display of the special figure.

  FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the display mode change process is performed during the symbol variation display of the special figure.

  134 (a) to (d) show how the display mode of the hold display displayed on the decorative symbol display device # 208 changes. In FIG. 134 (a), three specific start hold indications h1-30, h2-30, h3-30 each representing a reliability of 30% and a specific start representing a reliability of 10% during the symbol variation display of the special chart. In the state where the hold display h4-10 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device # 208 (a state where all four hold displays are displayed), the specific start hold display with a reliability of 30% representing the oldest hold h1-30 changes to a specific start hold display h1-100 with a reliability of 100%, and the hold displays h2-30, h3-30, and h4-10 in the remaining specific display forms are all in a predetermined display form. It has changed to h2-0, h3-0, h4-0. This change mode corresponds to a mode in which the total value of reliability before the change is represented by a specific display mode of one hold display after the change. As described above, there is a case where the player can be made to pay attention to the change of the display mode by changing the reliability of each display mode without changing the reliability of the entire display mode before and after the change. These display modes are changed at the same timing (the same applies to the following examples unless otherwise noted).

  In FIG. 134 (b), the specific start hold display h1-30 representing the reliability of 30% and the three hold displays h2-0, h3-0, h4-0 in the predetermined display mode during the symbol variation display of the special figure. Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device # 208, the specific start hold display changes to a specific start hold display h1-5 with a reliability of 5%, and two hold displays h2 and h4 in a predetermined display mode. Changes to a specific display mode with a reliability of 10%, and the remaining one hold display h3 changes to a specific display mode with a reliability of 5%. This change mode is expressed by the reliability before the change and the display mode of all the hold indications displayed after the change by assigning all the reliability before the change to all the hold indications after the change. This corresponds to a change mode in which the total value of the reliability is the same. In addition, among the hold displays after the change, the start hold display (here, h2-10, h4-10) in the specific display mode indicating the highest reliability is the other start hold display (here h1-5, h3-5). ) And a part of the start-pending display according to the specific display mode representing the highest reliability overlaps with a part of the other start-pending display displayed next. That is, the start hold display by the specific display mode representing the highest reliability is seen on the player side than the other start hold displays. As a result, the start hold display by the specific display mode representing the highest reliability stands out first, and the player can be surely notified that there is a chance. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold display once changes in the same size as before the change, and then the start hold display by the specific display mode indicating the highest reliability becomes large and is visible to the player side. Also good. By doing so, it can be reported more reliably that the player has a chance. In this example, the display mode is changed at the same timing. However, it may be changed in order from the oldest hold, may be changed one by one at random, or may be changed in order from the lower reliability.

  In FIG. 134 (c), during the symbol variation display of the special figure, a predetermined hold display (here, the second oldest hold display h2) is displayed in a specific display mode representing 100% reliability, and the remaining three hold displays. While h1, h3, and h4 are displayed in the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the specific hold display (here, the newest hold display h4) remains the predetermined display mode, and the remaining three hold displays h1, h2, and h3 Is changed to a specific display mode representing 30% reliability. In this change mode, the reliability is demoted both from the total value of the reliability after the change and from the display mode of the second oldest hold display h2.

  In FIG. 134 (d), as shown in the upper diagram, a predetermined hold display (here, the newest hold display h4) is displayed in a specific display mode representing the reliability of 30% during the special symbol change display. The remaining three hold displays h1, h2, and h3 are displayed in a predetermined display mode. In addition, a predetermined hold display (here, corresponding to the start hold display by the specific display mode representing the highest reliability) is displayed larger than the other start hold displays, and the start hold display by the specific display mode representing the highest reliability. Part of h4-10 overlaps part of the adjacent start hold display h3-5. That is, the start hold display by the specific display mode representing the highest reliability is seen on the player side than the other start hold displays. Next, as shown in the middle diagram, the display mode of the predetermined hold display changes to the predetermined display mode, and all the hold displays h1 to h4 are once displayed in the predetermined display mode. After that, when a predetermined condition (e.g., elapse of a predetermined time) is satisfied, a specific display of a specific hold display (here, the second new hold display h3 different from the predetermined hold display) is a specific display with a reliability of 5%. It has changed to the aspect. In this change mode, the reliability is demoted when viewed only from the whole and the predetermined hold display h1, but the display mode of a specific hold display is promoted from 0% to 5%. In addition, a specific hold display (here, equivalent to a start hold display with a specific display mode representing the highest reliability) is displayed larger than other start hold displays, and a start hold display with a specific display mode representing the highest reliability Part of h3-5 overlaps part of the start hold indications h2-0 and h4-0 on both sides. That is, the start hold display by the specific display mode representing the highest reliability is seen on the player side than the other start hold displays. Here, the hold display of the display mode with high reliability has overcome the hold display of other display modes (skip), the player is illusioned, and the player is made to hold the display mode with high reliability In some cases, you can have more expectations. Here, though, the chance has come sooner, but the reliability is decreasing.

  In addition, during the special symbol variation display, a specific start hold display representing 30% reliability and three hold displays in a predetermined display mode are displayed on the decorative symbol display device # 208 (the hold display is all 4), the specific display mode representing the reliability 30% is changed to the predetermined display mode, and the remaining three display modes of the hold display according to the predetermined display mode are represented with the reliability 10%. You may change into an aspect. In addition, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the specific display mode may be changed to a specific display mode representing a different reliability in addition to the predetermined display mode. Furthermore, the specific display mode representing 30% reliability is changed to a predetermined display mode, and any one of the remaining three hold display modes according to the predetermined display mode is specified display representing 10% reliability. You may change into an aspect. Of the three hold displays according to the predetermined display mode before the change, the hold display to be changed to the specific display mode is an old hold display even if the hold display is newer than the hold display of the specific display mode before the change. Alternatively, the display modes of the hold display of the remaining two predetermined display modes may not be changed. In addition, by dividing the hold display with the predetermined reliability displayed originally according to the number of holds, the reliability of the hold display after the division may be higher or lower than the original reliability. Also good.

  By changing the display mode of the hold display as described above, there are cases where various effects can be performed and the player's interest can be enhanced. In addition, there is a case where a hold that cannot be expected can be taught in advance and the player's expectation is not raised too high. In addition, when a hold display having a higher reliability than the original display is displayed, the player may have higher expectations. Furthermore, for a player who knows that the display mode of the hold changes, not only the hold display of the display mode that can be expected originally displayed but also all the hold displays can be expected. There is a case. In addition, even if the display mode is 100% reliability, the display mode may subsequently change (when the reliability is demoted), so a pending display based on the display mode of # 100% reliability is displayed. In some cases, it can be thrilled, and it can be more joyful if it has not changed. Moreover, even if it changes, it may be possible to have some expectation.

  Next, a game machine (pachinko machine) to which the present invention can be applied will be described. In the following description, the same constituent elements as those described so far are denoted by the same reference numerals as those used so far, and redundant description may be omitted.

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the flow of the start winning time sub-side prefetching notice execution process as a modification of the starting winning time sub-side prefetching notice execution process shown in FIG.

  The start-side winning side pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 135 is also the first sub-control unit that is determined to have received the special figure hold increase command in the command process (step S # 307) shown in FIG. 127 (a). It is executed in the effect control process (step S # 309) in the process. First, in step S # 4091a, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading execution flag prepared in RAM # 408 is set to ON. If it is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S # 4091g and remains OFF. If so, the process proceeds to step S # 4091b.

  FIG. 136 (a) is a diagram showing a pending change lottery table stored in the ROM # 406 of the first sub-control unit # 400.

  In step S # 4091b, a hold change lottery is performed for drawing whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display from the predetermined display mode to the prefetch display mode. The predetermined display mode is a default display mode of a blank and white round graphic. This predetermined display mode is a display mode when the pre-reading notice is not performed. Another type of display mode is a pre-reading display mode when a pre-reading notice is being made. Here, as a pre-reading display mode, only one type of display mode of a round figure with hatching on a white background is prepared. Note that the prefetch display mode does not take reliability into consideration, but may be one that takes reliability into consideration as in the above-described embodiment.

  In the pending change lottery table shown in FIG. 136 (a), a random number range is defined for each effect mode on the decorative symbol display device # 208. In the ultra-shortening loss, the shortening loss, the loss, the chance eye all-off, and the normal reach loss, the pre-reading display mode is not selected, and the predetermined display mode (default display mode) is always selected. On the other hand, in the case of normal reach and super reach, in other words, in the case of a predetermined fluctuation time (here, fluctuation time of # 15 seconds or more), a pre-reading notice using the display form of the hold display (hold by the pre-read display form) Display) can be executed. In the case of super reach, there is a higher possibility that the hold display in the specific display mode is selected in the case of winning than in the case of losing.

  In the hold change lottery process, a lottery process using the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 136 (a) is performed. The CPU # 404 of the first sub-control unit # 400 acquires a dedicated random number (possible range is 0 to 99) from the RAM # 408 at the timing of executing the pending change lottery process, and draws a lottery based on the acquired dedicated random number. Do. The lottery using the pending change lottery table shown in FIG. 136 (a) corresponds to a lottery triggered by winning a prize at the special figure starting port (# 230, # 232). In the pending change lottery process, when the lottery is completed, a pending increase command including information indicating that the display mode of the pending display indicating the increased holding is designated according to the lottery result (whether the display mode is the predetermined display mode or the pre-reading display mode) is stored in the RAM # 408. Set to the transmission area.

  In step S # 4091c executed subsequent to step S # 4091b shown in FIG. 135, it is determined whether or not the pending change lottery in the previous step S # 4091b has been won. The winning here is a win for displaying the hold display in a pre-reading display mode, and means that a win is given for performing a pre-reading notice. In other words, when the hold display is displayed in the default display mode (predetermined display mode), it is inappropriate, and the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed to the pre-read display mode corresponds to the win. If unsuccessful (no pre-reading notice), a hold increase command including information specifying the display mode of the hold display indicating the increased hold as the predetermined display mode is set in the transmission area of the RAM # 408, and step S # If the process proceeds to 4091f and the winning (pre-reading notice is performed), the number of times of the pre-reading notice is set (step S # 4091d), and the process proceeds to step S # 4091e. Here, the number of executions of the pre-reading notice is set in the symbol variation display unit of one special figure, and the same number as the number of suspensions is set as the number of executions in the execution number setting area prepared in the RAM # 408. In step S # 4091e, the pre-reading execution flag prepared in RAM # 408 is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S # 4091f.

  On the other hand, if the pre-reading execution flag is turned on in the determination in step S # 4091a, there is a display that is displayed according to the pre-read display mode among the already displayed hold displays, and the hold that indicates the hold that has been increased this time. A lottery is performed as to whether to display the display in a special display mode. First, in step S # 4091g, it is determined whether or not the special figure prior determination result included in the command data of the special figure hold increase command transmitted from the main control unit # 300 is a big hit. Note that there are big hits of 15R (advantageous big hits) and big hits of 2R (unfavorable big hits), but in step S # 4091g, both may be treated as big hits here, or only big hits of 15R May be treated as a big hit here. If it is a big hit, a big hit display mode change lottery process is executed (step S # 4091h), and the process proceeds to step S # 4091k. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time prior determination result included in the command data of the special figure hold increase command transmitted from the main control unit # 300 is a predetermined fluctuation time. Determination is made (step S # 4091i). The predetermined variation time here corresponds to a variation time of 15 seconds or more, which is a variation time in the case of normal reach and a variation time in the case of super reach. If it is not this predetermined variation time, a hold increase command including information specifying the display mode of the hold display indicating the increased hold as the predetermined display mode is set in the transmission area of the RAM # 408, and the process proceeds to step S # 4091f. On the other hand, if it is a predetermined fluctuation time, the display mode change lottery process for losing is executed (step S # 4091j), and the process proceeds to step S # 4091k. In both the lottery in step S # 4091h and the lottery in step S # 4091j, a dedicated random number (possible range is 0 to 99) is acquired from the RAM # 408 at the timing of performing the lottery.

  FIG. 136 (b) is a diagram showing a pending change lottery table that is stored in the ROM # 406 of the first sub-control unit # 400 and is used when the prefetching execution flag is on.

  In the lottery in the case of big hit in step S # 4091h, lottery is performed based on the dedicated random number using the table α shown in FIG. 136 (b), and in the lottery in step S # 4091j, the table β shown in FIG. 136 (b) is used. To draw a lottery based on a dedicated random number. When winning with changes in these lotteries, the hold display increased this time will be displayed in a special display form (here, the display form of the panda figure), and if no change is selected, the hold display increased this time will be displayed. Is displayed in a predetermined display mode (default display mode). The hold display according to the special display mode is a hold display with a high expectation that the result of the success / failure determination based on the hold represented by the hold display is a big hit. The degree of expectation here is a result based on the reliability of the jackpot. When these lotteries are completed, a hold increase command including information designated according to the lottery result is set in the transmission area of the RAM # 408 as a display mode of the hold display indicating the increased hold.

  In step S # 4091k, it is determined whether or not the lottery in the case of big hit in step S # 4091h or the lottery in step S # 4091j has been won with a change, and if not, the process proceeds to step S # 4091f. In the RAM # 408 of the first sub-control unit # 400, a display mode replaceable flag is also prepared. If the win is selected, the replaceable flag is set to ON (step S # 4091l), and step S Proceed to # 4091f. When the replaceable flag is set to ON, the hold display of the pre-read display mode already displayed and the display mode (predetermined display mode) of the hold display indicating the hold increased this time can be switched.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the hold display when the replaceable flag is set to ON and when it remains OFF.

  Hereinafter, the hold based on the oldest winning will be referred to as the first holding, and the subsequent holdings will be referred to as the second holding, the third holding, and the fourth holding from the oldest winning order, and the holding display indicating each holding is the first holding. This is referred to as display, second hold display, third hold display, and fourth hold display.

  A digestion suspension display area # 285 is provided at the left end of the effect display area # 208d in the decorative symbol display device # 208 shown in FIG. This digestion hold display area # 285 is an area in which a digest hold display that is a hold display for start information corresponding to the symbol variation display of the started special figure is displayed. In the digestion hold display area # 285, the first hold display shifts (moves) from the special figure 1 hold display area # 281, and the digest hold display in the digestion hold display area # 285 starts the symbol variation display of the special figure. After being displayed, it may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) and then disappear, or may be displayed until the symbol variation display of the special drawing is finished.

  The left side of FIG. 137 shows the case where the replaceable flag is set on, and the right side of FIG. 137 shows the case where the replaceable flag is set off. In the decorative symbol display device # 208 shown in FIGS. 137 (a) and (a ′), four hold displays h1 to h4 are displayed, and the second hold display h2 is displayed in a pre-read display mode. Has been. Moreover, in the figure (a) in which the replaceable flag is set to ON, the fourth hold display h4 is a display mode of a panda figure, whereas the replaceable flag is set to ON. In (b), the fourth hold display h4 is a predetermined display mode (default display mode).

  In step S # 4091f shown in FIG. 135, the hold increase command set in the transmission area of RAM # 408 is output to the second sub-control unit # 500, and the start winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process ends.

  FIG. 138 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the start winning time sub-side prefetching notice execution process, which is a modification of the variation disclosure sub-side prefetching notice execution process shown in FIG. 132 (a). b) is a diagram showing a display mode replacement lottery table stored in the ROM # 406 of the first sub-control unit # 400.

  In the change disclosure sub-side pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 138 (a), the flag that was the display mode change flag in the change disclosure sub-side pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 132 (a) is changed to a replaceable flag. Except for the points that are replaced and the display mode change process (step S # 3092c) is replaced with the display mode change process (step S # 4092c), the change side disclosure side pre-reading notice shown in FIG. 132 (a) It is the same as the execution process. Here, only the display mode replacement process (step S # 4092c) will be described.

  In the display mode replacement process (step S # 4092c) shown in FIG. 138 (a), a display mode replacement lottery is performed. In the display mode replacement lottery, a dedicated random number (possible range is 0 to 99) is acquired from the RAM # 408, and the lottery is performed based on the dedicated random number using the display mode replacement lottery table shown in FIG. 138 (b). . The replacement lottery here changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the pre-reading display mode to the special display mode (here, the display mode of the panda graphic) and the special display mode (display mode of the panda graphic). Whether the display mode of the hold display displayed in is changed to the pre-read display mode, that is, the hold display displayed in the pre-read display mode and the special display mode (display mode of the panda figure) Whether or not to switch the display position with the hold display that is present. Even if the hold display is displayed in a special display mode (display mode of a panda graphic), the prior determination result corresponding to the hold display may not be a big hit (step S # 4091i, j shown in FIG. 135). ), Referring to the pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination result storage area provided in the RAM # 408, the replacement lottery is performed based on whether or not the pre-determination result is a big hit. If the pre-determined result is a big hit, the winning combination is won with a high probability of 80%. If the pre-determined result is not a big hit, the winning combination is won only with a low probability of 10%.

  Each of FIGS. 137 (b), (b ′), and (b ″) shows a state immediately after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 based on the first suspension is started, The first special symbol display device # 212 shown in each figure starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device # 208 shifts the first reserved display h1 to the digestion pending display region # 285, and the symbol variation of the decorative symbol Display has started. After the first hold display h1 is shifted to the digest hold display area # 285, the first hold display h1 displayed in the digest hold display area # 285 is set as the digest hold display, and the second hold display h2 is the first hold display h2. The hold display, the third hold display h3 can be regarded as the second hold display, and the fourth hold display h4 can be regarded as the third hold display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 137 (b) in which the replaceable flag is set to ON, the second hold display h2 in the pre-reading display mode displayed in FIG. And the fourth hold display h4 in the panda graphic display mode are switched, the second hold display h2 is displayed in the panda graphic display mode, and the fourth hold display h4 is displayed in the prefetch display mode. . On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 137 (b ′) in which the replaceable flag is set to ON, the second hold of the pre-reading display mode displayed in FIG. Neither the display h2 nor the fourth hold display h4 of the panda graphic display mode is changed in the display mode. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 137 (b ″) in which the replaceable flag remains off, the display mode replacement process in step S # 4092c is not executed in the first place, and is displayed in FIG. There is no change in the display mode of the second hold display h2 in the pre-read display mode and the fourth hold display h4 in the predetermined display mode (default display mode).

  Subsequently, some modified examples of the game machine (pachinko machine) described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 138 will be described. In the description so far, the hold display displayed in the digest hold display area # 285 is also referred to as the first hold display. However, in the following description, the hold display displayed in the digest hold display area # 285 is the digest display. The term “hold display” is used as the first hold display only when the special symbol variation display has not yet started.

  In the description so far, the replacement of the hold display is not performed unless the prefetch flag is set to ON, that is, the hold display is not replaced unless the prefetch display mode is displayed. Even if the hold display of the prefetch display mode is not displayed, the hold display may be replaced.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the hold display is replaced while the hold display in the prefetch display mode is not displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device # 208 shown in FIG. 139 (a), four hold displays h1 to h4 are shown. Among these four hold displays, only the fourth hold display h4 is a special display form (display form of a panda figure), and the display forms of the remaining three hold displays h1 to h3 are predetermined display forms (default display form). is there. That is, no hold display according to the prefetch display mode is displayed. In this modification, the digestion suspension display h0 displayed in the digestion suspension display area # 285 continues to be displayed during the special symbol variation display, and further, as shown in FIG. It continues to be displayed while it is displayed.

  In the figure (c), the symbol variation display of the next special figure is started. In accordance with this timing, the hold display is shifted to the left one by one. The display mode of the first hold display h1 after the shift (second hold display before the shift) changes to the special display mode (display mode of the panda figure), and the third hold display h3 after the shift (the fourth hold display before the shift). The display mode of “hold display” is changed to a predetermined display mode (default display mode). It seems to the player that the display modes of the first hold display h1 after the shift and the third hold display h3 after the shift are switched. As a result, it is possible to expect a production effect such that the time of the big hit comes earlier. In addition, the change in the display mode of these two hold displays h1 and h3 is made at the same timing, and it is easy for the player to make an illusion that the display mode is switched, and the display mode of the same panda graphic is switched. In some cases, the display mode can be further expected.

  FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the display mode of the hold display changes even in the digestion hold display area.

  In the decorative symbol display device # 208 shown in FIG. 140 (a), four hold displays h1 to h4 are shown. The display modes of these four hold displays are all predetermined display modes (default display modes). The display mode of the digestion hold display h0 displayed in the digestion hold display area # 285 is also a predetermined display mode (default display mode).

  FIG. 140 (b) shows a state immediately after the start of the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 based on the first hold, and the first special figure display device # 212 starts the symbol fluctuation display and displays the decoration. In the symbol display device # 208, the first hold display h1 shown in FIG. 140 (a) is shifted to the digestion hold display region # 285, and the symbol variation display of the decorative symbols is started. The hold display (digestion hold display h0) shifted to the digest hold display area # 285 is changed from a predetermined display mode to a special display mode (display mode of a panda figure). The player who sees this has the expectation that it will be a big hit in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that has been started, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  However, after a while from the start of the symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 140 (c), an animation in which the panda of the digestion pending display h0 displayed in the digestion pending display area # 285 is pushed into the sphere, Before the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 displayed in the digestion suspension display area # 285 and started in FIG. 140 (b) ends, the panda of the digestion suspension display h0 is hidden in the sphere, and FIG. As shown in (d), the display mode of the digestion hold display h0 displayed in the digestion hold display area # 285 returns to the predetermined display mode. Furthermore, during the symbol variation display of special figure 1 started in FIG. 140 (b), as shown in FIG. 10 (e), one of the displayed hold displays (here, the third hold display). A change occurs in the display mode of h3). The change here is that the pattern and the white round figure of the predetermined display mode are cracked, and the third hold display h3 swings. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 140 (f), when the reach state is formed by the combination of the decorative symbols, the display mode of the third hold display h3 changes greatly, and the pattern of the non-patterned and white round graphic of the predetermined display mode is changed. A panda pops out from inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (g), when the symbol variation display of special figure 1 started in FIG. 140 (b) is finished and a stop symbol is displayed on the first special figure display device # 212, The display mode of the 3 hold display h3 is changed to the display mode (special display mode) of the panda figure.

  In the example shown in FIG. 140, when a display mode with a high degree of expectation (a display mode of a pant figure) is displayed in the change hold display (digestion hold display h0) as shown in FIG. In the stage of FIG. 4D, there is a case where expectation can be given to all the holds for which the hold display is displayed. In this example, the expectation of the big hit in the third hold is increased as a result.

  As a further modification of the example shown in FIG. 140, the change in animation shown in FIGS. (E) to (g) performed in the third hold display h3 is displayed in the digest hold display in the digest hold display area # 285. It may be performed at h0.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the change to the special display mode moves from a hold display indicating a new hold to a hold display indicating an old hold.

  In the decorative symbol display device # 208 shown in FIG. 141 (a), four hold displays h1 to h4 are shown. Among these four hold displays, only the fourth hold display h4 is a special display form (display form of a panda figure), and the display forms of the remaining three hold displays h1 to h3 are predetermined display forms (default display form). is there.

  FIG. 141 (b) shows the state immediately after the start of the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 based on the first suspension, and the first special figure display device # 212 starts the symbol fluctuation display and displays the decoration. In the symbol display device # 208, the first hold display h1 shown in FIG. 141 (a) is shifted to the digest hold display area # 285, and the symbol variation display of the decorative symbols is started. The hold display (digestion hold display h0) shifted to the digest hold display area # 285 remains in the predetermined display mode. The fourth hold display h4 that has been displayed in the special display mode so far is displayed as the third hold display h3 in the special display mode. Next, as shown in FIG. 6C, the panda starts moving, and as shown in FIG. 4D, the display mode of the third hold display h3 changes to the predetermined display mode, and this time, 2 The display mode of the hold display h2 changes to the display mode of a panda figure. Further, as shown in FIG. 5E, the display mode of the second hold display h2 changes to the predetermined display mode, and the display mode of the first hold display h1 changes to the display mode of the panda graphic. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5F, the display mode of the first hold display h1 changes to a predetermined display mode, and the display mode of the digest hold display h0 changes to the display mode of a panda graphic. That is, the change in the display mode has reached the pending display of the change, and the panda displayed in the digestion pending display area # 285 is in a mode of being aged. In this way, the display mode of all hold displays changes to a special display mode that can be expected of jackpots at least for a moment, so the player can have expectations for all the hold displays for at least a moment, There are cases where the interest of the game is improved. Further, as the change of the special display mode approaches the change hold display (digestion hold display h0), it can be expected that the jackpot will arrive earlier, and the entertainment of the game may be greatly excited. Here, the change in the special display mode finally reaches the digestion hold display h0, but the change in the special display mode stops at the hold display (for example, the first hold display h1 and the second hold display h2). There may be a case, and it may not move from the 3rd hold display h3. Moreover, even if the change to the special display mode is a mode of moving from a hold display indicating an old hold (for example, a digest hold display h0 or a first hold display h1) toward a hold display indicating a new hold. It may be a mode that moves randomly.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 141 (g), a reach state is formed by a combination of decorative symbols. In this example, the digest suspension display h0 continues to be displayed in the digest suspension display area # 285 until the symbol variation display of the special symbol ends and the stop symbol is confirmed, but a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation display start of the special symbol. A mode in which the digestion suspension display h0 disappears later may be used. When the predetermined time is short, it is necessary to extend the predetermined time until the player can firmly recognize the display mode change of the digestion hold display h0.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the hold display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device # 208 but is displayed on a dedicated display unit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 142, the light emitting device # 209 such as an LED is used as a display unit dedicated to hold display. In this example as well, as in the example shown in FIG. 141, the display mode changes from the hold display indicating the new hold to the hold display indicating the old hold.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing when the special figure hold display area where the hold display is displayed is covered.

  In front of the decorative symbol display device # 208 (player side), a shield device # 246 simulating a bag covering the decorative symbol display device # 208 is provided. In FIGS. 143 (a) to (c), the shielding device # 246 is open, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device # 208 is visible.

  In addition, in the decorative symbol display device # 208 shown in FIGS. 143 (a) and (b), the fourth hold display h4 is displayed in a special display mode (display mode of the panda figure). In the decorative symbol display device # 208 shown in c) and (d) in FIG. 6, the hold display that has been displayed as the fourth hold display h4 so far is displayed as the third hold display h3, and the display form is a special display form. (Display mode of panda figure). Moreover, in the same figure (d), the shielding apparatus (left door # 246a and right door # 246b) is beginning to close. In FIG. 5E, the shielding devices (left door # 246a and right door # 246b) are completely closed, and the decorative symbol display device # 208 is invisible. In FIG. 5 (f), the shielding devices (left door # 246a and right door # 246b) are opened, and the screen of the decorative symbol display device # 208 is visible again. The 3 hold display h3 becomes a predetermined display mode, and the first hold display h1 displayed in the predetermined display mode is displayed in the special display mode. That is, while the shielding device # 246 is closed, the display modes of the third hold display h3 and the first hold display h1 are switched. By doing so, the player can look forward to the moment when the shielding device # 246 is opened, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, when the special figure holding display area is covered by, for example, the image display of the bag on the decorative symbol display apparatus # 208 without using the movable object such as the shielding apparatus # 246, the special figure holding display area is also covered. The display mode of the hold display may be switched at the timing at which it is displayed.

  Further, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 143, the display mode of the hold display is a period during which the special figure hold display area is covered with a movable object or the like, or the special figure hold display area is not displayed due to a super reach effect or the like. The display mode may be switched only when the player is in a state where the player can visually recognize the display mode. By doing so, there is a case where the player can have an expectation by paying attention to the display mode of the hold display after the change of the display mode of the hold display such as at the time of winning a prize or when the change is disclosed.

  FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the display mode of the hold display is switched in accordance with an operation of a predetermined operation unit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 144, a chance button # 136 is used as the predetermined operation means. In the decorative symbol display device # 208 shown in FIG. 144 (a), the third hold display h3 is displayed in a special display mode (display mode of a panda figure). In addition, the decorative symbol display device # 208 displays a chance button effect that prompts the user to press the chance button # 136 (a symbol labeled “PUSH” is displayed). When the player presses the chance button # 136 during a predetermined period after the start of the display of the chance button effect, the press of the chance button # 136 is accepted and the display mode of the hold display is changed. In this example, the display modes of the third hold display h3 and the digest hold display h0 are switched, and as shown in FIG. 144 (b), the display mode of the third hold display h3 changes to the predetermined display mode and the digest hold is performed. The display mode of the display h0 changes to the special display mode. By doing so, the player may be able to expect a big hit also in the symbol variation display of the special symbol currently being performed.

  Subsequently, when the chance button effect is displayed again on the decorative symbol display device # 208 shown in FIG. 144 (c) and the chance button # 136 is pressed during a predetermined period, the display mode of the hold display is changed. Return to the display mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the display mode of the third hold display h3 changes to the special display mode, and the display mode of the digestion hold display h0 changes to the predetermined display mode. By doing so, the player may be expected to have both display modes before and after the replacement.

  As a condition for returning to the display mode before the replacement, in addition to the operation means (chance button # 136) being operated, a condition may be set that a predetermined time has passed since the display mode was switched. However, it may be conditional on returning from the Super Reach effect screen to the symbol confirmation display screen based on the combination of decorative symbols, or on the condition that the special figure hold display area (effect display area # 208d) is covered by the movable object. May be.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example in which whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed according to the operation timing of the predetermined operation unit is changed.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 145, the chance button # 136 is used as the predetermined operation means. In the decorative symbol display device # 208 shown in FIG. 145 (a), the third hold display h3 is displayed in an operation promotion display mode (here, a display mode that prompts the user to press the chance button # 136). When the player presses the chance button # 136 at a predetermined timing, the press of the chance button # 136 is accepted, and as shown in FIG. 145 (b ′), the display mode of the third hold display h3 is the first special display mode. (In this case, a display mode in which two exclamation marks are arranged). On the other hand, if the player depresses the chance button # 136 at a timing deviated from the predetermined timing, the depressing of the chance button # 136 is not accepted, and the display mode of the third hold display h3 as shown in FIG. 145 (b). Remains in the operation promotion display mode. Then, when the player presses the chance button # 136 at a specific timing in a state where the hold display of the operation promotion display mode is displayed, the pressing of the chance button # 136 is accepted, as shown in FIG. 145 (c). In addition, the third hold display h3 displayed in the operation promotion display mode changes to the predetermined display mode, and the second hold display h2 displayed in the predetermined display mode is changed to the second special display mode in which a question mark is written. Change. The reliability of the jackpot is different between the first special display mode in which two exclamation marks are arranged and the second special display mode in which a question mark is written. Here, the first special display mode is different from the second special display mode. The reliability is higher. In the example shown in FIG. 145, since the display mode of the hold display that can be seen depends on the pressing timing of the chance button # 136, the player is encouraged to participate in the game, and the hold display of the operation promotion display mode appears. In some cases, the appearance of all display modes can be expected.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating an example in which two types of special display modes having different expectations are used.

  Here, the different degrees of expectation are results based on the fact that the reliability of the jackpot is different. In this example, in addition to the predetermined display mode, a first special display mode in which two question marks are arranged, and a second special display mode in which divergence of light is added to the predetermined display mode are prepared as the display mode of the hold display. ing. Also in this example, the hold display in the special display mode is a hold display with a high expectation that the result of the success / failure determination based on the hold represented by the hold display is a big hit, and the second special display mode is the first special display. The degree of expectation is set higher than the aspect. The predetermined display mode is the display mode with the lowest expectation.

  In the decorative symbol display device # 208 shown in FIG. 146 (a), the display mode of the second hold display h2 is displayed in the first special display mode with low expectation, and the display mode of the fourth hold display h4 is expected. It is displayed in the second special display mode with a high degree.

  When the symbol variation display of the special figure based on the hold indicated by the first hold display h1 is started, the first hold display h1 is shifted to the digest hold display area # 285. In addition, the second hold display h2 that has been displayed in the first special display mode is changed to the second special display mode and is displayed as the first hold display h1, and is displayed in the second special display mode so far. The fourth hold display h4 changes to the first special display mode and is displayed as the third hold display h3. That is, the display modes of the two hold displays that have been displayed in the special display mode are switched. When the player changes the first hold display h1 to the second special display mode with a high expectation, the expectation of the next symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the first hold) increases, and the next symbol There may be great expectations for variable display.

  FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating an example different from FIG. 146 in which the hold display in the first special display mode and the hold display in the second special display mode appear.

  In the first special symbol display device # 212 shown in FIG. 147 (a), symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is started, and in the decorative symbol display device # 208, variation display of the decorative symbol is started. Yes. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device # 208, the display mode of the second hold display h2 is displayed in the first special display mode with low expectation, and the other hold displays h0, h1, and h3 are all in the predetermined display mode ( The default display mode) is displayed. In this example, the digestion suspension display h0 displayed in the digestion suspension display region # 285 disappears after a lapse of a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) from the start of the symbol variation display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (b), one ball is awarded to the first special figure starting port # 230 during the symbol variation display, and the holding is increased by one. At the time of winning, the increased fourth hold display h4 is displayed in the second special display mode.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 147 (c), the symbol variation display ends, and the special symbol display device # 212 stops and displays the special symbol losing symbol, and the decorative symbol display device # 208 displays The combination of decorative pattern loss is stopped and displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (d), the first hold display h1 displayed so far is shifted to the digest hold display area # 285, and the next symbol variation display is started. Simultaneously with the start of the next symbol variation display, the second hold display h2 that has been displayed in the first special display mode so far changes to the second special display mode and is displayed as the first hold display h1. The fourth hold display h4 that has been displayed in the second special display mode until now is displayed as the third hold display h3 with the display mode unchanged. Accordingly, at this stage, two hold displays (h1, h3) are displayed in the second special display mode.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed from the symbol variation display started in FIG. 147 (d), the third hold display h3 that has been displayed in the second special display mode so far changes to the first special display mode. That is, the third hold display h3 changes to a display mode in which the degree of expectation is lowered at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 147 (f), the symbol variation display is finished, the special symbol losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device # 212, and the decorative symbol display device # 208 is decorated. The combination of symbol lost is stopped and displayed.

  In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 147 (d), once the player holds the impression that the hold of both the first hold and the third hold is “pretty expectable”, the time is increased as shown in FIG. ) The fact that the display of the third hold is in fact a change that can be expected a little is revealed at the timing shown in (2), so that the symbol change corresponding to the first hold can be expected and the expectation of the symbol change corresponding to the third hold May not be excessive.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the display mode is switched after the hold display once disappears.

  In the first special symbol display device # 212 shown in FIG. 148 (a), symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is started, and in the decorative symbol display device # 208, variation display of the decorative symbol is started. Yes. Further, in the special symbol display area (effect display area # 208d) in the decorative symbol display device # 208, the display mode of the fourth hold display h4 is displayed in the second special display mode with high expectation, and other hold The displays h0 to h3 are all displayed in a predetermined display mode (default display mode). In this example, the digestion suspension display h0 displayed in the digestion suspension display area # 285 continues to be displayed until the symbol variation display ends and the stop symbol confirmation display ends.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), after the symbol variation display is started, based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (here, the reach state is formed), the second special display mode has been used so far. The displayed fourth hold display h4 changes to a predetermined display mode. That is, the fourth hold display h4 changes to a display mode in which the degree of expectation is lowered at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display. By doing so, there may be a case where excessive expectation for the symbol variation corresponding to the fourth suspension can be suppressed.

  Eventually, it evolved into super reach, and as shown in FIGS. 148 (c) and 148 (d), the decorative symbol change display moved to the right corner of the decorative symbol display device # 208, and the decorative symbol display device # 208 Shows a super-reaching effect image (here, an animation of a bowling game) so as to cover the effect display area # 208d. Accordingly, all the hold indications h0 to h4 disappear once.

  Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed (in this example, the bowling is lost as shown in FIG. 148 (d) during this time), the symbol fluctuation display is ended as shown in FIG. On the figure display device # 212, the special symbol losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device # 208 switches from the super-reach effect image, avoiding the effect display area # 208d, The combination is stopped. At this time, the hold display is restored, and in FIG. 148 (e), the first hold display h1 that has been displayed in the predetermined display mode is changed to the second special display mode, and is displayed in the second special display mode so far. The held fourth hold display h4 changes to a predetermined display mode. That is, when viewed from the time of disclosure of changes in figures, the display modes of the first hold display h1 and the fourth hold display h4 are switched. In this way, the display mode of the two hold indications (h1, h4) has changed before the end of the reach, which can surprise the player and give expectation to the fluctuation corresponding to the first hold. There are cases where it is possible.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the hold display in the special display mode is switched.

  In the decorative symbol display device # 208 shown in FIG. 149 (a), the display mode of the second hold display h2 is displayed in the second special display mode, and the other hold displays h0 to h3 are all in the predetermined display mode (default Display mode).

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 149 (b), the symbol variation display is terminated, and the special symbol losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device # 212, and the decorative symbol display device # 208 includes The combination of decorative pattern loss is stopped and displayed. In this state, there is no change in the display mode of the hold display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (c), when the next symbol variation display is started, the second hold display h2 that has been displayed in the second special display mode so far changes to the predetermined display mode and the first hold display. Displayed as display h1. Further, the fourth hold display h4 that has been displayed in the predetermined display mode so far changes to the second special display mode and is displayed as the third hold display h3. That is, the display modes of the first hold display h1 and the third hold display h3 after the start of change are switched. By doing so, the player may be able to have a greater jackpot expectation for the third hold indicated by the third hold display h3 that has been switched from the predetermined display mode to the second special display mode. In addition, there is a case where a newer hold than a hold with a high expectation can always have an expectation because the hold display with a high expectation is postponed.

  The pachinko machine # 100 of the embodiment described above has two types of special drawings, but may have one type of special drawings. In this case, in the above description, “special drawing 2” is simply read as “special drawing”, and the same processing as the processing related to special drawing 2 is performed. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the special figure 2 priority change machine has been described as an example, but a winning order change machine or a simultaneous change machine may be used. Further, the process related to the special figure 1 may be performed in the same manner as the process related to the special figure 2. Furthermore, in the case of fluctuation in winning order, it must be assumed that the symbol variation of Special Figure 1 is performed even during the electric support state, and the symbol variation of Special Figure 2 is performed even during the non-electric support state. Therefore, the hold display of special figure 1 and the hold display of special figure 2 may be displayed in a combined form without being divided.

  Furthermore, although the example which applied this invention to the pachinko machine was demonstrated here, this invention is applicable also to a rotation game machine (slot machine).

In the above description, “starting information storage means (for example, RAM # 308 of the main control unit # 300) capable of storing starting information generated based on the game ball entering the starting area, and the one starting information. The start information storage means is provided by performing one start hold display (for example, hold displays h1 to h4) in a predetermined display form (for example, a display form of a blank and white round figure (default display form)). The number of start pending notification means (for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit # 400, the second sub-control unit # 500, and the decorative symbol display device # 208) capable of reporting the number of the start information stored in , A go / no-go decision means (for example, the CPU # 304 of the main control unit # 300) for making a go / no-go decision based on the start information acquired from the start information storage means, and the result of the go / no-go determination after starting symbol variation The symbol display means (the first special symbol display device # 212 and the second special symbol display device # 214) capable of executing the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the corresponding symbol mode, and the specific success / failure among the results of the success / failure determination Game control means (for example, main control unit # 300) that starts a gaming state (for example, 15R jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player after stopping and displaying the symbol aspect corresponding to the determination result (for example, 15R jackpot) CPU # 304) and the start hold display on the start hold number notifying means, unlike the predetermined display mode, a specific display mode (depending on the reliability that the result of the determination is the specific determination result) For example, it includes a start hold display control means (for example, the CPU # 404 of the first sub-control unit # 400) that can be displayed with a pattern or a black round graphic display mode. In the gaming machine, the start hold display control means displays on the start hold number notifying means a specific start hold display according to the specific display mode and one or more start hold displays different from the specific start hold display. (For example, the state shown in the upper diagram of each figure in FIG. 134), the display mode of the specific start hold display is changed to a different display mode, and at least one of the one or more start hold displays One start hold display can be changed from the predetermined display mode to the specific display mode (for example, refer to the lower figure in each figure of FIG. 134).
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  In addition, changing the display mode of the specific start hold display here to a different display mode means changing the display mode to a specific display mode that represents a reliability different from the reliability represented by the specific display mode that has been displayed so far. It may be possible to change to the predetermined display mode. The predetermined display mode can also be viewed as an example of a specific display mode with a reliability of 0.

  Further, “the start hold display control means indicates the reliability represented by the specific display mode of the specific start hold display that has been displayed so far, at least of the specific start hold display and the one or more start hold displays. It distributes to one start hold display, and the start hold number notification means displays each start hold display in a specific display mode according to the assigned reliability (see, for example, FIGS. 134 (a) and (b)). A game stand characterized by being capable of being). ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the start hold display control means has a reliability different from the reliability represented by the specific display mode of the specific start hold display that has been displayed so far, the specific start hold display and the one or more start holds. Distribution is made between at least one start hold display among the displays, and each start hold display is displayed on the start hold number notifying means in a specific display mode corresponding to the assigned reliability (for example, FIG. 134 (c)). A gaming table characterized by being capable of being referred to). ”Was also explained.

  Further, “the start hold display control means changes the display mode of the specific start hold display and the display mode of at least one start hold display among the one or more start hold displays at the same timing. (For example, refer to the lower figure in each figure in FIG. 134). ”Was also explained.

  Further, “the start hold display control means notifies the start hold display of the start hold display so that the start hold display in the specific display mode indicating the highest reliability is visible to the player side than the other start hold displays. A game table characterized in that it can be displayed on a means (see, for example, FIGS. 134 (b) and (d)). ”Was also explained.

The start hold display control means is the highest after changing the display mode of the specific start hold display and changing the display mode of at least one start hold display of the one or more start hold displays. Even if the start hold display can be displayed on the start hold number notifying means so that the start hold display by the specific display mode representing the reliability is visible to the player side than the other start hold displays. Good.
In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of icons,
At least a part of the area in the display means is an icon display area,
At least a part of the icon display area is a first display area [for example, digestion suspension area # 285 in FIG. 141],
At least a part of the icon display area is a second display area [for example, an area in which the first hold display h1 to the fourth hold display h4 shown in FIG. 141 (a) are displayed (hold icon display area)]. ,
The display means is means for displaying the number of suspensions by the number of icons displayed in the second display area,
One of the icons displayed in the second display area is displayed in the first display area of the display means when the symbol variation display is started [for example, the first hold shown in FIG. 141 (a). [Hold display where display h1 is shifted to digestion hold display area # 285]
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display [for example, the display shown in FIG. 141 (b)],
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display [for example, the display shown in FIG. 141 (g)],
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a third display,
The first display is a display including a first icon [for example, a predetermined display mode (default display mode)]
The first display is a display including a second icon [for example, a special display mode (display mode of a panda figure)]
The second display is a display including a display in which the first icon in the first display changes to the second icon in the first display,
The second display is a display including a display in which the second icon in the first display changes to the first icon in the first display,
The first icon is an icon displayed in the icon display area,
The second icon is an icon displayed in the second display area,
The third display is a display including a display in which the first icon in the first display changes to the second icon in the first display,
The third display is a display in which the second icon in the first display does not change to the first icon in the first display,
The second display is a display configured to be displayed after the first animation [for example, FIG. 141 (c) to FIG. 141 (f)] is displayed on the display means,
When the first animation is displayed on the display unit, at least a part of the first animation may overlap at least a part of other icons displayed in the icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.
According to the above game console, it is possible to enhance the effect of the on-hold icon and further enhance the interest of the game.
Also,
“The determination result corresponding to the first icon in the first display and the determination result corresponding to the second icon in the second display are the same result,
The determination result corresponding to the second icon in the first display and the determination result corresponding to the first icon in the second display are the same result.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The first animation is an animation that changes a display mode of an icon displayed in the icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
`` The first icon is an icon displayed in one of the first display area and the second display area,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second animation [for example, a moving animation of a hold icon],
The second animation is an animation that reduces the number of icons displayed in the second display area when the number of holdings decreases.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a third animation [e.g., an increase animation of a hold icon],
The third animation is an animation that increases the number of icons displayed in the second display area when the number of holdings increases.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a fourth animation [for example, an animation for erasing a variable icon],
The fourth animation is an animation that erases an icon displayed in the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a fifth animation [for example, a standby icon standby animation],
The fifth animation is an animation in which an icon displayed in the icon display area may be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“With symbol display means [for example, special symbol display devices 212, 214] capable of displaying at least the symbol variation display,
The first animation is an animation that is started and ended during the execution of the symbol variation display once.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display mode of the first icon is the first display mode,
The display mode of the second icon is a second display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The first icon is an icon displayed in a first display position [for example, a position where the digestion suspension display h0 is displayed in the digestion suspension region # 285 illustrated in FIG. 141 (b)]
The second icon is an icon displayed at a second display position [for example, a position at which the third hold display h3 shown in FIG. 141 (b) is displayed].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The display means is means capable of executing at least the second display when the first condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“Equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136] provided at a position where the player can operate,
The establishment requirement of the first condition is a requirement including at least that the operation means has been operated.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The display means is means capable of executing at least the second display when the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition different from the first condition.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The second icon is an icon displayed on the display means as a pre-reading notice.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“Attempt determination means capable of at least executing a hit / fail determination [e.g., CPU 304 executing special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)];
Prefetch notice means capable of executing the prefetch notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, hold icon display area, digest hold display area # 285, first sub-control section 400, second sub-control section 500];
With
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of at least executing the prefetch notice when a first prefetch notice condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The requirement for establishing the first look-ahead notice condition is a requirement including at least that the result of the success / failure determination is a result of the first success / failure determination [for example, a success / failure determination result of jackpot]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The requirements for the establishment of the first look-ahead notice condition are requirements including at least winning the first notice lottery,
The first notice lottery is a notice lottery that is won with a first probability.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The prefetch notice means is capable of at least executing the prefetch notice when the second prefetch notice condition is satisfied,
The second prefetch notice condition is different from the first prefetch notice condition.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The requirement for establishing the second prefetch notice condition is a requirement including at least that the result of the success / failure determination is a result of the second success / failure determination [e.g.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
`` The requirement for the establishment of the second pre-reading notice condition is a requirement including at least that the second notice lottery is won,
The second notice lottery is a notice lottery that is won with a second probability.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“First control means [for example, main control unit 300];
Second control means [e.g., first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500] capable of at least executing control based on a command from the first control means;
With
The second control means is a means provided on a separate substrate from the first control means,
The second control means is means capable of controlling at least the display means,
The second control means includes at least determination means for determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice [for example, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400, the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
`` The second control means is a means constituted by a plurality of control boards,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The case where the first prefetch notice condition is satisfied is a case where the determination unit determines to perform the prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“First control means [for example, main control unit 300];
Second control means [e.g., first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500] capable of at least executing control based on a command from the first control means;
With
The second control means is a means provided on a separate substrate from the first control means,
The second control means is means capable of controlling at least the display means,
The second control means includes at least determination means for determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice [for example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500],
The case where the second prefetch notice condition is satisfied is a case where the determination unit determines to perform the prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
'The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing a continuous notice as the prefetch notice.
The continuous notice is a notice that can be executed at least in a plurality of times the symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The continuous notice is a notice that is continuously given during the execution of the multiple symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,
“Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons;
Operation means [for example, a chance button 136] provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game machine equipped with
At least a part of the area in the display means is an icon display area,
At least a part of the icon display area is a first display area [for example, digestion suspension area # 285 in FIG. 141],
At least a part of the icon display area is a second display area [for example, an area in which the first hold display h1 to the fourth hold display h4 shown in FIG. 141 (a) are displayed (hold icon display area)]. ,
The display means is means for displaying the number of suspensions by the number of icons displayed in the second display area,
One of the icons displayed in the second display area is displayed in the first display area of the display means when the symbol variation display is started [for example, the first hold shown in FIG. 141 (a). [Hold display where display h1 is shifted to digestion hold display area # 285]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display [for example, the display shown in FIG. 141 (b)],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display [for example, the display shown in FIG. 141 (g)],
The display means is means capable of displaying a third display,
The first display is a display including a first icon [for example, a predetermined display mode (default display mode)]
The first display is a display including a second icon [for example, a special display mode (display mode of a panda figure)]
The first icon is an icon displayed in the icon display area,
The second icon is an icon displayed in the second display area,
The second display means that the display mode of the first icon in the first display (hereinafter referred to as “first mode”) is the display mode of the second icon in the first display. (Hereinafter referred to as “the second aspect”) is a display including a display that changes,
The second display is a display including a display in which the second aspect changes to the first aspect.
The third display is a display including a display in which the first aspect changes to the second aspect,
The third display is a display in which the second aspect does not change to the first aspect.
The second display is a display configured to be displayed after the first animation [for example, FIG. 141 (c) to FIG. 141 (f)] is displayed on the display means,
When the first animation is displayed on the display means, at least a part of the first animation may overlap at least a part of other icons displayed in the icon display area,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the first display, the second display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.
Also,
“The determination result corresponding to the first icon in the first display and the determination result corresponding to the second icon in the second display are the same result,
The determination result corresponding to the second icon in the first display and the determination result corresponding to the first icon in the second display are the same result.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The first animation is an animation that changes a display mode of an icon displayed in the icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
`` The first icon is an icon displayed in one of the first display area and the second display area,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying a second animation [for example, a moving animation of a hold icon]
The second animation is an animation that reduces the number of icons displayed in the second display area when the number of holdings decreases.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying a third animation [for example, an increase animation of a hold icon]
The third animation is an animation that increases the number of icons displayed in the second display area when the number of holdings increases.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The display means is means capable of displaying a fourth animation [e.g., a deletion icon deletion animation]
The fourth animation is an animation that erases an icon displayed in the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means is means capable of displaying a fifth animation [for example, a standby icon standby animation]
The fifth animation is an animation in which an icon displayed in the icon display area may be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“With symbol display means [for example, special symbol display devices 212, 214] capable of displaying the symbol variation display,
The first animation is an animation that is started and ended during the execution of the symbol variation display once.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The second aspect is a display aspect different from the first aspect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The first icon is an icon displayed in a first display position [for example, a position where the digestion suspension display h0 is displayed in the digestion suspension region # 285 illustrated in FIG. 141 (b)]
The second icon is an icon displayed at a second display position [for example, a position at which the third hold display h3 shown in FIG. 141 (b) is displayed].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The display means is means capable of executing the second display when the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition that is satisfied except when the operation means is operated during display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The second icon is an icon displayed on the display means as a pre-reading notice.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“Attempt determination means capable of executing the hit determination [e.g., CPU 304 executing special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)];
Prefetching notice means capable of executing the prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, hold icon display area, digestion hold display area # 285, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500];
With
The prefetch notice unit is a unit capable of executing the prefetch notice when a first prefetch notice condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The requirement for establishing the first look-ahead notice condition is a requirement including at least that the result of the success / failure determination is a result of the first success / failure determination [for example, a success / failure determination result of jackpot]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The requirements for the establishment of the first look-ahead notice condition are requirements including at least winning the first notice lottery,
The first notice lottery is a notice lottery that is won with a first probability.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice when the second prefetch notice condition is satisfied,
The second prefetch notice condition is different from the first prefetch notice condition.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
`` The requirement for establishment of the second prefetch notice condition is a requirement including at least that the result of the success / failure determination is a result of the second success / failure determination,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
`` The requirement for the establishment of the second pre-reading notice condition is a requirement including at least that the second notice lottery is won,
The second notice lottery is a notice lottery that is won with a second probability.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“First control means [for example, main control unit 300];
Second control means [e.g., first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500] capable of executing control based on a command from the first control unit;
With
The second control means is a means provided on a separate substrate from the first control means,
The second control means is means capable of controlling the display means,
The second control means includes means for determining whether to perform the prefetching notice [for example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
`` The second control means is a means constituted by a plurality of control boards,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The case where the first prefetch notice condition is satisfied is a case where the determination unit determines to perform the prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“First control means [for example, main control unit 300];
Second control means [e.g., first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500] capable of executing control based on a command from the first control unit;
With
The second control means is a means provided on a separate substrate from the first control means,
The second control means is means capable of controlling the display means,
The second control means includes means for determining whether to perform the pre-reading notice [for example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500],
The case where the second prefetch notice condition is satisfied is a case where the determination unit determines to perform the prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
'The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing a continuous notice as the prefetch notice.
The continuous notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of times the symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The continuous notice is a notice that is continuously given during the execution of the multiple symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.
(Appendix A)
Profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit after a specific symbol is fixedly displayed on the symbol display means;
A symbol fixed residual number display means capable of indicating the remaining number of symbol fixed displays by the number of predetermined symbols;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol fixed remaining number display means displays a first pattern of the predetermined patterns in a first display mode,
The symbol fixed remaining number display means displays a second pattern in the second display mode among the predetermined patterns,
The symbol fixed remaining number display means switches the display mode of the first design to the second display mode on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and switches the second design to the first display mode. A characteristic game stand.

  According to this game stand, various effects can be performed.

The symbol fixed remaining number display means may indicate the number obtained by adding 1 of the variation (the symbol variation already started) to the reserved number.
(Appendix B)
In the game stand described in Appendix A,
A go / no-go determination means for making a go / no-go determination based on the fact that a predetermined go / no-go determination condition is satisfied;
With
The symbol display means, based on the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means being a specific success / failure determination result, confirms and displays the specific symbol.
The symbol fixed remaining number display means displays the first display mode with a first probability based on the specific success / failure determination result, with a second probability lower than the first probability. A game table that displays the second display mode.

According to the gaming table described in Appendix B, only a display mode with high reliability can be displayed, and other display modes before and after that can be expected even if they are not display modes with high reliability. There is. Further, the player's impression on the display mode changes depending on whether or not the changed display mode can be expected to be a big hit, and the player is not bored. For example, when a low-reliability hold is changed to a high-reliability hold and two holds that can be expected for a certain period are displayed, the expectation for the jackpot is further increased. In addition, once the display mode with high reliability is suddenly changed to a display mode with low reliability, another low-reliability display mode is changed to a display mode with high reliability at a predetermined timing. In addition to giving anxiety for a certain period and giving a sense of expectation when the image is displayed again, the player may have a different sense of expectation even in the same display mode.
(Appendix C)
In the game stand described in Appendix A or B,
The first display mode is a specific display mode displayed with the first probability based on the result of the specific success / failure determination,
The game table characterized in that the second display mode is a normal display mode displayed with the second probability.

  According to the gaming table described in Appendix C, the specific display mode that has been displayed once suddenly changes to the normal display mode, and another normal display mode is changed to the specific display mode at a predetermined timing. In addition, when the specific display mode is displayed again, more expectation is given, so that the player's expectation may be different even in the same display mode.

In addition, when a display mode with high reliability is displayed, there are cases where expectations can be given to all display modes including a display mode with high reliability.
(Appendix D)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices A to C,
The game table characterized in that the symbol fixed remaining number display means switches the second design to the first display mode simultaneously with switching the first design to the second display mode.

According to the gaming table described in Appendix D, the player is illusioned that the display mode with high reliability has been replaced with another display mode, and further expectation is given to the switched display mode even in the same display mode. There are cases where you can.
(Appendix E)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices A to D,
The symbol fixed remaining number display means displays the first display mode based on the first remaining number of times of the remaining number of symbol fixed display, and the second number smaller than the first remaining number of times. The game table is characterized in that the second display mode is displayed with the remaining number of times.

  According to the gaming table described in Appendix E, the player has an illusion that the display mode with high reliability has overcome (skip) other display modes, and the player has more expectation for the display mode. There is a case that can be made.

  Note that, in the gaming machine described above, the first display mode may be displayed when the prefetch result of the determination result information corresponding to the second display mode is a specific determination result. . In this case, the first display mode and the second display mode may be switched at a predetermined timing.

  The display mode may be switched or switched at a predetermined timing. For example, when the display is switched from reach to symbol display, when it is shielded by a movable object, or the chance button is pressed. Or when an effect for switching the display mode is performed. If the player is not allowed to recognize the switching or switching of the display mode, the position of the hold display displayed in the specific display mode has suddenly changed. It may be possible to have expectations for hold. On the other hand, when making a player recognize, there is a case where the player can pay attention to the change of the display mode and improve the expectation of the display mode.

  Further, in a mode in which a pattern with a high reliability display mode (holding display) is displayed in front of the pattern with a low reliability display mode (player side), a pattern with a high reliability display mode is displayed. The pattern of the display mode with low reliability displayed on the rear side may be replaced. In addition, the display mode may be switched based on the display mode corresponding to the result information of the specific success / failure determination being displayed on the rear side. By doing this, the image of the display mode with high reliability that was originally displayed changes to a display mode with low reliability, and the display mode with low reliability changes to a display mode with high reliability. In some cases, the player may recognize that the picture displayed in a high display mode may not be expected, and can suggest to the player that the picture in the display mode displayed on the rear side can actually be expected. is there. Further, after the display mode is switched, the display state before switching may be restored. By doing so, the display mode once displayed before is returned to the original position (rear), so that the player may not be excessively expected. In addition, since the display mode once displayed at the back is returned to the original position (front), the player may be expected to have more expectation.

Still further, the first display mode (for example, the display mode with a reliability of 50%) is different from the first display mode and the second display mode (for example, the default display mode) by the effect control means. You may make it switch to this 2nd display mode through a different 3rd display mode (for example, display mode of 100% reliability). In this way, the changing process can be shown, and the player may not only get tired of the player, but also pay attention to the display mode as well as other effects.
(Appendix F)
When a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the determination result determination unit capable of executing at least the determination of success / failure;
After performing symbol variation, symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination;
A prefetch notice means capable of starting at least a prefetch notice;
A post-judgment notice means capable of starting at least a post-judgment notice;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The pre-reading notice can be started before the success / failure determination,
The post-determination notice is started only after the success / failure determination,
The prefetch notice means can execute the prefetch notice according to the first aspect,
The post-determination notice means can execute the post-determination notice in a second mode (for example, a mode displayed in the digestion hold display area # 285),
The gaming machine characterized in that the first aspect and the second aspect are related aspects.

  In the above description, the term “starting information storage unit” may be replaced with the term “holding storage unit”, or the term “starting hold number notifying unit” may be replaced with the term “holding display unit”. Then, the term “start hold display control means” may be replaced with the term “notice means”. Further, the words “start hold display” or “hold display” may be replaced with the words “hold icon”.

That is, “when a predetermined hold storage condition is satisfied (for example, a condition that a game ball enters the start area, etc.), a hold storage means that can store at least predetermined start information as a hold (for example, start Information storage means),
When a predetermined hold display condition is satisfied, a hold display means (for example, a start hold number notification means) capable of displaying at least one hold icon (for example, start hold display) corresponding to the one hold in a predetermined display mode. )When,
When a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the determination result determination unit capable of executing at least the determination of success / failure;
When a predetermined symbol variation condition is satisfied, after symbol variation is performed, a symbol variation stop display (for example, symbol variation display) that at least displays a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure can be executed. Display means;
When a predetermined notice condition is satisfied, a notice means (for example, a start hold display control means) capable of executing at least a predetermined notice (for example, a prefetch notice);
A game machine equipped with
The notice means, as the notice, is different from the predetermined display form in that a hold icon (in accordance with a specific display form corresponding to a reliability that the result of the success / failure determination becomes a big hit determination result (for example, a specific success / failure determination result)). For example, it is possible to display start hold display)
The notice means displays on the hold display means a specific hold icon (for example, a specific start hold display) according to the specific display mode and one or a plurality of hold icons (for example, a start hold display) different from the specific hold icon. In this state, the display mode of the specific hold icon is changed to a different display mode, and at least one hold icon of the one or more hold icons (for example, start hold display) is changed from the predetermined display mode to the predetermined display mode. It can be changed to a specific display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. Can be shown as

  In addition, “the notice means indicates the reliability represented by the specific display mode of the specific hold icon that has been displayed so far by the specific hold icon and at least one hold icon of the one or more hold icons. It is also possible to distribute each other and display the respective hold icons on the hold display means in a specific display mode corresponding to the assigned reliability.

  In addition, “the notice unit has a reliability different from the reliability represented by the specific display mode of the specific hold icon that has been displayed so far, at least one of the specific hold icon and the one or more hold icons. It is also possible to distribute between two hold icons, and to display each hold icon in the specific display mode according to the assigned reliability on the hold display means.

  Further, “the notice means can change the display mode of the specific hold icon and the display mode of at least one hold icon of the one or more hold icons at the same timing. It can also be shown as

  Furthermore, “the notice means can display the hold icon on the hold display means so that the hold icon in the specific display mode representing the highest reliability is visible to the player side than the other hold icons. It can also be shown as

(Appendix A)
A starting area where game balls can enter,
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A hold display means capable of at least displaying the hold icon;
State control means capable of executing at least control for starting an advantageous state advantageous to the player;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of stopping and displaying at least the first symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the first success / failure determination when the result of the success / failure determination is the result of the first success / failure determination,
The symbol display means is capable of stopping and displaying at least the second symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the second success / failure determination when the result of the success / failure determination is a result of the second success / failure determination. ,
The result of the second success / failure determination is a result of the success / failure determination different from the result of the first success / failure determination,
The second symbol aspect is a symbol aspect different from the first symbol aspect,
The state control means is capable of at least starting the advantageous state after the second symbol form is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means.
The symbol display means can execute at least the symbol variation display when the first condition is satisfied,
The hold display means is capable of at least increasing the hold icon when the second condition is satisfied,
The establishment requirement of the first condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
The establishment requirement of the second condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a first hold icon,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a second hold icon,
The display mode of the first hold icon is the first display mode,
The display mode of the second hold icon is a second display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The hold display means is capable of at least performing replacement display,
The replacement display is a display that changes at least the first hold icon to the second hold icon,
The replacement display is a display that changes at least the second hold icon to the first hold icon,
The replacement display is a display whose replacement is difficult to visually recognize,
The first hold icon is a hold icon displayed at the first display position,
The second hold icon is a hold icon displayed at the second display position,
The second display position is a display position different from the first display position,
The first hold icon represents at least that the reliability regarding the start of the advantageous state is the first reliability,
The second hold icon represents at least that the reliability regarding the start of the advantageous state is the second reliability,
The second reliability is higher than the first reliability.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a digestion hold icon that is a hold icon corresponding to the symbol variation display in association with the start of the symbol variation display,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least an undigested hold icon that is a hold icon that does not correspond to the design change display in relation to the start of the design change display,
The hold display means can display at least the undigested hold icon at one display position of the first display position and the second display position,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least the digestion hold icon at the other display position of the first display position and the second display position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C)
A game machine as described in appendix a or i,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a third hold icon,
The display mode of the third hold icon is a third display mode,
The third display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The third display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode,
The third hold icon represents at least that the reliability related to the start of the advantageous state is the third reliability,
The third reliability is lower than the first reliability.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a to c,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
The hold display means can execute at least the replacement display when the third condition is satisfied,
The establishment requirement of the third condition is a requirement including at least that the operation means has been operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix O)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a to d,
The hold display means is capable of moving and displaying at least another hold position of the hold icon displayed at the first display position when the fourth condition is satisfied,
The hold display means is capable of moving and displaying at least another hold position of the hold icon displayed at the second display position when the fourth condition is satisfied,
Pre-fetch notice means that can perform pre-read notice,
The prefetch notice means is capable of at least executing the prefetch notice by displaying the second hold icon on the hold display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if it is a structural requirement contained only in description of the example form, an Example, embodiment, or additional remarks demonstrated above, the structural requirement is changed to other exemplary forms, an Example, embodiment, or additional remarks. You may apply to.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 208 Decorative symbol display device 208a-208c Symbol display area 208d Effect display area 208e 4th symbol display area 212 Special figure 1 display device 214 Special figure 2 display device 300 Main control part 400 First sub control part 500 Second sub Control unit 800 Fluctuating icon display area 801, 802, 803, 811 Fluctuating icon 900 Holding icon display area 901, 902, 903, 904, 905, 911 Holding icon # 100 Pachinko machine # 208 Decoration symbol display device # 208d Effect display area # 212 1st special figure display device # 214 2nd special figure display device # 230 1st special figure start port # 232 2nd special view start port # 2321 Vane member # 234 Variable prize opening # 2341 Door member # 300 Main control unit # 304 CPU
# 306 ROM
# 308 RAM
# 400 First sub-control unit # 404 CPU
# 406 ROM
# 408 RAM
# 500 Second sub-control unit # 600 Discharge control unit h0 Digestion hold display h1 1st hold display h2 2nd hold display h3 3rd hold display h4 4th hold display # 285 Digestion hold display area

Claims (25)

And Table viewable display means a plurality of types of icons,
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game machine equipped with
At least a part of the area in the display means is an icon display area,
At least a part of the icon display area is a first display area,
At least a part of the icon display area is a second display area,
The display means is means for displaying the number of suspensions by the number of icons displayed in the second display area,
One of the icons displayed in the second display area is displayed in the first display area in the display means when the symbol variation display is started,
The display means, the first display is a table viewable means,
The display means is a table viewable means a second display,
The display means, the third display a table viewable means,
The first display is a display including a first icon,
The first display is a display including a second icon,
The first icon is an icon displayed in the icon display area,
The second icon is an icon displayed in the second display area,
The second display means that the display mode of the first icon in the first display (hereinafter referred to as “first mode”) is the display mode of the second icon in the first display. (Hereinafter referred to as “the second aspect”) is a display including a display that changes,
The second display is a display including a display in which the second aspect changes to the first aspect .
Before SL and the third display is that of a display that the first embodiment includes a display that changes to the second embodiment,
The third display is a display in which the second aspect does not change to the first aspect .
The second display is a display configured to be displayed after the first animation is displayed on the display means,
When the first animation is displayed on the display means, Ri there when at least a portion of the first animation overlaps at least a portion of the other icons displayed in the icon display area,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the first display, the second display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The determination result corresponding to the first icon in the first display and the determination result corresponding to the second icon in the second display are the same result,
The determination result corresponding to the second icon in the first display and the determination result corresponding to the first icon in the second display are the same result.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The first animation is an animation that changes a display mode of an icon displayed in the icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
The first icon is an icon displayed in one of the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The display means, the second animation is Viewing possible means,
The second animation is an animation that reduces the number of icons displayed in the second display area when the number of holdings decreases.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The display means, the third animation is Viewing possible means,
The third animation is an animation that increases the number of icons displayed in the second display area when the number of holdings increases.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
The display means, a fourth animation are Viewing possible means,
The fourth animation is an animation that erases an icon displayed in the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
The display means, the fifth animation are Viewing possible means,
The fifth animation is an animation in which an icon displayed in the icon display area may be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
The symbol variation display comprising a Viewing possible symbol display means,
The first animation is an animation that is started and ended during the execution of the symbol variation display once.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
Before Stories second state like are different display mode and the first state-like,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10,
The first icon is an icon displayed at a first display position,
The second icon is an icon displayed at a second display position.
A game stand characterized by that.   It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 11,
  The display means is a means capable of executing the second display when a second condition is satisfied,
  The second condition is a condition that is satisfied except when the operation means is operated during display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.   A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
  The second icon is an icon displayed on the display means as a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by that.   The game table according to claim 13,
  A determination unit for determining whether or not to execute the determination,
  A prefetch notice means capable of executing the prefetch notice;
With
  The prefetch notice unit is a unit capable of executing the prefetch notice when a first prefetch notice condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.   15. The game table according to claim 14, wherein
  The establishment requirement of the first prefetch notice condition is a requirement including at least that the result of the success / failure determination is a result of the first success / failure determination,
A game stand characterized by that.   The game stand according to claim 14 or 15,
  The requirements for establishing the first look-ahead notice condition are requirements including at least winning the first notice lottery,
  The first notice lottery is a notice lottery that is won with a first probability.
A game stand characterized by that.   A game stand according to any one of claims 14 to 16,
  The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice when a second prefetch notice condition is satisfied,
  The second prefetch notice condition is different from the first prefetch notice condition.
A game stand characterized by that.   A game stand according to claim 17,
  The requirement for establishment of the second prefetch notice condition is a requirement including at least that the result of the success / failure determination is a result of the second success / failure determination,
A game stand characterized by that.   The game table according to claim 17 or 18,
  The requirements for the establishment of the second look-ahead notice condition are requirements including at least winning the second notice lottery,
  The second notice lottery is a notice lottery that is won with a second probability.
A game stand characterized by that.   A game stand according to any one of claims 14 to 16,
  A first control means;
  Second control means capable of executing control based on a command from the first control means;
With
  The second control means is a means provided on a separate substrate from the first control means,
  The second control means is means capable of controlling the display means,
  The second control means is means including determination means for determining whether to perform the prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by that.   The game machine according to claim 20, wherein
  The second control means is a means composed of a plurality of control boards.
A game stand characterized by that.   The game table according to claim 20 or 21,
  The case where the first prefetch notice condition is satisfied is a case where the determination unit determines to perform the prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by that.   A game stand according to any one of claims 17 to 19,
  A first control means;
  Second control means capable of executing control based on a command from the first control means;
With
  The second control means is a means provided on a separate substrate from the first control means,
  The second control means is means capable of controlling the display means,
  The second control means is means including determination means for determining whether to perform the pre-reading notice,
  The case where the second prefetch notice condition is satisfied is a case where the determination unit determines to perform the prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by that.   24. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 14 to 23, wherein:
  The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing a continuous notice as the prefetch notice.
  The continuous notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of times the symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.   25. A gaming table according to claim 24, wherein
  The continuous notice is a notice that is continuously performed during the execution of the plurality of symbol variation displays.
A game stand characterized by that.